PF 3109 .N3 Copy 1 li li^iiliniinli;; !i n ii r i. I II II III l!| ' inn jn lilli ! Hi. ifP'fii liil'ISiiiijIiiiiSiiiiHiriijii.,., .„ ,..„...,.. . ■ IP {library of congress. I f [SMITHSONIAN DEPOSIT.] l UNITED STATES OE AMERICA. COMPLETE PRACTICAL GRAMMAR GERMAN LANGUAGE INCLUDING EXERCISES FOR BEGINNERS, FOR THE ADVANCED. BY THE REV. FR.NEEBE, PH. DR. OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MARBURG, CLERGYMAN OF THE GERMAN LUTHERAN CHURCH, GERMAN MASTER AT ST. PETER's-COLLEGE SCHOOL, EATON SQUARE, AND EXAMINER OF GERMAN AT THE COLLEGE OF PRECEFTORS. LONDON: WILLIAMS AND NORGATE, 14 HENEIETTA STREET DULAU AND CO., 37 SOHO SQUARE ; LONGMAN AND CO., PATERNOSTER ROW. EDMONSTON AND DOUGLAS, EDINBURGH. 7 1847. LONDON I PRINTED BY WILLIAM WATTS, CROWN COURT, TEMPLE BAR. TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE LORDS THE LORD ASHLEY, AND THE LORD SANDON, AS A PROOF OF THEIR LORDSHIPS' PATRONAGE OF THE LANGUAGE, AND AS AN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF THEIR MANY KINDNESSES, THIS WO RK IS, BY PERMISSION, MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED, BY THE AUTHOR LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. To the Library of His Royal Highness Prince Albert, 10 copies. His Serene Highness Prince Edward of Saxe Weimar. The Lord Ashley, 2 copies. The Lady Ashley, 2 copies. Honourable Antony Ashley. Honourable Francis Ashley. Honourable Maurice and Evelyn Ashley. Thomas Addison, M.D. George E. Anson, Esq. Honourable Mrs. Anson. M. Ancell, Esq. Thomas P. Anderson, Esq. C. J. B. Aldis, M.D. S. Ashwell, M.D., 2 copies. B. G. Babington, M.D. J. Gurney Barclay, Esq. Ford Barclay, Esq. Robert Barclay, Esq., 2 copies. F. Barlow, Esq. Lord Beaumont. William Bell, M.D. James Bell, Esq. Frederick Bird, M.D. Miss Booth. Colonel Bouverie. E. W. Brayley, jun., Esq. J. Bright, M.D. Richard Bright, M.D. Rev. M. Bright, B.D. LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. Mrs. John Bringle. W. Bromet, M.D. Mrs. Mary Bryant. J. S. Buckingham, Esq. Edward Bullock, Esq. The Lord Canning. Viscountess Castlereagh. Edmund Coates, Esq., 5 copies. Sir James Clark, Bart., M.D., Physician to Her Majesty and His Royal Highness Prince Albert. Dr. Copland, F.R.S. The Lord Courtenay. The Lady Courtenay. The Hon. and Rev. C. L. Courtenay, Chaplain to the Queen. The Earl Cowper, 3 copies. P. Curie, M.D. Lord Colborne. Sir David Davies, M.D., Physician to Her Majesty the Queen Dowager. Henry Davies, M.D., 2 copies. William Devey, Esq. G. D. Dermott, Esq. The Lord Dudley De L'Isle, 3 copies. Harris Dunsford, M.D. The Right Honourable Colonel Darner, M.P., 4 copies. The Lord Bishop of Durham. The Lord Ebrington. Lady Ebrington. The Rev. John Evans. Str. E. Eyre, Esq. Edwin Fagg, Esq. R. Ferguson, M.D., F.L.S., Physician to Her Majesty. Lord Foly. Sir C. F. Forbes, M.D., K.C.H. John Forbes, M.D., F.R.S. The Earl Fortescue, 2 copies. LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. Lady Fortescuc. Lady Eleanor Fortescue. Francis Fox, Esq. Thomas Fowler, Esq. The Honourable Mrs. Eraser. Thomas Fuller, Esq. Rev. J. D. Glennie. Richard Godson, Esq., Q.C., M.P. Richard Godson, jun., Esq., 2 copies J. R. Gower, Esq. Sir George Grey. Lady Grey. Honourable Lady Dowager Grey. The Lord Robert Grosvenor. Samuel Gurney, sen., Esq. G. Hadley, Esq. Rev. — Halford. Marshall Hall, M.D. The Duchess of Hamilton, 2 copies. Cornelius Hanbury, Esq. Edwin Harris, Esq. The Earl of Harrowby, 5 copies. John Hatchard and Son. Bisset Hawkins, M.D. H. Hay ward, Esq. Rev. R. H. Herschell. John Hill, Esq. Thomas Hodgkin, M.D. Mrs. Howes. S. B. Howlett, Esq. Rev. G. T. Hudson, A.M., Chaplain to Her Majesty the Queen Dowager, 2 copies. J. R. Hume, M.D., 2 copies. — Home, M.D. Sir Fitzroy Kelly, M.P., 3 copies. Rev. Ch. S. Kennaway, Trinity Chapel, Brighton. A. Klaftenberger, Esq. UST OF SUBSCRIBERS. C. Lang, M.D. R. G. Latham, M.D. J. Laurie, M.D. — Little, M.D. Edmund Lloyd, Esq. C. Locock, M.D., Physician to Her Majesty. R. W. S. Lutwidge, Esq., 2 copies. Rev. D. W. Marks. George Bellasis Masfen, Stafford. Ch. Massay, Esq. Daniel May, Esq. J. Moore, M.D. Mrs. Murray, Sudbury, Suffolk. John Murray, Esq. Robert Nairne, M.D. R. A. Nelson, Esq. Col. North, 2 copies Baroness North, 2 copies Charles Nottidge, Esq., 2 copies. B. F. Outram, M.D., F.R.S., F.S.A. The Lord Palmerston, 2 copies. — Parker, M.D. S. T. Partridge, M.D. R. B. Pennigton, Esq., 2 copies. G. J. Pennington, Esq. W. Pennington, Esq. Hon. Lt.-Col. Pennant, M.P., 2 copies. Fr. R. Philp, M.D. Lord Powlett. J. Pereira, M.D. B. W. Procter, Esq. J. Ridge, M.D. E. Rigby, M.D., F.L.S. Edward Robinson, Esq. Hamilton Roe, M.D. F. W. Rogers, Esq, LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. Honourable Granville Ryder, M.P. The Lady Georgiana Ryder. Hon. Miss Ryder. Hon. Dudley Ryder. Hon. Henry Ryder. Mrs. Frederick Ryder. The Lord Sandon, 10 copies. The Lady Frances Sandon, 5 copies. John Sandilands, Esq. Captain Edward Saurin, R.N. Lady Mary Saurin. W. Gr. Saurin, Esq. Sir James South, 3 copies. E. J. Seymour, M.D., F.R.S. George Smyth, M.D. Rev. — Stratten. John Stewart, Esq., M.P. Alexander P. Stewart, M.D. Leonard Stewart, M.D. The Lord Dudley C. Stuart, 6 copies. Abel Stuart, M.D., 4 copies. Emily Dowager Lady Sunield, 2 copies. His Grace the Duke of Sutherland, 4 copies. Miss Sweet. Richard Thompson, Esq. F. E. Thompson, Esq. R. B. Todd, M.D., F.R.S. Thomas Turner, M.D., 2 copies. Rev. W. H. Turner. Rev. R. Walpole. T. J. Watson, Esq. LL.D., 4 copies. Thomas Watson, M.D. Mrs. Wilks, Nursling Rectory, near Southampton, 3 copies. James Williamson, Esq. C. W. Williams, M.D. James R. Wyatt, Esq., Tonbridge Wells, 4 copies. Mrs. James Wyatt, 3 copies. The Earl of Zetland. PREFACE. This work is the fruit of many months' labour, and it owes its appearance to kind friends whose names I have the honour to publish in the List of Subscribers. I have also been honoured with the signature of His Royal Highness Prince Albert, which shews that His Royal Highness has approved of my work. I am aware of the many deficiencies it will contain ; however no Grammar has yet appeared without them. As for the declension of nouns, I have followed the system of Eulenstein, the best yet adopted ; and to correspond to the wishes of many of my Pupils, I have added to the table of declension of nouns a complete declension of nouns with the adjective, the article, and without it, in order to shew to the Student at once the various terminations of nouns specified throughout the declension. The noun is variously exemplified by examples according to the principle of its declension ; and the adjective follows, with the degrees of comparison, in alpha- betical order. As soon as the Pupil is able to pronounce the single and compound letters with the article, he is to exercise the declension either orally or by writing. When this is ac- complished, he will be obliged to attend to the verb ; and, in consequence of that, to practise the exercises by writing, and by attending to the study of the parts of speech, systematically arranged, the nature of which is variously explained by ex- amples, both in the Etymology and Syntax. With immediate attention to reading and translation, the Student will soon be able to commence conversation. When the course of exercises is finished by writing, the Pupil should lay aside exercises alto- gether, and a well-informed Master should guide him farther 11 PREFACE, by easy composition. I have avoided any passage of the Bible and of Authors as examples, as I do not approve of the correct- ness of the former and of the singularities of the latter. I re- commend reading the New Testament (Gospel of St. John) after a few lessons, which will be an introduction to easy litera- ture, and will shew the incorrectness and simplicity of the language ; yet it will be a guide how to distinguish the simila- rity of the English with the German. If the student be familiar with one of the Gospels, and any other easy work in connection with the Scripture, he will, after some exercise, be able to read the easier parts of an author, which is undoubtedly Schiller, recommended both for the elegance of his prose and poetry. According to this method I have even succeeded in teaching chil- dren to understand and speak the language after a few months' exercise. I abstain from specifying a time when a Student should be able to master the language, as the Pupil must be able to acquire the language, and the Master qualified to teach it. As for the practice of the language, the Pupil should read, translate (both from the German and the English), write, and also con- verse, in order to acquire the idioms by conversation. The author hopes that these suggestions will be acknowledged by those who really are anxious to acquire the language ; and trusts that it will be also a guide to those who are obliged to study without the help of a Master. Those distinguished and kind persons to whose families the author has had the honour of giving instruction will best reward him for his perseverance by their continued kind patronage. The author hopes, in conclusion, that this work may be con- sidered, not as a mere attempt to write a Grammar, but as a guide both to the public at large and to private establishments. FR. NEEBE. London, June 25th, 1847. 7, Broadly Street, Blandford Square. CONTENTS. FIRST DIVISION.— ETYMOLOGY. PAGE § 1. German Alphabet -------- l Compound Vowels and Diphthongs - - - - - 3 Compound Consonants ------ 4 § 2. The Definite Article - - 5 § 3. The Indefinite Article 5 § 4. The Genders of Nouns - - 5 The sense of Nouns is changed if the Article be changed - 7 §5. Declension of Nouns --------8 Table of the Declension of Nouns ----- 9 § 6. Examples of Nouns and Adjectives declined with the Articles - - - - - - - --10 First Declension - - - - - - - 1 Second Declension - - - - - - --14 Third Declension - - - - - - -19 Fourth Declension - - - - - - --21 § 7. Vocabularies of Nouns of the four Declensions - - - 23 First Declension - - -, - - - --23 Second Declension ------- 25 Third Declension - - - - - - - - 27 Fourth Declension 28 j 8. Formation of Nouns - - 31 Nouns compounded with other Words - - - 32 Nouns compounded with Nouns - - - - - 33 Parts of speech which may be used as Nouns - - - 34 § 9. Declension of proper names - - - - - - - 35 §10. Formation of Adjectives ------- 37 §11. Comparison of Adjectives - ------ 39 The regular comparison - - - - - -39 The irregular comparison - - - - - --40 M 2. Vocabularies of Adjectives with their Degrees of Comparison, 41 — 49 CONTENTS. PAGE §13. Adjectives declined with Nouns or Pronouns . 49 With the Genitive - - - 49 the Dative - - - 50 the Accusative - - - - - - - 52 Adjectives which differ in both languages - - - 52 § 14. The Numerals: The Cardinal Numbers - - - - - --53 Observations on the Cardinals - 54 — 56 The Ordinal Numbers - - - - - - - 56 Numeral Pronouns - 57, 58 § ] 5. Pronouns : Personal Pronouns - - - - - - - - 59 Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns - - - - - 6 1 Absolute Possessive Pronouns - - - - - - 62 Remarks on Absolute Possessive Pronouns 64 Demonstrative Pronouns - - - - - - 64 Relative Pronouns - 66 Interrogative Pronouns - - - - - - - 68 Indefinite Pronouns - - - - - - -69 §16. Auxiliary Verbs of Tenses : Spabtn, to have 70 ©Ct)rt, to be ........ 72 SJBcrben, to become 74 §17. The Regular Active or Transitive Verb - - - - 75 §18. Passive Voice - . ... 77 §19. The Auxiliary Verbs of Mood: £a(Ten, to allow - - - 78 SRuffett, to be obliged - - - - - - - 80 ©often, to be compelled - 81 SBotten, to be willing ------- 82 £)tttfen, to dare - - - - . - - - - 83 $6nnen, to be able 85 $K6gen, to like - 86 § 20. Irregular Verbs - - - - - - 87 First Class - 88 Second Class 88 Third Class 92 Fourth Class - - - - - 93 Fifth Class 94 Sixth Class --------- 97 § 21. Neuter or Intransitive Verbs 98 — 104 § 22. Reflective Verbs - - 104 § 23. Impersonal Verbs - - - - - - - - 105 CONTENTS. PAGI § 24. Compound Verbs: Compound Inseparable 100 Compound Separable 107 Compound Separable and Inseparable - - - - 109 Double Compound Verbs 109 Compounds Separable - - - - - - - 1 1 1 Compounds Inseparable - - - - - - - 1 1 1 Separable Verbs compounded with Adverbs - - - - 1 1 1 Inseparable Verbs compounded with Nouns or Adjectives - 111 § 25. Adverbs - ........ 112 Adverbs of Time - - - - - - - - 1 1 3 Adverbs of Place - - - - - - - 114 Adverbs of Number - - - - - - 1 15 Adverbs of Qualification - - - - - 1 1 5 Adverbs of Affirmation - - - - - --11 G Adverbs of Negation - - - - - - - 1 1 G Adverbs of Doubt - - 117 Adverbs of Comparison - - - - - - - 1 1 7 Adverbs compounded with Nouns - - - - - 1 1 8 Adverbs derived from Adjectives 118 Adverbs derived from Verbs - - - - - - 118 § 26. Prepositions : The Genitive 119—122 The Dative 122 The Accusative - - - 127 The Dative and Accusative - 129 Prepositions compounded with the Article - - - - 132 with roeldSet .... 134 with the Adverb ba - - - - 135 with Prepositions - - - - 135 List of all Prepositions - - - 136 § 27. Conjunctions - - 137—150 § 28. Interjections - - - - - - - - - 150 SECOND DIVISION.— SYNTAX. § 1 . The Article : The Definite Article is used - - - - - -152 The Definite Article is not used - - - - - - 153 The Indefinite Article is used - - - - - - 1 54 CONTENTS. PAGE § 2. The Cases : The Nominative - - - - . _ --154 The Genitive - 155 The Dative 161 The Accusative - - - - - _ . -167 § 3. The use of the Verb - - - - - - - - ] 70 Numbers and Persons - - - - - . -170 Tenses : The Present - - - - 172 The Imperfect ------__ 172 The Perfect - 173 The Pluperfect - - - - - - - -173 Moods : The Indicative - - - 174 The Subjunctive - -174 The Conditional 176 The Imperative 178 The Infinitive - - - - - - - --179 Participles : The Present - - - - - - - - - 183 The Past - - - - 186 The Future 188 §4. The Construction of the German Language - - - - 189 Principal sentences which do agree with the English - - 189 Sentences which do not agree with the English - - - 190 Dependent or subordinate Sentences - - - - 195 Additional Remarks on Punctuation - - - - . 201 The Comma - - - - - - - --201 The Colon - - - - - -■ - - 203 The Semicolon - - - - - - - - . 203 Rules explaining the prefix £>et before Verbs - 204 Verbs compounded with Prepositions and Adverbs - - - 206 Exercises ----- 207 FIRST DIVISION. ETYMOLOGY. GERMAN. ENGLISH 21 a . . Aa . 23 b . Bb . § 1. GERMAN ALPHABET. l'RONUNCIATION. WORDS. ahy like garden . <&tab\, steel; 5B rf . ^ stronger at the end \ becomes , before a consonant . J Sfyeben, to lift ; jkeben, to endea- vour ; mben, to weave. . i fetf)ten, to fight; forbetn, to de- ls f • F f . .*/, as in English J ^^ . ^ mo ^ © 9 . . G g . . #e, like g in game ; as, gotten, to fo worth; gegeben, ey&ew. like g in cm, dew; gtyein, t or r, but lengthens | Rhine. the syllables ' 3 i .. Ii ..e, as in English i in ( ^"i» *° him > M>, ^ee; ftc3^>, &i?z I Atwwfl^. f jung, young; 3orf>, yo&e; 3u= 3) .. Jj .. yo*, like y in year.... | bd> TO tr*A. _ ', , . _ .. . . C Settc, chain; Slaw, complaint; St K k . kah, as m English, but \ s ^ . ^ knee; $ ntA is never mute ( man% , ^^ ^ T , ,_ . „ ,. . C £a$S, salmon; £ob, praise; %{ ..LI ..cZ, as in English...... | ^ ^ ^ ,, , n v i f ^««t, mark; #Rontag, Jft, lease ; tyalme, palm-tree; " ^ " V ■ 1 > & * ^urput, purple. ^ ~ . • -n t i r £Uialm, steam; queer, cross; C a . . Q q . . to, as in English .... J ^ „ . J ^ & | Uuefte, spring oj water. cvj -d , • -c- t i r3tob,wteZ; vein, clean; 9uttet, 3ft t ,.Kr . cr, as m English J ir • u © f . . S s . . cs, as in English ©anb, sand; fagte, said. jj or $ . . sz ors . . es, at the end of words C fag, sa£; f#icf>, comprehensible; or syllables | ©cms, tf/oosc. fct .. Tt .. tSh, as in English 5 * afcl > &oar ^* *<**, taUom ; I Zeis, day. Like ts before *ta«*o»; Nation, «Z/ow- { ance. U u . . U u . . oo, as in English ( um ahout > Umfrei-5, circumfe- \ rence. 93 » . . V v ./ow, as in English, like/ i" ^eUrf>en, woZe*; <8olf, ^eo^?/c; ( 93iottne, violin. 2B m . . W w . . ve, as in veil ( SGBett, worZo 7 ; mo, w&cre; SBetF, I worAr. ETYMOLOGY. g GERMAN. ENGLISH. PRONUNCIATION. WORDS. I jr . . X x . . ttf, as in six ( Santippe, shrew; j?ere, witch; I 2Irt, axe. 9 9 . . Y y . . ^>s^7nobe, synod; fcafyfu*, da£- 3 j . . Z z . . tset } like fe J B«I?n, foo^A; jart, tender; jeU ( gen, to s^ew ; Boll, e'wcA. The following Vowels form compound Vowels and Diphthongs. «, e, i, ( tt ), 0, u. COMPOUND VOWELS. GERMAN. ENGLISH. PRONUNCIATION. WORDS. 2le d . . Ae ae (d) . as a in share We^ve, ear of grain; JDcU ne, Dane; tfrdfoe, crow. Oe 6 . . Oe oe (6) . . as ew in the French fewr . . . .ftoren, to disturb ; @e= (their) \)h,heari7ig; £6rper, Ue u . . Ue ue (u) . . as u in the French put $uf)l, coa/; 2Runse, (was able) coin; nutter n, sober. DIPHTHONGS. 2ut au . . Au au . . as ou in mouse 9)iau$, mouse ; auf , ^joora; 2auf, course. (£i ei . . Ei ei ) . r9\eiru>it, purity; brci, €9 «9 . . Ey ey ) as y m by > my \ three; met), abbey. $U at . . Ai ai ) broader than the former, as eye f Richer, guager; 33atjer, 2fy at) . . Ay ay j OHuge) v Bavarian. ie . . ie . . like ee in seed Suege, ,/%/,* trie, Aow ; (aucb, t breath; id), i". /fd)einen, to shine; fd)0= 6«ft.. Schsch .. like Min English { ^tospare; mUn, \ to harm; is oronounced sepa- \ , ' , , rately,as i **' W«u«*«»oww v mouse. Gt ft . • St st . . as in «tofid |^ en ' < osW >* ftctn ©pfp Vfpf & IT stone; fhtmm,<£ttm&. Sp sp . . as in Spain, speak ©pemten, fprecfjen. p f f (^fwni>» pound; yfeil, ^ I arrow; ^pftopf, cork. Ph ph . . like fin Pharisee, physical . . . ^arifder; pWfcf). tz . . stronger than ts f as in czar. . . . gaar; Jptfce, &ea£; nufje, ss . . is only used in the middle of ( fyaffen, to hate; fafien, words 1 #o seize. sz . . is only used atthe end of words C gtofj, large; gtdgftcb, or syllables ( frightful. Some Germans pronounce f before t and p as sh ; but & is neither correct nor elegant. Two similar compound vowels lengthen syllables or words; as, act, ee, oo; 5tal, eel; ©eete, soul; 23oot, boat. Two similar compound consonants shorten syllables or words ; as, cf, ff, mm, nn, pp, tr, 99, tt ; 3iotf, coat; [cutoff, rugged; frumm, crooked; sjRann, man; fnapp, close; ffart, staring; Stacjgc, flag; rtett, neat; fett, fat. The compound consonants fch, $, and fj must never be separated in writing; as, menfefcucf), human; 9ftu§=en, caps; Wufi, nut; Plural, ^uf^fe nuts. ETYMOLOGY. ) § 2. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE compared with the Demonstrative Pronoun that, bcr, bie, bat. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Fern. Neuter. N. bet, bcr, bie,bie, bctf, ba$, the, that. N. bic, bie, the, those G. beS,beffen, ber, beren, beS, beffen, of the, of that. G. ber, bercn, of the, of those D. bem, bem, ber, bcr, bcm, bem, to the, to that. D. ben, bencn, to the, to those A. ben, ben, bie, bie, ba$, ba$, the, that. A. bie, bie, the, those The Pronouns: ifyr, her, their ; unfer, our; euer, your; 3f>t, your; biefer, this ; jener, that ; roelcher, which, who ; jeber, each ; are, declined like the Definite Article. § 4. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE compared with the Conjunctive Possesive Pronoun my, mem, meine, mein. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. N. ein, mein, eine, meine, ein, mein, a, my. N. meine, my. G. eineS, meineS, einer, meiner, eineS meineS, of a, of my. G. meiner, of my. D. einem, meinem, einer, meiner, einem, meinem, to a, to my. D. meinen, to my. A. einen, meinen, eine, meine, ein, mein, a, my. A. meine, my. § 4. THE GENDERS OF NOUNS. A. Masculines. GENERAL RULE: a. The names of winds, seasons, months and days, also those of rivers, are masculine, except bie SBofga, Wolga ; bie ©cfyefbe, Scheld ; bie Ober, Oder, and others. o. Nouns which end in rid>, ling, cmt, as, 5Butf)ertd), Tyrant, Studying, fugitive, (Jomebiant, performer, are masculine. The rest are declined as in English, and applied in the same way. D GENDER OF NOUNS. • B. Feminities. GENERAL RULE : a. Names of women, or Nouns referring to them, are feminine, except bat $rduletn, a young lady of rank; bat Srauen-- jtmmer, a gentlewoman, married or not ; bat 3Betb, the wife; bat $Kdbd)en, the girl. b. Those which end in e, ei, ew, fyett, in, inn, kit, fcfyaft, ung, an), un?, are feminine ; as, bic 25tume, the flower ; bie Stdnbelct, playfulness; bie 9Ibtct), the Abbey ; bic Rofyeit, rudeness; bte ©drtncrin, the gardner's wife; bic $aifertnn, the Empress; bic ©rdftnn, the Countess; bic 23ttterfett, bitterness; bic 5einb= fcpafr, enmity ; bic £>offnung, hope; bte Spmafy, the marriage; bic %mun), poverty; except bet $nabe, the boy; bat @c= fd)tct, the wise; bcr $3anfe(mutf), inconstancy; bet £ef= benmutf), heroism. C. Neuters. GENERAL RULE : a. The names of metals, countries, and localities, are neuter; as, bat @olb, (the) gold; bat ncrbttcbe £>eutfd)lanb, the north of Germany; bat freimbltcfte ^ftannfyetm, the friendly-looking Mannheim; except bet <&taty, (the) steel; bcr Xombad, pinch- beck; bcr ^in!, zinc; bic ^lanna, platina; bte ©cf)roeis, Switzer- land; bic ^falj, Palatinate ; bic £cmfi$, Lausatia; bic £urfet, Turkey ; and all in ci are feminine. b. All words beginning with @c, as bat ©eprdge, the coinage, &c, are neuter. c. All ending in d>en, letn, and tfyum, as bat 23ruberd?en, the little brother; bat ^ndbtein, the little boy; bat jpetbentf>um, Hea- thenism, are neuter, except bcr SKetcf>tf?um, wealth. d. Those formed from Infinitives, as, bat Saufen, the run, running, and letters of the alphabet, as bat @, the G, bat *B, the V, are neuter. In compound Nouns the gender of the last is used, as bcr $elb= marfdjatt, Fieldmarshal. The sense of the following Nouns is changed if the Articles be changed; as, £)er 35anb, the volume ; bat 23anb, the ribband, tie. GENDER OF NOUNS. 7 £>et ^ucfet, the back, hump; bie "Sudd, an ornament of metal for horses' necks. £)er S5unb, the confederacy; bat s £unb, the bundle. £er Qtfyor, the chorus; bat Gfyor, the choir. £>er (£rbe, the heir; bat (£rbe, the inheritance. £>et ©etfH, the hostage; bic @ei$ef, the whip, scourge; £et jpafr, the hold, clasp; bie Spaft, the imprisonment; ba$ jpaft, the name of an insect. £et £ar$, the Hercynian forest; bat Jipatj, rosin. £>er Jgeibe, the heathen ; bie jpctbe, the heath. 2)cr jput, the hat ; bie jjut, the guard, the pasture. £)er liefer, the jawbone ; bie liefer, the pine-tree. 2)et $unbe, the customer; bie $unbe, intelligence. 2>et better, the guide ; bie better, the ladder. £)et Sofyn, the reward ; bat Sofyn, the wages. 2>ie Wanbel, the almond ; bat 9ftanbef, a number of 15. £>ie SDtatf , the boundary, 8 ounces of silver ; bat tylaxt, the marrow. £>er 9)?afr, the mast of a ship ; bie 9ftaft, the fattening of pigs or cattle. £>et 9ttenfd), the human being; bat 9ftenfd), the wench. £)er 5^e(fer, the surveyor ; bat 2ftefiet, the knife. £>er Dfym (Ofjeim), the uncle ; bie Ofym (^m), the awm, awme (a measure of two pails.) £)et ©tfxuier, shivering, horror ; £)a$ ©djauer, the shelter, a shower of rain. £)et ©c^)i(b, the shield ; bat <&<$)i\b, the ensign. £)er ©cfmwlfl, a bombastic style ; bie ©cbroulft (©efcbroutft), the swelling. £et @ee, the lake ; bie ©ee (bat ^eer), the sea. £)et ©profle, the sprout, shoot ; bie ©ptofie, the step of a ladder. £>ie ©teuer, tax, contribution ; bat ©teuer, the helm, rudder. £)er ©tift, a piece of wire, brass, or lead ; bat ©tift, monastery, convent. £>er £f>etf , a part of the whole ; bat &f>eil, the share, portion. £)et £f)0t, a foolish person ; bat Xfyox, the gate. £)et 33erbien|t, earnings, income ; bat SSetbienft, the merit. 2)te 3£ef>r, defence ; bat 3Bef>r, the dyke. £>er ^eug, stuff, materials ; bat 3eug, tools. ( 8 ) § 5. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Nouns are declined in four ways, according to their endings in the genitive singular. The singular of the first declension undergoes no change, all the cases being like the nominative. The second declension takes g in the genitive. The third declension takes n or en, eng or ng, in the genitive, and all the other cases end in en. The genitive singular of the fourth declension is formed by the addition of eg to the nominative, and the dative by the addition of e. This e, however, in some words, is omitted both in the genitive and dative. FORMS OF THE CASES. Singular. The nominative points out the declension, gender, and ending of the Noun. The genitive ends in g (second declension) ; n, en, ng, eng (third declension) ; eg or g (fourth declension) ; or it remains like the nominative (feminines only remain so). The dative ends in n or en (third declension), and in e (fourth declension), or it remains like the nominative. The accusative ends in en or n (third declension), or it remains like the nominative. Plural. The nominative ends in et, en, ec ; chen, (etn ; e ; at or or ; n ; and in en (second declension) ; in en or n (third declension) ; in e or et (fourth declension). The genitive remains like the nominative, or it is like the nomi- native singular. The dative ends always in n or en (first declension) ; eln, en, or em (second declension) ; n or en (third declension) ; en or em (fourth declension). The accusative ends like the nominative plural or singular. The vocatives are the same as the nominatives. FORMATION OF CASES. [. FEMININES. Sing. Plural. N. G. D. n, e, en. > > • — , it, — . A. j > • This declension is entirely femi- nine. The nominative singularis the same as the other cases. The plural is formed by the ad- dition of n when the singular ends in e, et, er, ie, oe,ce, fe, ffe ; except £orf)= tcr (pi o), Gutter (pi u). Monosyllables ending in a conso- nant form their plural by the ad- dition of e, and change a, o, u into d, 6, u(au is changed into du) ; except some which form their plural in en, and those which end in et (ey) } fyeit, in, inn, feir, fcfyaft, una,, ur, atfy, nifj, which form their plural with en. II. MASCULINES AND NEUTERS. Sing. N. G. g D. A. Plural. — , en, n. — , en, n. n, en, n. — , en, n. Masculines and neuters in el, en, et. Diminutives in chen or letn are neuter. Neuters in e. Masculines in ur or or. The above suffer no change in the plural. The following change a, o, u, into d, 6, u. Those which take n in the plural (neuters or mascu- lines). Those which take en in the plural (masculines). III. MA8CULINES. Sing. I Plural. n. — , — I n, en. g. n, en — , — . d. n, en: — , — . a. n, en, — , — . Masculines in e take n in the geni- tive and all the other cases. The following words are excep- tions, and take nS in the genitive, and en in the dative, which is continued through all the cases. All masculines (except ^atfaft, pa- lace, fourth declen- sion, and a few others) in ij?, ant, aft, et, pij?, it, ar, pf>, ent, 09, at, om, are taken from the Latin and Greek, and form their va- rious cases in en. German words in dr, fc, af, I5, lb, rr, frf), form all their cases in en. One neuter, ^etj, heart, belongs to this declension, and is irregular. It forms its genitive with ens. v. masculines and neuters. Sing. N. , - g. etf, d. e, - A. , " Plural. e, er. n, n. Words which are not mentioned in the preceding de- clensions belong to this declension. Their termina- tions in the plural are e or er. Masculines in e. Neuters in e. Masculines in er. Neuters in er. Most of them change a, 0, u, into a, 6, u (compare the first and se- cond declensions). The following examples have the same terminations, and occur in the same order as those given in this table of the four declen- sions. 10 DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. w c« c ^ CD H P P 53 hi M 3 CO <8 3 CO O CD O H -t-3 ni i— i o 3 1 — " n3 | CD 'a co •rH co CU E cd 5 ^3 a CO CU C8 p 3 c CD O w bo a s£ ^ : : ; Ph CO cT ^» -»■••• t h> P <1 hi o o cS a o 53 fco <3 E h» -S ! '. *> * c .s co cT h< ■!§'■• O ^ h. c g 53 .2 'a CD ^ h» CJ vr=» ^O ^O S a> h» C A /J va ^> .5 3 H § 13 CD w a «W p O P 0Q ffl H W H DO M 1 CD s i-s p V3 bp 'h p fc c3 nS M ^ 22 T3 P O c8 S3 1^ rP ^2 a CO ^ £» CU Is 53 ho a iS ^i-3 a3 cu 1h G3 ' CU Si n3 O CO W "5b O CD O u, hi 3 P< a> -a +3 3 s .S * w ! 4^ • BO h> h> U • 2J c3 c • 3 • • • *» ^ ** . S !_, <>> .21 2 CO O !/0 jO vO '0 ^ a * ^ «» ^Ofi^ ^Ofl<1 ^Ofi^ ^Ofi^ ^OP^ FIRST DECLENSION. 1 I P 03 o y^ -o ^o S A /> A A H 0Q PS I c ■S I d * 1 6 C ^ *- ^ 2 !=! ,0 § I i 1 -s § I i §< 2 j-» * *S ™ o at n **■* aa J ^ e e a> c c g • • • A * * :• 3 ■•■?:■:: f ^t • • • s= c a> « C (i> at • • • ^O £OQ^ £OQ«1 ^Ofl ?H 03 o O O 3 3 ; 03 C3- 3 Sh © PS 4H> 3 3> . j-> 3 : & • -l-a 3 3 3 3 £5 CO 3 ; 3 o 3 *3> • • <3 3 c 3 ^3 *> • 3 C » 3 • *9 3 u 3 e* J-> ! .2* S 3 cj 3 3 ^> VO v_» S-) v=> ^o jO jO '" sO © T3 *Sh pO ^ -»j . © . Oh ^ Oh CO © g -»H> o3 3,3 s fcJD *© 3 o <2 o s -5 2 O T3 I— H 1 3 <3 CO 03 -3 Oh Sh o a O 03 3 s-» . e£ 03 £ o 3 o 3 <_r 1 3 3 3 3 -2 3 3 • .a CO ■ eg ; ; 35 3 : & 3 3 3 3 3 ^ : : ® " 35 SH "co u s-» 3 S-> s-> ^ j-> • .° 3 3 Si ru> • -Si o 3 J2 ' ^> ^o • ^ «i> ^ vO • jO s> 3 £ o a «i ^on^ & Q «1 ^Ofl<^ ^Ofl CD CO In o * 1 'I c DO h-3 d 1 CO 1 00 "8 a Oh I CO s o T3 C •a -5 1 Oh CO d O t-c o Oh CD C o» C 1 1 CD o c o Oh c .22 *-> 64 ft! g Via. . <3 «e ; • o c *> i=j | £o i*"f "c • o s • , , .y* c o • • <3"> ,^> ® M ! e «o c: £ ES e o lo *-> Lo JO c <3 3 G d bJD >^ . o ^d CO CO i > O 1 CO CO 13 s d Oh 1 ■9 Ph 0> CD CO s O h3 d 8 C3 1 Oh GO o Oh 03 1 t-t 1 c3 -d +j 03 <3 cu CD 6 S-> * o d ; p S-> : © £ J 1 o w « i-* ^ ^ .5 jO .5 3 • £ ^OQ< &OQ < !2;Ofi^ ^Oflz;OQ«i 14 DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. CO CO ss b 8 I 1 w _j _ * 2 a s a §>...§ § s • • £ § • • • 3 • • • £ & : : : « >s • • • -g • • • ™ C rB 8 • • I : : : t • , • §■ ** .. _ _* : : : .1 c 6* £ • • • «- 2 .^ s s .s : : : s * • ' -2 S S .si 2 >o v/o >o a C «*— -Xi ./_ vo >d £; . O w fi Q K o co W CO CP 05 I & Is .E CO B K w >-» r^ o> O) ► Sn 0> s fcj 1 <3> £ e bQ 3 ^ .Si « 2 » B bJD rt B W I ' • • £ s : : : ^ __N _> £ • • 8 CD ?« tioti< £6c\< ^6q< ^dfi^ ^ o a ^ SECOND DECLENSION. 15 2 ^ ^ £ S s l I I 2 I * -a ~ * a ef £ ^ e ^ • ! ! P ** s • • • «r •&•:•- r • - » - "g . . . •« 2 g • • S3 4 19 •e • . . & : : : ® s • « . . . 5 »Q» • • • C* va *& : : : s : : : .2 s S .2 ^ : : : « • • • .2 £ Hi) 2 3 "- I I I 4 s 5 -a - !s j c I : : : ~ - ~ « f : : : £ « <£? v> ® «' • © 3, s:::b---^-- «, *» «, c . . . ^ g ^ ^ *, a : :• • « «» s « .S • • • *2i • • • « S j* e .5 • • • ,2 • «££'=; £ d A «i ^dfi^i ^dfl^ fc d Q «« £ d A «i fcdfl^ 16 DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. oa 03 •~S oa U oa J— i k» ft r^H O CD o o C3 .9 0) S u ^ .a Si oa en 03 02 3 ;§; : -3 ; • 1 : "& .5 *<* 3 • 4Q 3 • © c *3 3 03 «>> B © 3 s Q ■a : § : & 3 3 CD i-> o s 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 w s w c o o 3 ' -3 . en »-» 3 w • J*; e> o ■ _ > io !£ y^ V3 vQ yl> CD ya vO VD jC* 3 O ^3 . O ^03 n3 o o 3 o 03 3 g 5- 03 r* .9 be I "42 0) 03 I 03 ■a) 1 . 'ft •5 03 g3 03 r-j O be 03 3 o ->?> JE> ■« +3 o *? 3 Xe> a 5b E : 3 3 3 • S • © 3 3 © 3 3 •W) -3 o ^ S 3 3 >s> VQ I*» -J ->rv « I ».» S 3 [ A «v- ■W) £ 3 CJ o o C?3 o s»> ^ ! ^.o V) S "W> 3 W ia» w ■«> 3 « «k> o <3 «k> «rf "o t& jz jO ya ys "«^ • ' cn ya vo i^dfl^ ^dfi^ ^dp DD 3 3 » * 3 3 U- Jr" c c E rs ■Cj o» © 3 ■W) C o £35 S3 O O »j .3 C £ .H 5 US- 65 0) A 3 r/ U~> O ^. aj be a ,4 £j be rt :_ w *a — > JO /j V=» v& ^oflo £o«^ ^oq^ ^ofl^ ^oa^ 2 £ £ -5 3 j_, o o o +J o c o Td s-> 3 »o> 3- © . S H Ct «l O CS H * * >=> yc fc d p -^ 18 DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. £* tl © CO 5 o e cc CO © B .2 'w a. O 'Eh w. 3 § *s bo "* P © O o o o JO • • * B « '• c I IS) ' c e £> • ' ' «> w c « B b B b £ S o P c P « «... ,w %> u P JJ c A ** j^ c: «s «J W-t vQ o • • . 2 s « B • ^~N rB IS « P « *3> i 03 j-T TO te> • *> £>- c E p o SR b B b B g ttl» ej o> ti> TO C c «> « to p c g . • 85 »55 c TO o *> «> *» B « * • • a ■*fc-> TO s B o TO C -« TO B a ct « o &> a» o j> "o A JO ya v=» VD 'o • &6ti< 5^dQ 03 as CO 0) s be a J5 'es 73 0) s a en 3 0) *"* C c s_> c e tk> y^ . '?K g> «* ! o o .2? S H e 3 .25 •H >Q jO VD x> WO !o •a § -a o o be c a> be a> 03 £< 03 CD a> ,0 03 s 03 cS o be .s > 5 93 eg ^0) ^3 ">> -3 CD Bh *+3 3d 5 a> s i o 03 0) 0) CD be a 1S> 3 O — o c b a B c3 3 B B B o B B B B C B c o o be B B — B B u o B B B B 5 B at 3 B B 3 B 5 B 61 *3 o <£. ->^> s B o s B w ■«> £ B J_, m £ C ss Q# V o ^ S-» >£> E B 5 ^ Cn 01 -2J ^J o ^» o ai •^> ^» Ck» oi 3 >Q >o yj >s "S wo >Q S2 jO >Q o a 03 p h3 co .2 3 ao *cc +3 03 03 <4H O o 03 13 03 & r0 H3 03 03 "r-0 S 03 F* 4J c3 rO o 03 03 r0 02 03 +J i-S ,0 „ -M 1 X 03 ■3 bn o 1 C • , 18 F-l be g <3 o § <2 .£{ ,° ^ i 03 o JO v/O jQ jo T3 S '"ol ,o i— i sS o '? *Q in ^j h3 Fh £ o TJ £ be £ 1 03 't* t> O o O j^j g C3 03 <2 6 Fm -g 03 03 ■5 03 r0 03 o «S % > CO CD JO c$ e c o o o .2 O 03 r0 03 d -+J CJ o © •FH s£ s_> C C g £j «j o m «J o ^ ^ g . • 03 o C ^ ?_ Fh t t-> >e 03 03 O- « o r0 o ^ -y> £ C O O O vO -/O VD y» '©* , . . . ... £0 A> ,4 rd *J a. 0» a> ■J^ 3 o © ,_J c c 2 eii *"* 53 «o P^ 53 O u e &i £ -^> Si jQ >1> vO cy "3 ^ S3 a, ■» & B e 03 cc ^ rQ -4-5 o CQ QQ o ,4 S o3 1 ^3 bo p 2 J3 '53 >> -q ^3 03 .xa — *3 ~a -»J rS «o — r? ■>» » 3 <3 ■s£ * o ct£ &j o o d © at e e 53 «rf Jt >^» ?s 53 • ^5> e ' '^ ->s> E c j-> ■w g J-> ts> E a c &> &> o «* o o » o o ■=-» &i >2 O VO VQ /^. yO S 6) ■*Z ^ofi^ ^oq^ ^on^ £op«i ^oc^ ^ofi^ 22 DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. "3 O t CD Oh CD 3 'S „o 2 <55 o .2; o o Xi s CD 1 § a & 4 2 o jo i i—i Oh CD CD CD CD CO CD CD ® s o e &> CO 1 •s 3 o Oh s O o jQ ./O >0 ./O ^Ofi^ ^Ofl^ &OP ~ rfl CD u Bfl CD - •*-> z(. g o o ^ b 'tr - /> V bn ,,v O) cd ^ — C -i— o o rg o ^ CD TO 5 d S3 t-> &H CJ rf c3 CD CD CD O g > bo" bo d o t3 cd a tfQ. ♦J 10 o r ft) M ID e e Ck» VO m B rfcL ~«D <£. >£> ^0 ^n E tt ,_ rs TSJ n y=> V_> JZ> 7> tk> £ i2 • -3 ^OQ^ ^OP^ £ O Q «i b< CD -n CD > 43 •= -d °13~ t> ^ M cG* d -Z *& S ^o ,cj « t£ t> CD £ «g S3 .5 § "2 3 4^ 44 43 O o a, <3 & u B 43 'S CD <0 "5 CD CD -43 43 .43 -5 <3 >5 2 -a 2 5 CO bo * .2 ^ s O u B 4> *tt <^> fc» © © f» er* A /> /> A A /> CD 5 s o 43 H CD -tJ CD 53 d s o "5 CD 2 o S an CD CD CD a »© 3><£c§ © a yi yi a a A CD O d o 3 P r2 3 C ^ -5 - •S -6 -5 -5 3 - = 5 « S yo jO >o jo to yi 24 VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 1 * • H Ml . flj CO . l-B . rQ a> B 2 oj O 3 B _ cd cd cd cd cd » 5 «° S- ^"B^V> H •!!*?« nil iltlt I ^» C S3 £3 C C G «»»oo«j o e*> o s^> o # ** ->o "o 'o '«» "o 'o 'S !a !o /) ^ jo jo a Jo jS -^> rH <-j CD 5 ^ a . *a o ^ o B cc? o o 03 >H aig^S It •- 1 ^ B -s ^ hn i — i .... B g . . . . .2 ^ "13 B S *T £ £J £ <£ *t £* ^ o o E c c c e c c c c c e £3 £3 S3 C C C «J > o A >o ^> jo A .^ c^ IV «b» O ^* O «>> CJ o ej &> CJ O O O O CJ CD town power wall hand goose strengt hatche rB C9 B CO rQ B CO "I B B r3 CO S3 Bh CO rB o B CO -a B c ."B B fl CU M CO CO O CD CO CD CO CD CO co CD CD CD 01 o o 6J o o o o Si tj o CO o a. r-» 33 joy=>yitjt>joyoyoyojayo jo jz> jo jo VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. — >> :: T3 *d B o H _£T _rt ^> o> ^ k» 03 l +4 a 93 > ED 1 ft. 3D P 93 P CO £ 03 'co .9 S P §T3 ° 15 cd o -*-* — P s- 'ft « .5 '7* '3 1 E Ph a p co o o . > 03 1 03 E — El § E a 99 a> a 03 a as 03 03 cr o - Fh 03 03 03 03 _= -= — — -p ja xi :c o f- o 93 P ,ft ~ M ,a ■*-> +-J +j -i— ■*— +j +J eft 03 -ft w r- DO +J +- ■♦J i — * 5 o *« «*— CS **— ,+-» "^7 »£> 4* 2. *& Jl «" ** ^ *L *» >3 3 g> o § £ 2 3 jg c ■* ■* S?iyii)^^w?;3(fc»SwSgiP^H ^ ^ vo ./=> -o yz> yzt sz yzi VDv/O-OvO-OjOv/O^vO CO >-» CO co -ft co ■1 -§ 'S &2 p § c3 B ° 03 03 § £* p rt ^ .£ co « P t> kd a> ta ^-C ^ P c >^ >-»ft^ O • +2 « .-£■ I ! uu 111 9) O O C P J3> 1 ^ J? « -S' en .» /2>JZ>S^i/^VZiJZlJZt/ZiS5S-iJZiSLiVLi .2 fee a .S ^3 ^ S £ f, O 03 feD.P U co 03 03 o n3 W cr: y^ vz js sz> en . icy g o s ^ s s ^ a fa J> S. »2 !rr « % •^7 ^< *tj <- ^£> VO eo f» eo ?p h C?5 Q 03 3 V E a (h 03 s — ■ ' CO S3 hi 93 03 E ~ hfl CO - *- ♦3 a - 03 03 o> .5 £ fee ^ to o ^^ 93 r> 03 r 7n 'To 03 03 c $^ t: z? Q K © g © © -o j* yz> jz jz yz tc P 03 Fh fee fee _;- a fee BS| C 5 .« Ch o ftn O oft OR "S £ -5 B S 03 X2 *2J -o ^L S '2 c 3" « .— «i> ui_ *3> « o 2^ 53 -g s o ysssszszyzsdy^jsszyzfjztysyz P O o s CO .2 -2 .S « 2 "5 S S^ s 2 « 2 >< ^ x rP 03 H3 03 <5) en en 5 en C J= #1 tt> b » 8S &*- ■St 22 .2 3 a spoon grandso ie ward 93 'co CO 9) CO P p 03 03 03 ^3 03 93 — Ja ^a ? — ., r c£ "a* £5 §5 So (3 C ►3 jc» jz yz V5 /J >1» >S jO jO VO 26 VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. c J 42 2 w f> 3 » % *-> -Ej Ji> TO {§ 8) 64 © to to y^ to .2 • «: fl 5 fl g <-> 2 o 13 fg- fcs= fc= *g &ii© , v>'v>'y>'V>'y>'v>'y>'y>'y5 CSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSCS jO /i TO A to TO TO jO ./o .£» *5 S CJ vfj- TO fl.2 it ^> o ^> © © © a> co £ ffl (S ? a> o ^ <§ © © s_> -w> ■«> 5 c$ cs TO jO TO o3 ■3 £ S c ffl -J q3 b0 bJD C 03 , •sb.a s •C ° CD -p\ <» 2 » ZT sfl-i 3 ». e- {5 O ^> O o © © © © -y> ■«> -y> oj> ^> • CS CS CS CS CS CS /> ^1 /> /) A A w o © © O O 03 v^/ bD O ^H 1-a 05 CO a g » bJD cs •s ^ s 'o 3 &D £ •l D l « 1 ai co ,0 rC! CU a « ^ ^ 5 <>/ S £3 S_> J-> s-> w ■>& 1S> v> ■w •«>'«>'«) «rf «1> « « « « « « jQ /> VO jO »^> TO >o vo JO /> A .■&■§ ^ 2 .a § ^3 ,£J © © « s 44 >-> 2 QQ ° a ^ rQ 1=1 ?3 h3 «-cs *■* 855 Q be g -fa bo o ^a 0) CO P3 eo © © #0 S co HJ (— H CD Jg ,_! -^ ~ P^ ^ rS S 'l t! ^ 03 CD a ^ - a TO TO TO TO TO TO CD c r^ +r SJ c CSS. ^e 2 -« ^* eo » ■»t) « -w Q TO TO •«> ^ s-> -cs *12 CS CS TO TO ■WJ r2 'Hh a Oh r£5 3 VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 27 M 4 * t 1 T3 u t.- ~ yO " .^ = c g 00 t- 09 /z> -»-; • •s , » a « eg Si g) s 53 •^ w /-> ^3 o g *© ~ _g ^ © & <&=; £> £> © & \z& &$ ^ >i /I TO /i e<0 £ -5 +J £» . . •B 72 bo <■•> « a. rt o V -° ^ ^ a a) c O) be ~££ s*» S «T a* E •2: i-> <5 J^ /j <3 c ^> yz s>> -3 C o ®©^ eo eo © j_> $_, j_> j-> j-> ;_, »> m ^ o o o A ^> /i -/!» jO yo ?p P* S8 £ ,S '> e Ph ;|j 5f| if | sin fisUi ^P^zjo^is^ CL 3 bl).^ ^ Oc3oo r- 2 ^^"^ jg sa *s r * .J3 -o | ^^©^ £®g P-^^g:(3« 2 >^ a) ^o -o ys C3 3 « ■ "**- -S **- ^ ^ S^-Q^2 -" ^ ^> ^ -w « ©oooo 2 T *r .~ 'o c _ ^ ^3 ^ *g ^d rg 8 T3 o F4 a v^> 4r &, -*-> a cx «d @ 1o o JO c: fe* O be ^ ro ^H Fh o Td pq S a> Q 0} +j p0 ~ g) >t= •^- 55 Q » *& «X S o 0)^-5 ^ be*- » © <^ *<^ fiw^ -O VO >C ,/D jQ jO >& 28 VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 0) pa ^ o cd a pO CD iu & ^ Z- „- 73 s_> t^> « & © '-^£ $_. j-> i-> *-> «j cj cj o jo yi vo s^> a o X CD tS Oh & ph a .22 CD o CD O til O u=f- i- U j-> j_> O O O CJ va >o /> yj CD C o o ^ c3 "3 en a O a Oh CD -a E o a • ~ Oh a ^ •3 -o Oh ~ 0J g pO r? -5 .3 o o .** 'a! -^> a . -is ^a a +3 -p &H » d Oh -*© fi, -^ bb aj a o '5 *t> •+-> f-* ^ S -O b|)-W CO CD -5 Q CD m s bp a 1|,§ s CD CD r -S *- pO ,3 S «f .i ^ *§ «tf c o 53 & Q £> ^4^ {§ SOY2J2S2YOJOSOSO S rill cdcdcdcdcdcdcdcd gf :::::: : a* e ^ & & I? fc$ fits 5-> S-> U> U i-> t* vOjOvOvO^JX>^»vO C3 O CD o pP ?H CD CD s P- fcJO .0 cu G a Ph Ph CD CD pP pP e- c & eo e© ^>- <^ CD pa CD ^ .S o cS to P a § o k» ph a pO o o rQ co pQ &J0 Oh « >• c6 cdcdcdcdcdcdcdcd ■5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -3-5 -5 ^©»®^^»§ /» /i jo /» ys ^t yz ja j^ jo jzt VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSToN 9. 29 I IB ? no P -0 o J s £ § g"3 'o B &, § cu g •«? - 3 ~ ■•r © ^s ""^ 3 F «3 °» a> ffi - ** ~ -a J3 S§.ff?"sSS Soft's >E> jO VO TO A § 3 C3 3 be «. _- ; i -rf C3 ,-3 CD > O r3 ^ CO O fn qjCDcDCOCDCDOCDCD -C2^-C3_a^3_Sr^5J3^ EX CD e o 1 o ....... Ill ::::::: _ ^ w >a 2 JO *S ^" JO- 3 j=- 3 y^ 0333;3:3»-3$3:~ fe; o9 Q eo -^^5 © © © 51 VO VO -/O jO wO VO TO *3 CD 03 rt i- 3 co _, O 3 the pair, he net. , the pou the empi in, the s^ the ship the salt. £ ~ ^ ^ | £ * -£ ^85 (9 © ($) If} ">i> *> V> V> -«5 7S> cs cs cs cs cs « o 3 /D jQ VO VO jO vi >S »o ^ c 3 _* eo — Fh % fcJD -, 3 *H CD 3D - O -a i ,£3 ^ 3 c3 - 3 C3 ^ CD O S m 2 'S CD CD (V) e .1 o c V 2 ^ ^; - *33 - jo- en 3 3 — j-T a i-3 i— 1 6^ r> v> ■»» ■»» w •«> TO o3 c$ « « « a CS <3 3 /i /> ^ JD y-> VO jO CD O ■JO- 3 i2> CD ■«> 3 yo CO cd be o cu 3 ^ 3 s 3 w ^- CD ^ d yi. yz> s-, 30 VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. CD s qj s &, Bd 83 83 M r-£ +3 "tn U> *5 &) ^ ■>» ->o cs rs y=> >d 2 a "B r CJ • 83 4| t( . ■ « € * " ~ ^ «& £ -g # JL H 1 £ J: S I -o j-> i^ j_> ^ °2 ^ "S ^S °S i -s 83 6J0 <3 £P 83 83 ■>s> V) 'ft 'ft ">ft ->ft v> 'ft ->t> ->o « « « « « « <3 « « « yi> vO VD jO -jO VH ->o vo vO VD & ^> *<§ .. ^ t- ' . ft. <» bJD ii s ill J I §f!~f ft tffs*"^rf •>ft °ft • w %> j-> ''ft ■«> 'ft ■y) -«>•'.» -y> •«> -y> "«> 'ft 'ft ■*» /> VO J; vlj /Zi SZi rri VCJ ^li jO yl> V^ jO /) vO jO ^ .o w/D x> § 5 c3 83 Is rQ ►*" fl 83 £ 83 1 £ 4 i «~ « ^ If ^ « «~ *s 1 1" f 1 jO ^O >0 Xj A ^i jO >1» /S 7i jd JZ/ /!> /> Xi -/^ ( 31 ) § 8. FORMATION OF NOUNS. I. Q BR MAN WORDS. A. Simple ones : a. primitive words; as, ber ipctfyn, the cock; bte @ang, the goose; ber $lad)g, yarn, flax ; bag s £robt, the bread ; bcr £>ampf, the smoke; ber Sib, the oath; ber M, the eel. b. Compound words : a. with prefixes ; as, 1. be bet SSeft'l?, the possession; ber s £ericbt, the account; bcr 25efef){, the command ; bet s 33etrug, the deceit ; bet 23eruf, duty. 2. ge bag ©efyolj, the wood ; bag ©erour j, spice ; bag ©eroelf, clouds ; bag @eftf>rei, crying ; bag @e= fd)cnf, the present; bag ©eroding, the plant; bag @ebet, the prayer, &c. 3. ent&emp bcr Sntfaf?, succour; (£ntrourf, plan; (Smpfamj, receipt, &c. ber Srtraa,, produce; (£rl6g, money got, &c. ber 3$eebanb, bandage; $erfd)tup, confinement; ^Bertrag, treaty, &c. bie >3erfpaltung, cracking; ^crlegung, dissection, &c. ber Unfatt, accident; Unrottte, indignation; bie Unluft, dislike, &c. 8. ur ber Urfprung, origin ; Urenfel, great-grand- child, &c. /3. with Affixes ; as, 1. cfjen bag 25lumd)en, small flower; £dugcben, small house, &c. 2. e bie SSeere, berry; £dnge, length; ©djeere, scis- sars, &c. ber 95ote, messenger ; £irte, herdsman ; ^riebe, peace, &c. ba^ ©efinbe, servants ; ©emdlbe, painting, &c. 3. el bie ©cbuffel, dish; 21ngel, hook; Wabel, needle, &c. ber Mantel, cloak ; jpanbel, trade, &c. bag Uebet. evil, &c. ber 23unbel, bundle ; (£nfel, grandson, &c. 4. en ber 25efen, broom ; bag Stfen, iron, &c. •5. er bie £o$ter, daughter ; ber SBdcbter, watchman ; bag ©efieber, plumage, &c. 4. er 5. j?er 6. jer 7. un 32 FORMATION OF NOUNS. 6. et bie 23tauetet, brewery ; ©etkret, tanning- house, &c. bie Sauffyett, laziness ; l&odljeit, wickedness, &c. bad $efyttd)t, sweepings ; ^Oicfic£>t, thicket, &c. bad Effing, brass ; bet faring, herring, &c. bie Sfeunbinn, friend ; SurjUnn, the wife of a sove- reign, &c. bic ©attnetin, the gardener's wife, &c. bie ipet&ftc^eit, intimacy ; JDanfbarfett, grati- tude, &c. bet Jpofling, courtier ; Bating, pupil, &c. bie Sintfetntf?, darkness ; bad Steigmf?, event, &c. bet SButfyertd?, tyrant ; (Sntericfr, drake, &c. bad ©cfcicffal, destiny ; £>tangfal, calamity, &c. bad 3fo$fyfel, riddle \ SuHfet, stuffing, &c. bet ©efyotfam, obedience ; ©eroctfytfam, safety, &c. bie S^tttbfc^aft, enmity ; £etbenfd>aft, passion, &c. bad ^atfetrtjum, empire; bet SReic&fyum, wealth, &c. bie 23efttebigung, satisfaction ; ^etmimftfnmg, curs- ing, &c. B. Nouns compounded with other words. 1. with Nouns ; as, bet $itd)tf)Utm, steeple ; bie Jjau&fyur, street- door, &c. 2. . . Adjectives; as, bad 95tttetnxtfiet, bitter- water ; bie ©d)nxttj= pappet, black poplar, &c. 3. .. Numbers; as, bie $iettelfhtnbe, quarter of an hour; bet Staufenbfuf}, scolopendria, &c. 4. .. Verbs; as, bie ©ingfunft, the art of singing; bet ^>lagegetft, troublesome fellow, &c. 5. . . Prepositions ; as, bet UmftetS, circle ; ©egenjfanb, object ; Slufgang, rising, &c. 6. . Adverbs ; as, bet £>etmgcmg, going home ; bad £>atlef>n, loan ; bet £ingang, demise, &c. 7. . . more than one Noun ; as, bie 2ttmen=$etfotgung$cmjt alt, an institution providing for the poor; bie S5r«nbcaffcn= 3le<$nung$abnaf>me, the receipt of the accounts of a fire- insurance, &c. 7. fcett 8. irf>t 9. ing 10. inn 11. in 12. hit 13. ling 14. nifj 15. vic^ 16. fat 17. fet 18. fam 19. Waft 20. tf>um 21. ung FORMATION OF NOUNS. 33 The following are irregularly formed, and signify depravity of mind ; as, £)er ©cf>abenfrof), a plotter of mischief; ber 9ttmmetfatf, a greedy fellow ; ber Xauo,entcf)tg, good-for-nothing fellow, &c. II. FOREIGN WORDS. A. those which have lost their foreign character by taking Ger- man terminations ; as, ber %?o,er, the negro; bie Summer, the number; ba$ detail, the metal; ber ©atpeter, salpetre ; bie ambre ; bag Qompenbuun, &c. It is necessary to know the Latin, Italian and French languages in order to understand and pronounce those words well. NOUNS COMPOUNDED WITH NOUNS. The first word expresses : l.The object of the active, while the second expresses the per- former; as, ber jpoljfyauer, the wood-cutter ; ber ^ud>enbarfer, the pastry-cook ; ber Sutterfcfyneiber, the fodder-cutter, &c. 2. The purpose for which the first word is used; as, ber SBetnbero,, the vineyard ; ba$ 23iero,(ag, the beer-glass ; ber ipanbfdntf), the glove, &c. 3. The whole of an object, of which the last word expresses one part; as, bat SMumenbfatt, the leaf of a flower ; ber ^ferbefup, the foot of a horse ; bie jpaugtfyur, the street-door, &c. 4. The owner of the thing of which the last is the name ; as, bie ^rebtgergebufyren, the due of a Clergyman ; bag ft&nigSfcfrtop, the palace of a king ; bie ©tabtroiefe, a meadow belonging to a town, &c. 5. Similarity ; as, bie SSutterbtrne, a pear as soft as butter; bat ©eibenpapier, silk-paper ; ber ©tocfftfd), the cod-fish, &c. 6. Material of which the object of the second word is formed ; as, ber ©teintifcb, a table made of stone ; bie ©tafylfeber, the steel- pen ; ber (Srb&aufen, heap of earth ; bag ©ilbergelb, money made of silver, &c. 7. The place where the object of the second word is situated ; as, 34 FORMATION OF NOUNS. bie ©arf)tinne, gutter; bie SBiefennelfe, carnation of a meadow ; ber ^opffttmerj, headache. 8. The time to which the object refers ; as, bat ©ommerforn, summer-corn (corn sown in spring) ; bat 3Ibenbbrobt, supper; ber 9?ad)m>dd)ter, watchman, &c. 9. The instrument ; as, ber Su^tritt, footstep ; bie jpcmbarbeit, ma- nual-work ; needle-work ; ber $eberftrid>, stroke of the hand (by writing), &c. 10. The kind or manner ; as, ber -Bettlauf, running for wages ; ber Sfcagelofyn, daily wages or pay, &c. 11. The degree or class; as, bat ^eifterflucf, the master-piece; ber .£>aupnncmn,the captain of an army; ber Bunftmeifter, the master of a guild, &c. 12. The cause ; as, ber ©onnenbrcmb, sun-burned ; ber SBafferbampf, steam of water ; ber £>agetfcbaben, damage caused by hail, &c. PARTS &F SPEECH WHICH MAY BE USED AS NOUNS. 1. The adjective, if the sentence does not contain a noun; as, ber ©eletjrte, the learned man ; ber 28etfe, the prudent man ; bie ©d)one, the beautiful female ; bie $teine, the little or pretty girl; bie SSugenbe, the suffering female ; bets? @ute, bat ©cbone, bat Uner= roartete, the good, the fine, the unexpected (thing); bat ©cfyroarje, bat 2Bet£e, the black, the white (colour), &c. 2. Numerals are used in the same manner as adjectives ; as, bie JDrei, bie ©ed)S, the numbers three, six ; fitter ift §u roentg, one is not sufficient; IDrei ftnb ju ml, three are too many; $n>ei ftnb genug, two are enough; ber ^efynte, the tenth; ein fritter, a third one; Wet, every thing; (Itroat, something; Wifytt, nothing, &c. 3. The pronoun, when it refers to persons ; as, (Sib bat @elb £)em= jenigen, roetcfyer juerft fommt, give the money to him who comes first ; S^at (£r, ©ie ober fyat tfflan et getfyan ? has he, she, or have they done it ? ©enb 3^ fertig ? are you ready ? 3$ fjctbe 3e= mcmb gefefyen, I have seen somebody ; (it nxiren nur SBenige bet, there were only few, &c. 4. The infinitive or participles ; as, bat Jporen, the hearing ; bat ©djreiben, the writing; bat 2efen, the reading; £abe(n ifl leidjt, to blame (one) is easy ; $erbeffern ijt fcbrcer, to correct (one) is difficult ; ber ©djreibenbe, the one who is writing ; bat @efcbrie= bene, that (which) is written, &c. DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 85 •5. Conjunctions ; as, bai iBenn, (the if) ; ba$ Stber, (the but). 0. Nouns which are made adjectives by the addition of fd> or ifd), unless remaining otherwise unaltered, lose the capital letter ; as, bie ©d)iUerfd)cn ocbriften, the works of Schiller; bie fturfyefftfcfye 33erfaflung, the constitution of Hessia, &c. Parts of speech used as nouns, which are not so, are written with a capital letter. § 9. DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. The article is used before names of nations, rivers, mountains, forests, and months ; as, bet $rcmjofe, the Frenchman ; bie ©pree, the Spree; ber s £rocfen, the Brocken ; ber Spat j, the Hercynian forest ; ber 3<*nuar, January. The article is also used before the following names of countries ; as, bie ©d)n>et$, Switzerland; bie Sau|i§, Lausnitz ; bie 9ttarf\ the March,; bie ^ricuufj, Prignitz ; bie 9ftolbau, Moldavia; bie £urfet), Turkey, &c. When proper names are placed after adjectives or numerals the article is not omitted ; as, ba$ gro£e bonbon, the large London ; ber berufjmte ©emitter, the celebrated Schiller; ba$ mddjttge ^reufjen, (the) powerful Prussia ; Names of men are not declined in the singular if the definite article is used; as, bee Speintid), Henry; be$ Speintid), of Henry; bem ipetnttd), to Henry; ben Spdntid), Henry. The use of the article with such names indicates familiarity ; as, Spaben fie ben fteinen SEBttyetm gefefyen ? Have you seen (the) little William? When a pronoun stands before a proper name, or when an ad- jective precedes it, the genitive ends in $; as, Seines Speintid)'$ ©etft, my Henry's spirit; bie ©cfyonfyeiten unferetf (£affef, the beauties of our Cassel; ba$ ©rabmal beg gtofjen SutfyerS, the tomb of the great Luther. All German and foreign names of persons are declined in the singular according to the above rule. If the article be used, the plural is declined as follows : N. £He jpeinridje, bet Spantide, ben jpeinricben, bie £einrid)e, like those nouns which end in the Plural in e. If there is no article used before Christian names, surnames, names of countries or places, the genitive singular ends in $ or en$ ; as, d2 36 DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. N. G. Souife, SonifenS, griff, $tt§en$, D. A. 2tbotpfyen, Stbolp^en, (Adolphus). £ouifen, Souifen, (Louisa). Srifcen, Stiffen, (Sricbrict), Frederick). 5tfercmbet, 21leranber$, Sllejtanbern, Sllercmbetn, (Alexander). In speaking of a native of a country the preposition au$ is applied; as, bie jungen S^enn ft'nb au$ ^nglanb, those young gentlemen are from England. In speaking of inhabitants of places, or of remarkable buildings, the preposition *?on is used ; as, bin £inroof>net *>on roeben, Sweden; atom, Rome; SBarfcbau, Warsaw ; ©tocfyolm, Stockholm ; 2In)en, Athens ; Berlin, Berlin, &c. All names of persons ending in a, o, i, », belong to this rule ; as, (£otta, £>ibo, ^Ricotai, SSalfcbefSfy (in the genitive dottaV). All those which end in en and d>en ; as, $arften, 2)otd>en, 3fe cfyen, &c. Some names of persons from the Latin and Greek ; as, <£ato, <£tceto, 9Mand)U)on, 5Iaton, (pi. (Satone, Slatone, &c.) In using the names of families the genitive takes g ; as, (£t if! bet ©cfyuljenS, he is at Schulzens ; 3Bir getjen ju ©cbmtbtS, we are going to the Schmidts. The names of towns which end in $, r, and 5 are not declined ; as, on is declined ; as, UlricfyiS t?on £utten£ £f?aten, Ulrich of Hutten's deeds. Latin words are declined in the singular according to the rules of that language. § 10. FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. A. Radicals; as, He in, little ; gr op, large; ftatf, strong; gut, good; alt, old; jung, young; fyatt, hard; roetd), soft; fefr, firm; &c. B. Derivatives; as, e^rbar, honest; [corner jfyaft, painful; menfd)= Itch, human; madjttg, powerful; fmbtfd), childish, &c. C. Compounds ; as, finntetd), sensible ; gtunbfatfd), erronous ; blut* butjUg, bloodthirsty ; efytmutbtg, venerable, &c. The derivatives are formed by the affixes bar, fam, en, cm, tg, td)t, ifd>, lid), and tyaft. The affix bat is derived from barcn (bdren), to bear, to bring forth; as, frud)tbat, fruitful ; i. e. which brings forth fruit. The affix fam expresses the sense of the noun, which it renders an adjective in its fullest acceptation, and expresses desire or wish; as, arbettfam, industrious, i.e. wishing to work; folgfam, obedient; fparfam, sparing; furcbtfam, fearful, i.e. shewing fear, &c. The affixes en, n and em are only added when the noun expresses a material, which noun changes the vowels a, o, u, into a, 6, u ; as, jtctytem, of steel (©tafyt, steel) ; f$jern, of wood (jqoIj, wood); bucfrm, of beech (SMtcfce, beech-tree) ; ft'lbcm, of silver (©tlber, silver) ; ftetnem, of stone (©tein, stone) ; lebem, of leather (2e= bet, leather); 38 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. The affix tg shews that one, or a thing, possesses a thing or a quality ; as, ber Stcmbe ift guttg, the stranger is kind ; ba$ Sanb if! ftetntg, the land is stony ; fctn 5luge if! fem% his eye is ardent ; et ift abetig, he is noble. If a conjunctive possessive pronoun precedes an adjective, the latter expresses the gender of the noun ; as, mem gutet $afer, my good father; betne gute 5tau, thy good wife; fern guteS 55uc^>, his good book. If a demonstrative pronoun precedes an adjective, the former shews the gender of the noun. The adjective always ends in e ; as, biefet ftetne (Barten, this small garden; jene atmc $rau, that poor woman; baflfelbe neue 33ud>, the same new book. The affix id)t shews the similarity of one thing with another ; as, erne fupfticfyte ^afe iff cine folc^e, tt>eld>e rate $upfet auSftefyt, a cop- per-like nose is one which looks like copper. The changes in sense caused by the following variations of the terminations of adjectives, en, em, tg, td)t, can only be learned by practice. The following adjectives are the only ones which can be used with all the above terminations ; as, eine fydtene £5ecfe beflefyt au$ jpctaten, a cover made of hairs; eine fyatige £>e<&, a hairy cover, a cover with hairs at the top ; eine fyattd)te £>e<&, is a cover similar to one made of hairs ; eine ftemetne 9ftauet bejfefyt au$ ©tein, a stone wall consists of stone; eine ftetntge ©egenb fyat ttiete ©tetne, a stony country has many stones ; eine ftemtgte 23irne gletd)t einem ©teine, a stony pear resembles a stone ; eine 23an! ift fjotjetn, benn fte beflef)t au$ ^>olj, a bench is wooden because it is made of wood; eine ©egenb ift t)ot$ig, roetf ba tnel £>ols ift, a country is woody because there is much wood; eine SKube ift f>oljicf>t, benn fte gletcfyt bem £>otje, a turnip is woody, for it looks like wood. The affix tfd) signifies that an adjective is derived from the name' of a person, country, or place; as, £utf)ettfcf>, is all that contains the religious principles of Luther; ^rangojtfc^, all that belongs to the French nation; as, gtcmjofen, Frenchmen; except, Berliner 3$lau, (not SSerlmtfcfy), so called because it comes from Berlin. The affix lid) is probably the root of the adverb gtetcfr, similar. It signifies : 1. A similarity ; as, gotmcb, godlike, i.e. resembling God. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 39 2. Means by which an object is obtained ; as, fiufltd), to be ob- tained by purchase. 3. Ease in accomplishing any thing ; as, leferlid), legible. The affix fyaft, added to a noun, shews that the object is full of what the noun consists of; as, fefylerfyaft, containing faults; ftebert>aft, feverish ; jTatterf>aft, full of flattery. Compound adjectives; as, blutarm, very poor; jlocfjinfter, as dark as in a prison. When adjectives end in el, en, er, they lose e before I, n, r, when declined; as, 1. golben, of gold; as, ber golbne 3fting, ein golbner 9Ung, golbner 9ving, the gold ring, a gold ring, gold ring. 2. fmfter, dark ; as, bte ftnftre ©tube, eine pnftre ©tube, ftnjtre ©tube, the dark room, a dark room, dark room. 3. eitet, vain; as, ba$ eitle SSeftreben, ein ettleS 23ejlreben, eitleS 23e- jfreben, the vain endeavour, a vain endeavour, vain endeavour. The student is referred to the declension of adjectives given with the declension of Nouns. § 11. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 1. The regular comparison is formed as in English. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. jafym, tame jcu)mer, tamer sat>m(e)ft, tamest, jtolj, proud fbljer, prouder ftotjejt, proudest, runb, round tunber, rounder runbeft, roundest. These do not change their vowels a, o, u into a, 6, u. The case is the same with the following ; as, frot>, joyful ; gefunb, healthy ; glatt, smooth ; gerabe, straight ; fyofyl, hollow ; fafyl, bald ; farg, stingy; [a^m, lame; lo$, untied ; matt, faint; nacft, naked; rof), rude, raw ; toll, mad ; coll, full. The following examples change their vowels a, o, u, into a, 6, it, and lose the e before ft in the superlative ; as, Positive. Comparative. Superlative. (ang, long langer, longer (angft, longest, gtob, rude grober, ruder gtobft, rudest, jung, young junger, younger jimgjt, youngest, fcfyatf, sharp; t>orf>, high (fyofyer, higher); furj, short; trotf?, red; fdmxitj, black ; fc^road), weak; fd>mal, small; t?art, hard; fait, cold ; except nap, wet (na£er, nafjeft) ; fran!, ill (franfer, franfetf). The e before \t in the superlative is omitted for the sake of euphony in ber langjle, the longest ; bet fcinfle, the finest ; ber jiingfte, the youngest ; and in all adjectives which end in ig, licf>, bar, fad), 40 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. fam, cm, en, and et ; as, bet gndbigfte, the most merciful ; bet fyettlicfyfte, the most magnificent ; ber tfyeuetfte, the dearest. Adjectives lose e before et and el in the comparative ; as, bitter, bitter ; bittrer, more bitter ; ettel, vain ; eittet, more vain. If one adjective is followed by another in comparison, mefyt is used instead of the terminations et or t ; as, 2)ie ftttfcfye ift mefyt ton? aU reif, The cherry is more red than ripe, ©et tylann roat mefyt roetfe ate teid), The man was more wise than rich. The positive is sometimes preceded by the adverbs mefyt, more ; fef)t, very; ungemein, uncommonly; auf3etotbentticf;, extraordinary; t)ed)ft, most; ctufjetft, extremely; as, ©ie ift mefyt a,to£ ati flein, She is more tall than little ; (£t ift fefyt ftuo,, He is very clever ; ©ie ftnb ungemetn fybfftd), You are uncommonly polite. The comparative by the adverbs ml, much ; roett, much ; nod), still ; tmgtetd) unequally ; bet roeitem, much more ; as, ©te ftnb ttiel bejfet ati tcr;, You are much better than I ; 2>u btft roeit gtoj^et alt fte, Thou art much taller than she ; £>et 23aum ift nod) fyofyet alt bat S^aut, The tree is still higher than the house, &c. The superlative by the pronoun aliet, all, most, and forms one word ; as, ©et atletftemfte 2lpfet ift nic&t reif, The smallest apple is not ripe. The superlative is also preceded by am, auf'S (auf, bat), jum, tm ; as, am beften, best ; auf t or auf bat ©d)6nfte ; jum ©c^cnften, finest ; tm 9JUnbeften, in the least. 2. The irregular comparison is formed as in English ; as, Positive. Comparative. Superlative. nafye, near nctyet, nearer bet, bie, bat ndcf;fte, the nearest am ndd>ften, nearest. balb, soon efyet, sooner am efyeften, soonest. gut, good beffet, better befte, the best am beften, best. t?te(, much mebt, more metfte, the most am metften, most roentg, little minbet, less mtnbefte, the least am mtnbeften, least. (roentget) (am roemgften) When the article in English is not used before the superlative, the word am is used in German, and the adjective ends in en ; as, am beften, best. The following adjectives have no comparative ; as, bet du£ete, the external bet duferfte, the most external, bet tnnere, the internal bet innerfre, the most internal. bet fjmtete, behind bet funtetjte, the most behind. bet ohete, above bet obetjle, the uppermost. bet untete, the low bet unterfte, the lowest. bet ootbete, before bet wtberfte, the foremost. VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 41 -e D o e> > *j ^ a OJ OJ U M w co ad be q 15 « a iri §aai|liiSs||a |jaja^55sa2|Jaja|ja ^^^ coif^^^s-is^^^.-^^^- ? gf=~~ 1 Ss££ t s-|j 2 ^ i" *■ ,2. 2 ',= ■- 43-3 3 _ .... . . eg v _ y=i II < | L 8 Jill . a -gl * S SMll s^S- .2 2 -1 1 $= . CO - co W > > H-l H ^ Si U ^ Oh fa - 3 •-5 ^. CD 12 CO 9 ■r: CO OJ 3 *Q TJ pC 3 OJ rrl >> CO -»-> +j tn U O "7" 1 Uh OJ 9J .a s ? co Fh O 12 03 bC CO CO 1 CO Fh cd ■a o bo c 5 CO _] OJ O 1 a 2 69 O Fl g - g 5S*co^' S coco^ 3 ^ « ^^^^ ^ B ^^g.^^ co ~< £ £ ^co 3 £ co co £ ijj I ^ " 'b a * * a g i a s e J a s | a ts ^ b § «! ° t 1 f « - J. 1 - «" S i J S % 2 g © 'g 3 y S S § | 1 fe.f ^ § «fi .5 1 § 1 CJ ^ -, ^ 3 X> CO ^ TO ^. rcJ ?1-SS?o co^ ^£ M •- ^2 ^ 's_s^a. oS ^a «3 2 •- ^"StSf^^.gS^^SE^^ H, co ^5 o ' b *» c c » _ . t £- „ - -°" H i s S s 3 ^r>^^3333i-.^7Sv2^S3^r«Jt J j-. CT 1 ««CS8««««va>0»0>0>CJ3 1 D»0»0 42 VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 5 «S » O t!s £ 'B ^ -3 cs s >o fl&Dgj ""3 -9 «£ s § QJ • c >-rt Cu ■** "'-' i^ jj . >"-' "t? cL -»j ~ T " 1 -*^ O-t > i rv ~ - e^ **— <*- 3 +* 21 i-£h h-i i** .2: (*2- 11 2 S i; e. ~ e <*> e *» ^: «+- ^tj^. ~ ^ «- « « cj >@- .t3 Ci- ^±2 e "tf <^ Ti ■>— • t>> .2J <5 «>>s C2- >-^ i~ *-^ ■.<*> -ii t3 t3 3 v* S^t$ 5 5 ? ^ § S «> S> J* J& »£ S5 ^ ~ 3 o .!=> £ 3 3 .3 >0 yli jO yli vO vO yO ^j o o o O o o U— '-i_ t*__ 'j__ 'j— o— t*__ U— U— vO S « ^'o^^s 3 is ^3 5 1 I -§ o 'S B< &,"§ ^ 3 J g J S o %*-•-» CJ.^-» *j ••^ .-w . _> j_j j_> j_^ j_> j,^ j_» ^j ^j ^j j^ «-^j 7^ t-* T-^ v> >£> v^ va ^> vO ^» X) o^> 00 ^» o ^ tt^ u— u.^ u^ *^- ^^ t*— tfc^ ^^ ^> ys jO jO jO /j .^ooooooo ti— u— *-»— u— '-i— u— i^_ t^_ u— VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 43 § 13 53 S p .2 _s 5n —• ^ i ^IirifilHlill .^--|*l I . S ^ t» -5 +j fan ,±2 M 0XJ g^rn d o O^-^-tJ P vr> ^rr d £ 3 *c cr> <=^ 2^ •— c ■sz yz> P +5 O s I S ^ , j2 -TV'S w ^ a, a; -s O O V ^?^ !J?^s,^a fe F b 2 'O '3 S cs « c s-. td- d o Hi 03 t3 S3 !>-. d o 03 nd ^-! Si Ft -C £ o O Ph n d > P 09 c M V '5 a> r; o *^ « 3 *3 <5 at 53- ,2. o J^V « en d 05 (h O d .O o ba s d ft _ T3 h > £ d 53 in a 3 n d u p p "53 d 03 OS. 3 1 C £ O 5 a 5-T S ft! e 2^ S-) g s ES -a en « CTj <5) <5^ en- CT; 5 OJ o +j "S So i a ^ ^ I § e -2 ^ — -2 * 8,81^1 1111 HUM. 1 1 1 1 3 ;J I J #J « g i 1 1 1 :ff| f If I i 1 1 J I f I f 44 VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. to 5 2 ^ bD O 02 o ~ -2 bC ^H CO □Q 03 CO +j § O 3 S CO rd 2 -d pd - rQ -H -P „ «>> ■+-> CC CO 02 Ph-,2 CO ^ ^ *S a * CD CD CD _d cj ^ 13 rg 6 ° CO rd ■a 2^ 02 «* co «5 O ^ CO CO J** CO i£L 5 g. £ j§. .5 s .ij r« :« r£ ^T ^ oi o SH-f W~» *!_. «-, ^ & s- S IT „o *» o o «-« ^O J3- vC- -JS- -J3^ jo • - • • o* .... O CO CO CD f- 1 -" ^ ^ ^ Rr5 ^ o CO 02 CO 3 £ o o r-S 02 £ CJ . TJ o Oh.2 co is bL ' m CO « CO Cfi CO co o 9 O fL, fl CO l C^ IT ^^ - ^ r2 ° r2 «2- en S- •.£{ « 02 ^o ^ o ^ *« -"o "S -^ -» -J> v£> v£3^ -X> >T> >.£> sO- -X> >£> ft* _ ■g.3.sf 1 |t if I S-> jj -« «•« ^3 « <5 C v3 CD . s « g >> co g » 2> 8" ^ =s « « c v=: o 3 -i VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 45 9 •"d U3 rj •-^ «3 - +* i- m -u j-S O ffi ^ tc H) i? <4— ^ en n -w -w • «-» ^c- --» w» w* | 1 a a 1=11 g.| | | a s s III « S || 1 1 1 1 * 1 1 * | * | J «j iJ8 s o «-3 o rzi «-« ~o _£ "72 ££££££ee — >^ >o o 3 ?H 46 VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 1 M fri* - 3 8 § "g ^ 5 «• s ^SIN^g'Ss . 1 en O 3 ^1s?is«3 ? :g, a J », iff f s& tit issii til #■#£$£* jO a -B ^ .3 B 2 ^ 2 J? b£ cd ^ S-. o CD 3 o a Oh CD Fh cd O 0) CD 0Q 01 B CD s 3 CD o o s o o cd r^ EJ „ s «■ cfi S-T CJ * p * § h « I ■ i. § S*881II!'I * f . 1 1 1 1 1 -I IS s s i i § I -a a s i ; * i i 1 t es a £ I ,- j 3 i a * - - - a g | j g | s .i.i'g-fS' a _ el § 1 1, VS §f j J g s „- s „-.§ «o -li .;2 -2Z -3 va tfc p w w « 4) <4_ otjrsr3 3*.oo3S^ 8 * I"- § - 1 Ml 1 i "Sf--f i g-8| | 8.JS »o ._» .is .^2 -3 VO t p w w « 5) tw_ Ojj33r3 00 3 ^ V VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 47 ft 1*3 1 u ill •e «* V S 2 "S 1 3 £ ,5 £_ g g g £ g ^ g £ £ jl IE *& £ S .: * 1 *l1 .a 1 * 1 s ^ I - 1 3 fl 6* S 1 ^ AS S >§> ^ «ti ^ .£ g £ £ « S *f g 1 § g S *sr « ig c^^ *2 2 s .1. S £. <^ *. g g g £ g g £ g § .a S g sO si. ^. ^i. ^. ^. ^^ —^ ^. VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 49 o > a CD .a .a ■M ^ +) ^ S5 « &Q "£ +- 1 « "§ 1 S +Z CO t; g - JO ■5- & -s> g 1 a s e e a 03 c3 .s s co © £ « ^2 IS 3 g o3 5 _• +j o3 3 rfl g a, cr-'g qj co co +j o o w £ B B S ^ "-£ rS S fw ■+->•♦-* CD ;3 c£=. c~ _ »o «MO mo fcD cu -5 a - CO v -_ - a - a; — *d be ~ c e u ro 4d aa 3 CO j. o a Cl) CO O = o 00 o a S --3 3 -3 " D +J a ~ o „ +d a> tSs: -6 S-l ttl. B a ^ !? -^> *rr *rr :_, *« „o *0 MO MO MO MO o o c5 OS S« co -3 2 S S w o ^ 3 t» ► i = "•5 »£> "£ I -a > * t « s V <3) r3 O 3 - CO 3 u 3 OJ -3 CD fa 3 3 3 :? 3- 00 3 3 Sh u 3 i-T J— a 3 »3 o -j rfi e t-i - B 3 £ S MB *« 3 'd — 3 3 be QJ ^3 -3 3 - .3 CD o :o CO o 3 CD o Fl a a 3 3T .3 C 1 3 CD CD g '3 3 "3 CD u CD a - O Eh a 3 93 a tS a a •S - u o —• CD « /-_. TO c ^o &l td vO u &i Sn £* ~ -a a a 5? c {> ** J3 M i- ♦" fe bo ^ ^ o bX)_ » co ^.S % c is ii q. CD «Si ■•-; o C-l $» 5> .= ^ C8 O O co 2J tlJll" 1 CD „* -w CD O 23 *fl <« fe ^fl ^ "S ^ s S S 3 fl CD oj CO b£) cd —< «-fi I ill .q. « ^ TO « 3 S ^ „ -•3'£p^«S-£*e~ v £?2>TO3. J o3? *^ *~ ** MO " ' <:> ' tt «S ^ "£ M ^ ^* lo ft* « CD *3 fe v2- •*> .Si o >■£> c "" ft* ^"-\ CD /^v Q. O ft* a> >^> cd ^ w^e^ rP O r3 .0) o ^ sT .. ~ S -«> rO • rH • l-( ' i»> K_ . cv ^ ft* U* r" ■si a& g g * |S*t *| s § - © 03 =S dk w C_i *° £* CD - _j .. -d •£ o o3 U2 ' S_( SW _j bjo •S g ... I $3 •» §* d •eg ^ t i 1 & 1 1 sljs a> ^.r.l^3 o^ rrt ^ ° -S ^ c^ .^ ° pa S d-^dS^S ■^ . y 0! . +J ^*3 zi f-< -n p_4 r-_, •!-( ^O O O ■ * •S^o^^^csd ^^ ^^d-S 5 !s S « S» Ti CO ^^^CD Oft* -+J +Z ~* ^d_r3 w < -T -+J -^> 5R rr-5.^ Sv^ft*^ r^l o ft* ft* ft* ft* Sl'llaie l' J? ^5= § § § § § p>-^ p « p 'S-s ft* ■si i i a it^jr i-d ?h CD *J" >— < M-tfCD_T^ic: O s - / ^ o o CD d o o 03 p,«S c3 >-. o o „ •>— s »s> O CD ^ I "-S . 1 do O CD _k « -d SJ> .^ «« O ... . CD *- h^. o CD ft d £ 03 c3 ?H „ CD en CD o 03 d 3 a< •2 ^ CD s o d o o CD CO bJD ^» CD '^ t/2 03 d a 03 •H 5 „ c ?-> 03 ► s«-§ « vO a> ft* o C *s Si, w >£> >0 -X> « <3 « ♦3 VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 51 6 r0 ed ■•a ? i 1 1 g s f | In I *fct 1 lUlf- 5 a "5 *1* * 1 «_**« 111 I I 1 3 ! 1 1 s £ I 1 g>-s £"1 1 * * -el 2 S 3 I -. "-=?l^ 5 * § J. S- &■ s «3 § SSgg£S£ast.'§. , 5.= .3 .HP K^ (T! C be o t, .a 9> 2 'o °> o fl1 <-> br> o aa ^ 2 era — .a o .5 r e2 ^O ^O >T) .O ^o yi» ya o «rf O o o ^> ^><5)C^^>'?50^ &u marf)en, That can "be made possible ; £>aS if! Uidjt ju bercerfftetftgen, That can be easily realized; £)aS ift fc^roer ju be- fcbreiben, That is difficult to describe ; (£t ift bereit ju felgen, He is ready to follow. Adverbs do not require ju before an infinitive ; as, ipter ij? gut roofjnen, One can live well here. Adjectives governing the same cases as in English ; as, (£t ij? be$ £ugen$ unfctytg, He is incapable of lying ; €s rcirb 3bren 2Bunfd)Ctt angemefien fetjn, It will be according to your wishes; ©te roaren lange »on bet 6fTicf> gegen micb, They were all polite to me. The following adjectives do not correspond in both languages. acbtfam auf, heedful of. aufmetffam auf, attentive to. bange yot, afraid of. befyattlicb auf, tenacious of. begtertg auf, desirous of. befcbcunt ubet, ashamed of. beritymt butcb, famous for. bofe auf Semanben, angry with one. bbfe auf tern r-or, shy of. fparfam mit, sparing of. taub auf beiben Ofyren, deaf of both ears. ta ugticf) ju, fit for. unbefannt mit, unacquainted with. ungercaf? in, uncertain of. unfd>utbig an, innocent of. unroiffenb in, ignorant of. r-erliebt in, in love with, fond of. rerroanbt mit, related to. t-erfd)roenbertfd> mit, lavish of. j.irr(id) gegen, affectionate to, ten- der of. jroeifetyaft uber, dubious of. § 14. THE NUMERALS. The numerals are divided into cardinals and ordinals. Ordinals are derived from cardinals, and answer to the question rote tnel ? how much? The fundamental cardinals are those from 1 to 10, and from 100 to 1000; the others being formed from them by addition of gig, jig, and ft. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 1, ein, einS. 2, mxi. 3, brei. 4, pier. 5, funf. 6, fed)£. 7, fieben. 8, ad)t. 9, neun. 10, $ef>n. 11, elf (eilO- 12, iMf. 13, breijefyn. 14, tnerjefyn. 15, funfjefm. 16, ferf)$ef>n. 17, fteborfiebenjebn. 18, acfoefyn. 19, neunjefyn. 20, jroanjtg. 21, ein unb jroanjig. 30, breipig. ; 40, Pier jig. 1 50, funf jig. | 60, fecfoig. 70, fteb or fiebenjig. 80, acfoig. 90, neunug. 100, f>unbert. 101, fyunbert unb ein (ems). 200, jroeifyunbert. 1000, taufenb. 10000, jefjntaufenb. 100000, fyunberttaufenb. 1000000, jebn fjunbert taufenb, or eine sjmaion. .. 1847, ein taufenb afyt fjunbert unb fieben unb rierjig. OBSERVATIONS ON THE CARDINALS. 1. In counting, ein£ is used instead of ein ; but when a noun or another numeral folloAvs, ein is used ; as, ein ^funb ^ucfer, a pound of sugar ; ein unb jroanjig, one and twenty. 2. ein, eine, ein, one, is declined like the indefinite article, if it stands 54 CARDINAL NUMBERS. before a noun, or is used without an adjective ; as, em $ftcmn, eine $tau, em $mb ; one man, one woman, one child. The form is the same as the indefinite article ; as, em 33aum, eine 23(ume, ein 2anb, a tree, a flower, a country ; but when used as a number it is to be pronounced longer than when as the indefinite article ; viz. the definite article ber, bie, ba$, the, compared with the demonstrative pronoun bit, bte, ba$, that. 3. If the definite article, or the demonstrative pronoun, stands before it, it is declined like the adjective with the definite article, and is considered a noun, being written with a capital letter ; as, bet (£ine, bte Sine, ba$ Sine, the (masc), the (fern.), the (neut.). 4. If not preceded by the definite article, and not followed by a noun, it is considered as a noun, and is declined like the adjective without an article ; as, gutet, gute, guteS ; as, Sinet nur if? bem £obe entgctngen, Only one has escaped death; Sine fyctt fein jpetj geroonnen, One has won his heart ; SinS rottb et nxfyfen, He will choose one thing. 5. The numbers jroei or btet are declined, without distinction of gender, like the definite article bte in the plural ; as, IDie 5n>ei obet £)tet, The or those two or three ; 2)tefe obet jene 93tet obet ©ed)S, These or those four or six. But if they are not preceded by the definite article, or the demonstrative pronoun, the genitive plural is %miet, £)teiet, of two, of three ; and the dative plural is £n>eten, £>teien, to two, to three. 6. If a demonstrative or a conjunctive possessive pronoun stands before the numbers jroet or btet, the latter are not declined ; as, £>te Stufiage jenet &n>et obet biefet btet sSeugen, The evidence of those two or of these three witnesses ; OJttt feinen neun £unben ging et ctuf bie 3«9k> He was going to hunt with his nine hounds. 7. When two things or persons are spoken of, the word betbe, both, is used in preference to $n>et, and is declined like the plural of the adjective when declined without the definite article gute ; as, beibe §ufje, betbe ^afen, betbe Slugen, both feet, both noses, both eyes. 8. If the word beibe is preceded by a conjunctive possessive pro- noun, or by the definite article, it is declined like the plural of the adjective with the definite article ; as, $Retne beiben 23tubet f>aben e$ gefagt, My two brothers have said it (supposed that one has only two brothers) ; £>te beiben ^ttye ft'nb wthuft rootben, The two cows have been sold. 9. If any numeral is not followed by a noun, or preceded by a preposition, its dative has the termination of the dative plural of an CARDINAL NUMBERS. 55 adjective, and is written with a capital letter ; as, ©te fnecht auf alien 23teten, She crawls on all fours ; £>et tfutfrfjet fd>t mit Secbfen, Tlie coachman drives six. As the genitive plural cannot be expressed in this case, the pre- position i>on is used with the dative ; as, (St wat bet Sigentbiimet »on funf jpdufetn, He was the owner of five houses. The preposition ton is likewise used with the dative singular when, in English, the prepositions of 'or from are used. In that case it expresses a different meaning ; as, (£t fptad) ^on feinem £obe, He spoke of his death ; (St etfytelt ron feinem Watt? etnen s £ticf, He received a letter from his father. 10. If the definite article of the feminine gender precedes the numbers, they are written with capital letters, and resemble nouns ; as, bte (SinS, bie jtoet, bie £>tet, the one, the two, the three ; and form a hundred with the neuter article ba$ ; as, ba£ jpunbett, the one hun- dred ; ba$ £aufenb, the one thousand. 11. When counting or playing at cards, the plural is formed by the addition of en through all the cases ; as, wet (Einen, four ones ; btet 'fteunen, three nines. 12. A noun is formed by the addition of et to a digit, and is used with the definite or with the indefinite article ; as, Sing, hex or ein (£inet, the or a single number ; PL bie (£tnet, the single numbers. Sing, bet or ein jtoetet, the or a whole two ; PL bte stoetet, the whole twos. 13. Numbers which are formed by adding the affixes ling, fad), fdlrig, mat, and lei, are declinable, except those compounded with the affixes mat and let. ling bet Bnxtltng, the twin ; bet IDtetltng, a silver coin used at Ham- burgh ; bet ©tilting, trines ; bet <3ed)6ltng, a silver coin used at Hamburgh. fad) etnfacb, single; hvoeifad), double; bmfacfc, triple; tnetfad), fourfold. fdltta, etnfatttg, simple ; jroetfdlttg, twofold ; bteifdltta,, threefold. mal einmal, once ; jroetmal, twice ; btetmal, three times ; tnetmal, four times. let einetlei, one kind; jroetetlet, two kinds; bteietUi, three kinds, &c. 14. If these numbers precede nouns which signify parts instead of the whole (pars pro toto), in that case those nouns are not de- 56 ORDINAL NUMBERS. clined in the plural ; as, ©ed$ tylann ©olbaten (not banner, man), six soldiers ; ^n>61f ©tucf Od)fen (not ©tucfe, pieces), twelve oxen. 15. They have also no plural if they signify measure or weight ; as, 5l$t 23ud> papier (not 2$ucf)et, books), eight quires of paper ; $tet $uj? fyocb (not $u$e, feet), four feet high ; ©ret nte. 17th, ft'eben jefynte. 18th, ad)(t)5ef)nte. 19th, bet, bie, ba$ neun&efmte. 20th, jroanjigfte. 21st, ein unb &n>an* Stgtfe. 30th, bteigtgjfe. 40th, tnet&tgjle. 50th, funfjigfte. 60th, fecfotgtfe. 70th, ftebenjtQffe. * 80th, ad)(t)5t9^e. 90th, neunjtgfte. 100th, f>unberttfe. 101st, fntnbettunberffe. 200th, jroetfyunbettfte. 1000th, taufenbfte. 1847th, taufenb a$t f>un= bett unb ft'eben unb tnetjiajte. NUMERAL PRONOUNS. 57 1. If they are not followed by a noun, but preceded by the defi- nite article, they are written with a capital letter, and resemble nouns ; as, ber, bie, bat (£rjte, the first. £>er, bie, ba$ Slnbcre, the other, is used in the same way as ber, bie, ba$ C£r|Te. "2. Several nouns and adverbs are derived from the ordinals by means of the affixes tel (n>tl), f>att>, and n$ ; as, £>a$ 3n?ettel, 2>rittef, QSiertet, jSroanjigftet, the second, third, fourth, twentieth part ; anbert= fjatb, one and a half; brittefyatb, two and a half; jefyntefyalb, nine and a half; erftenS, firstly; jroeitenS, secondly ; brittenS, thirdly ; tuertentf, fourthly, &c. NUMERAL PRONOUNS. The following are declined as the adjective when without an article ; as, guter, gute, guteS. If not followed by a noun they are considered nouns ; as, We$, every thing ; ba$ WeS, the whole ; We, all (people) ; (EtntgeS, something ; (Eintge, some (people) few. Wet, atte, alleS, all, signifies the whole of a thing, and is followed by a noun; as, Wet 2Bei&en bliifyte, All the wheat was blooming; Me 2Irbett roar i>ergebltd>, All the work was in vain ; MeS ©etreibe ttf tfyeuer, All grain is dear; Wet btefer 2£ein, All this wine; We jene ©elefyrfumfeit, All that learning; Me$ biefeS @elb, All this money. 3e, some ; (StUdjeS, something ; signify some part of the whole, and are declined without an article. These are only used in the plural, except their neuters take the terminations of the singular ; and when written with a capital letter they are considered nouns ; as, (£mtge 23bgel !6nnen nid)t fftegen, Some birds cannot fly ; (£$ roaren nut (Stntge ba, There were only few; (it fagte §mtge$ unb fcbroteg, He said something and was silent. 9ftcmd)er, mcmdje, manned, many, signifies that several things of the same kind are to be considered single. It is declined like jeber, and used without a noun like it ; as, Wanfyet SRetcfje roirb arm unb member %me reid), Many a rich man becomes poor and many poor rich. Reiner, $eine, £ein$, none, not one, is used without a noun, and 58 NUMERAL PRONOUNS. declined like the numeral (Stnet, (Sine, (£mS, one (person or thing). $etn, him, h'm, no, requires a noun, and is declined like the indefinite article em, cine, ein, a ; as, Reiner or fein ?Wenf4) ift unftetblirf), No one or no man is immortal. ©dmmtlid), fdmmmcfyet, fdmmtlirfje, fdmmttid)e£, all together, is declined with the definite article, and can be used with the demonstrative pronoun this, biefer, biefe, btefeS ; as, £)et or biefer fdmmtficbe Setfud) if* gelungen, All this experiment together has succeeded ; 2)te fdmmtucbe or gefammte Samilie ift auSgegangen, All the family is gone out ; &a$ fdmmtticbe $etm6gen ft'nb fyunbert Stealer, The whole fortune is a hun- dred Thalers ; <£t fyat ©dmmtUcfceS tterloten, He has lost the whole. 93te(, much ; rcenig, little ; mefyr, more ; roeniger, less ; have no in- flection if neither preceded by an article or pronoun ; as, (£t tyat met ©elb, roenig $reube, mefyt Setben, He has much money, little joy, more suffering; (£t fyctt $iel unb ft'e f>aben 28enig, He has much and they have little. They are declined, when preceded by an article, pronoun, or preposition ; as, £)a$ fciele ^Betmogen rourbe auSgegeben, The great for- tune was spent; ©ein meteS (Mb nu£te U)m Sttcfcta, His great amount of money was no use to him ; Wlit $tetem fann mann ml n)un, One can do much with much property ; sjftit SBenigem mu£ man au$f ommen, One is obliged to manage with little fortune. &tvoa$, ttwat, something, some ; genug, enough ; 9?icbt$, nothing ; are changeable and uncertain, and are sometimes used as nouns ; as, 3$ fyabe £>tr <£tm$ m fagen, I have something to tell you; jjaben ©ie £tn>a$ gefyott ? Have you beard any thing ? They are used as adverbs ; as, %$ rcerbe if>n urn etm$ ©elb bitten, I shall ask him for some money. SBtet and rcenig are applied in the same way. Sfti(k)t$ is the same as mrf)t etn>a$, not any thing ; and is used both as a noun and adverb, but is never declined ; as, 3$ t)abe 9}td)t$ geroonnen, I have gained nothing ; (£t fyatte nid)t$ mefyt $u fagen, He* had nothing more to say. The same rule applies to ganj, quite ; fyatb, half; mefyt, more ; lautet, only, nothing but ; as, (£t ift in ganj ^tanftetd) getetft, He has travelled through the whole of France ; ©te ftnb in fyalb 2lmettfa gercefen, They have been half through America ; (£r fprang sor (autet gteube, He was jumping with great joy. Derivations from pronouns are formed by adding the affixes hi, mat, fdlttg, and fctdb ; as, aftertet, all kinds ; feinerlet, no kind ; man= cfyerlei, many a kind; tnetetlei, various kinds; attentat, each time; PERSONAL PRONOUNS. .')'.> lis 5- i HI i $* . w 3: ^ *» .is s « <2 ^5 *: s ' o 2 S o ~ 5 E ~ . 2 ^ \C «**- 03 .2* cc ^P /> 03 s-. a S^S 2 | & ~ c 1 I J E P w « •^ a -^ > p P *a 22 05 6~l p £ ^> rS «i c In "*» ■Si cc 8 p TO p p -a g P +» ^> « , -t-j c p s 1 13 *<3 ITS ,0 E < +j £ P *> « . »-, -2 G s GO u 03 ^ O a ■{3 T3" ^ CD 52. .- e CO | 'p OS CO O &-> 3 - > S £ © *? *3 E «5 *<3 J O 03 a bT"^ 3 'e £ 0. .V £r P-. X ^» ^ CO 1 '-P '•§ «^ =3 p d E E E E 00 p 53 1 3" _c co & » e§ 3 p •1-1 CD E > K l^"1i li°.!-l' P 5 ^ j2i ^ ^ jS 6JD g 03 to C 03 o ^ P « Ph 03 P 5 O -s 'S 5 2 *: .§ . ?»^ - ^.Qrtpj^^ ^P^« JP ■ t! S, -*J Q ^«o 5«H | CO P O c§ . s Ji cu ^ i < p n POJ Oco S g ,p -. I^O^ . ^ p S J ° §* "P^ g « ~ £ ens £ s£fil iS. S- «• & *i o _cj ^>va^> ,r ti >e *& ■+J Oh . . JE> = =3 3 OO S §•— 000 P *-> ° 2 egen, if)tet or 3f)tetn>egen, on our, your, their, or your account, unfetmxllert, Sutetnxtfen, ifjret or 3fyretn>itten, for our, your, their, or your sakes. The third person is also expressed by 3emter, There is some one here ; 3ft ka$ 3emanbc^ £unb ? Is that anybody's dog ? 3$ fyabe ^iemanbcn ( s 3ftemanb) gefragt, I have asked nobody ; (£mer t>on ifynen rcirb t?crurtf)Ctft rcetben, One of them will be sentenced ; tylan beflagte ft$ ubet ©ie, They complained of you ; (S3 tegnete bis jrootf Ufyr, It was raining till twelve o'clock. The datives mit, to me ; bit, to thee ; ifym, to him; tf)t, to her; un$, to us ; (£ud>, to you ; tfyrten (masc), to them ; 3fynen, to you ; ifynen (fern.), to them ; are explained in the following examples ; as, 3$ fyctbe mit etnen Sput gefauft, I have bought a hat for myself; 3$ njerbe e$ £>tr morgen fagen, I shall tell you to-morrow ; (£$ fjat tfjm gegtucft, He has been successful ; (£r ttetf) ifyt, fparfam ju fctjn, He ad- vised her to be sparing ; ©ie gaben un$ em 23ud>, They gave us a * book; 2Bit rooltten £ud> n>of>t, We wished you well; 2)te $inb<>t btad)ten ttmen baS $teifd), The children brought them the meat ; 'Bit ttetfyrecben eS 3fynen, We promise it you ; <5ie frf>enften iJ>nen S3tobt, They gave them bread. The reflective pronouns mid), myself; bid), thyself; fid), himself, herself, itself; un$, ourselves ; (£ucb, yourselves ; ftcb, themselves ; are shewn in the following examples ; as, 3$ tufyme mid), I praise myself; £)u freuft 2>t<$, Thou rejoicest; €r fcbnetbet ftrf>, He cuts him- self; <5ie futd>tet ft<$, She is afraid ; (£g roitb ftcb balb dnbern, It will CONJUNCTIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 61 soon change; 2Bir drgerten un£, We were angry; 3fyr rounbertet u bift cin cuiteS $inb, Thou art a good child ; ©ie ft'nb mir rotftfommen, You are welcome to me ; (£r mug ficb eilen, You (he) must make haste ; <5ie mug fyeute nod) au$ meincn IDienften gefyen, You (she) must leave my house to-day ; 3fyt fer>b ein unban!= barer 9)?ann, You are an ungrateful man. CONJUNCTIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS are declined with a noun. Singular. 1st Pers. Sing, mein, meine, mein, my. Plural, metne, my. 2d bein, beine, bein, thy. .... beine, thy. 3d fein, feine, fein, his. .... feine, his. 3d fein, feine, fein, its. .... feine, its. 3d U)r, ifyre, u)r, her. .... ifyre, her. 3d 3t)t, 3*)te, 3^r, your. 3f>re, your. Although the pronoun unfer, (Suer, ifyr, is in itself a plural, it is used with nouns in both singular and plural. Its declension is shewn in the following examples. Plural. 1st Pers. Sing, unfer, unfere, unfer, our. Plural, unfere, our. 2d euer, eure, euer, your. .... eure, your. 3d ifyr, ifyre, ifyr, their. .... u)re, their. Examples of the Singular of Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. S. Sftein 25anb, my volume ; meine 2eud)te, my lantern ; mein 2Kef[er, my knife. PL 2fteine SBctnbe, my volumes ; meine 2eutf)ten, my lanterns ; meine Weffer, my knives. S. £)ein <2d?irm, thy umbrella ; beine SBiefe, thy meadow ; bein ^ferb, thy horse. PI. £)eine <5d)irme, thy umbrellas ; beine SBtefen, thy meadows ; beine r £ieb, her song. PZ. Sfote ©imager, her brothers-in-law ; tyre ©tyroeftern, her sisters ; tyre Sieber, her songs. The above are declined in the singular like the indefinite article, and in the plural like the definite. Examples of the Plural of Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. S. Unfer ©aft, our guest ; unfere %eit, our time ; unfer (£ifen, our iron. PI. Unfere ©dffe, our guests ; unfere Beiten, our times ; unfere (Sifen, our irons. S. Suer S&irty, your host ; eure $irtye, your church $ euer $etb, your field. PI. Sure SStrtye, your hosts ; eure $trtyen, your churches 5 eure Selber, your fields. S. %t)t Strctum, their dream ; tyre jpoffnung, their hope ; tyr 95ett, their bed. PI. Sfyre £rdume, their dreams ; tyre £offnungen, their hopes; tyre 33etten, their beds. The above are declined like an adjective without the article, ex- cept in the neuter, which is the same as the masculine ; as, guter Straum, gute £>offhung, guteS 25ett, good dream, hope, bed : ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS are declined without a noun. Singular. 1st Pers. Sing, ber, bk, ba$ metntge, mine. Plural, bie memigen, mine. * 2d betntge, thine bie beinigen, thine. 3d feinige, his. 3d tyrige, hers. 3d 3fyrige, yours. 3d feinige, its. bie feinigen, his. bie tyrigen, hers, bie 3f>rtgen, yours. bie feinigen, its. Plural. 1st Pers. Sing, ber, bie, ba$ unfrige, ours. Plural, btejmfrigen, ours. 2d eurtge, yours bie eurigen, yours. 3d tyrige, theirs bie tyrigen, theirs. ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 63 The singular, when used with the neuter article, applies to pro- perty, but the plural refers to persons ; as, S. SEBtr fyaben ba$ Unfrtgc r-erloren, We have lost our property. PI. £>te Unfrtgen ftnb roofjl, Our family is (are) well. Examples of Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns, and Absolute Pos- sessive Pronouns, in the Singular and Plural, with or without a Noun. In the following examples the questions contain conjunctive possessive pronouns, while the answers have absolute possessive pronouns. Singular. 1. 3tf e$ mem ©cfmeiber, metne 23ud)fe, mem 2cmb? Is it my tailor, my rifle, my land? (£$ i\t ber, bie, ba$ meintge, It is mine; Plural : <£$ ftnb bte meinigen, They are mine. 2. $kr eS bcin 23acfet, betne Oftagb, betn ©tegel ? Was it thy baker, thy servant girl, thy seal ? &$ roar bcr, bte, ba$ betntge, It was thine ; Plural : <£$ roaren bie bemtgen, They were thine. 3. 3ft eS fetn £>unb, feme £>anb, fetn 3etd)en ? Is it his dog, his hand, his sign? (£$ tft bet, bte, ba$ feintge, It is his; Plural: So fmb bte femtgen, They are his. 3. 2Bar eg it?r £>egen, tf>re ©eft alt, if>r ©rf)Io§ ? Was it her dagger, her figure, her castle ? <£$ roar ber, bie, ba$ tfyrtge, It was hers ; Plural : (Sg roaren bie tfyrtgen, They were hers. 4. 31* e* 3t>t 93ogel, 3*>te $rau, 3*>t ftiflen ? Is it your bird, your wife, your pillow ? (£$ ift ber, bte, ba$ 3t?ttge, It is yours ; PI. <£&■ ftnb bte 3fyrtgen, They are yours. Plural. 1. 3Bctt e$ unfer better, unfete 25afe, unfer $enfter ? Was it our cousin, our cousin (f.), our window ? (5$ roar bcr, bte, ba$ unfrige, It was ours; Plural: £$ roaren bte unfrigen, They were ours. 2. 3ft e^ euer 6rf)tad)ter, eure Slrbeit, euer ©etubbe ? Is it your butcher, your work, your vow? (5$ if! ber, bie, baS eurtgc, It is yours; Plural : <£$ ftnb bte eurigen, They are yours. 3. SBctr eg if>r ©eflet, tfyre ©pur, tf>r 23ecfen ? Was it their seat, their trace, their basin. These absolute possessive pronouns are declined like the adjective with the definite article, and if written with a capital letter they are used as nouns. 64 ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Remarks on Absolute Possessive Pronouns. If the absolute possessive pronouns are used after a verb, being preceded by a noun, they signify merely a possession or property of a person or thing, and take the terminations of the conjunc- tive possessive pronouns mein, bein, fein, like the adjective when occurring after the verb; as, bzx ffiann ift gut, The man is good. 1. S. £)et ^nctbe ift mem, The boy is mine. PL £)ie $naben ft'nb mein, The boys are mine. PI. ©inb bie $naben mein ? Are the boys mine ? 2. S. £)ie @an$ toax bein, The goose was thine. PI. JDie ©dttfe roctren bein, The geese were thine. 3. S. 2>a$ $ag ift fein, The cask is his. PI. £He gaffer roaren fein, The casks were his. PI. SBctren bk $dffet fein ? Were the casks his ? The pronouns bet, bie, ba$ metntge, beintge, fetnige, tfjtige, 3f)tige, are declined like the adjective with the definite article, in the sing, and pi. ; but when the neuter article precedes them, and when they are written with a capital letter, they are not declined in the plural. They then refer to property; as, 3d) fyabe ba$ 9fteinige settoren, I have lost my property ; £>u tjaft ba$ £einige *>etfd>enft, Thou hast given away thy property ; (£t hat ba$ ©eintge fcetfcfyroenbet, He has squan- dered away his property; ©ie fyat ba$ Sfyrige ernwtet, She has expected her property; ©ie fyaben ba$ 3fyttge erfyatten, You have received your property ; 2Bit fyctben ba$ Unfrige retfauft, We have sold our property ; 3fyt fyabt ba$ (£urige ttetpctcfytet, You have let your property by lease ; ©ie fyctben ba$ 3(?ttge ererbt, They have inherited their property. The preposition t>on (of) with the dative of the personal pronouns are used in German where the absolute possessive pronouns would be used in English ; as, (£t ift ein $ern>anbtet tton mir, He is a relative of mine ; ©ie xtat eine £ante son bit, She was an aunt of yours ; (£r roar ein ©efpiele son ifym, He was a playfellow of his; (Sie voat eine Steunbinn j?on tfynen, She was a friend of theirs ; ©ie roaren Wiener son Sfynen, They were valets of yours. When, in English, the conjunctive possessive pronouns are used before a noun, the Germans use the definite article ; as, <£t fyat feine gctfyne im (in bem) $Kunb, He has no teeth in his mouth ; c, roeldjeS. ©crjenige (bcr) £fyetf etneS S5ucf)e$, roetcber gut a,efd)rieben if!, rctrb am meif!en gelefen, The part of a book which is well written is mostly read. £>tejenio,e (bie) £)ame, roettfje ©ie fafyen, tft mctne <5d>n>ef!cr, The lady whom you saw is my sister. 2)a$jento,e (bat) Spaut, roetcfjeS am ndd)f!en Uegt, roerbe id) faufen, The house situated next this I shall buy. X)at (baffetbe) n>a*> (roetd>c^) id) je£t fagc, if! rc>al;r, That which I now say is true. 3d? roiirbe baffetbe getfyan fyaben, I should have done the same thing. Derjenige (ber) n>e(tf>et am rcutbigfien if!, foil ct fyaben, He who is most worthy shall have it. btefet, btefe, btefeS, (bteS, biefj)> this ; btefe, these. ber, bie, bat, . . . . that ; bie, those. jener, jene, jeneS, . . . . that ; jene, those. fotdjer, folcfje, {o\d)et, . . . . such; fotcfye, such. These are all used like the adjective when declined without an article. Such a, is always rendered in German by a such ; as, tin \old)et 25ud>, such a book. If the pronoun btefet btefe, biefeS, is not followed by a noun, or stands at the end of a sentence, biet or btep (this, these) is used instead of btefet, biefe, btefet, btefe, without any distinction of gender in the singular and plural ; as, Qiet (btefO ift mein 25tubet, This is my brother. X)iet if! eine £t(ie, This is a lily. X)iet if! ein tUinct S^aut, This is a small house. 3ft biet (bat) 3fr,t greunb ? Is this your friend ? SBeffen ©atten tftbteS (bat)? Whose garden is this? £>te$ ft'nb meine 23tubet, These are my brothers. X)iet ft'nb Allien, These are lilies. £)te$ ftnb Heine Jipdufet, These are small houses, ©tnb bieS (bat) 3f)te ^reunbe ? Are these your friends ? ©cfien ©dtten ft'nb biet (bat)? Whose gardens are these ? The following will shew the difference in the declension of the demonstrative pronoun when occurring with or without a noun. F 66 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Singular. With the noun. Plural. N. bcr, bte, bctS, that; tie, those. G. beffen, beten, beffen, beten, D. bem, bet, bem, ben, A. ben, bte, bctf, btc. This pronoun is used instead of the relative pronoun rcelcbet, nx'ld>e, roeldjeS (who, which), and is an abbreviation of it. It is also preceded by tcr;, bu, er, rotr, ttjr, °^ om > roetcbeS, S ' ' redeem, -x roelcbet, y I). roeldjen, \ D. rcem,to whom, I D. n>oju,towhatend. roeldjem, ) -* \ A. roelcbe, j- A. roen, whom, i A. roaS, what. G. rcelcbeS, roeldjet, roetcbeS, D. rcelcbem, A. roelcben roelcbe, roelcbet RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 67 SBefdjer, roctcfc*, roeIcf>e$, is preceded by ber, bit?, ba$ (he, she, that). Its abbreviation is roet, who, both masculine and feminine. The genitive of the singular of roeldjer, roelcfye, roefcf>eS, is only used when it is connected with the proper names of persons to whose qualities it refers ; as, Gicero, roetd)e£ cjro^en 3Rebner$ Scbriften tch befi^c, nxrb niemate ate ©chrtff^ ftetfcr crfcfjt roerben, Cicero, the works of which great orator I possess, will never be equalled as an author. 2)ef[en, beren, beffen, of whom or which, whose, and the plural beren (of whom or which, w T hose), are used, instead of the genitives rcetcbeS, n>eld>er, roeld>eS; as, £)er ©irtner, beflen fttnber tch ftmne, ift fyeute gejtorben, That gardener, whose children I know, has died to-day. £>te 3Mume, beren flatter erfdjetnen, tjt roeifj, That flower, the leaves of which appear, is white. 2)aS$inb, beffen §ttern fefyr reid> ftnb, ift jetyn 3afyre alt, That child, whose parents are very rich, is ten years old. 2Betd>er, roelche, .roetcheS, is followed by a noun, and is declined like the adjective without the article; as, cjruner, a, tune, a, nines, green. It may be used indiscriminately instead of ber, bte, ba$. The pronoun roer, who, is not followed by a noun, (ber, roetcber) 3Ber ^Pfftc&ten tjat, (ber) mu$ ft'e crfutlen, He who has duties is obliged to fulfil them. SBefien 23uch eS iff, roei£ tch nicfyt, I do not know whose book it is. (bem, roeldjem) 5Bem er fetn @elb fytnterlafien rcirb, iyt frfjon befannt, It is already known to whom he leaves his money, (bte, roe(d)e) 5Ben er fyetratfyen n>irb, beren $ater ift ©efanbter, The father of her whom he will marry is an Ambassador. Its genitive was formerly abbreviated into rocp (of whom), and is followed by bep (of him); instead of rcefien and befien ; as, 38e$ bag jjerj »otI tjt, beg gefyt ber 9)iunb uber, Where the heart is full the mouth overfloweth. The pronoun roaS, what, is used as a relative pronoun ; as, 2Ba$ fyter tit, (bag) ift metn, What is here, is mine. 3d) roeifj , roocem) er fprtcbt, I know of whom he speaks, ©agen ©ie mtr, roofron ®ie efien rootfen, Tell me of what you like to eat. (£r rougte rooju er bie $uo,et gebraudjen !onnte, He knew to what end he was able to use the bullet. 5Ba$ id) gefagt fyaU, ba$ ift roaf% What I have said is true. f2 68 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS When the relative pronoun roaS (what) expresses the end or purpose, rooju (to what end) is used as its dative. It is sometimes preceded by ba$ ; as, 2)a£, roaS er *>orfd>(ug, roar ntcbt ratfyfam, .What (that what) he proposed was not advisable. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Interrogative pronouns are declined like the relative pronouns roer? who? roaS? what? but are never used as adjectives before nouns, as in English ; as, SBelcber ©freit iff gcfd)lid)tet rcorben (not roas ©treit) ? What quarrel has been settled ? SBeld)? ©efafyt f>at er aufc geftanben (not roaS ©efafyr) ? What danger has he endured? SBetcbeS 23erm6a,en fyat er fyinrerlaffen (not roaS 93e.rm6gen) ? What fortune has he left? Declension. N. roer? who? roaS? what? G. roeffen? whose? roooon? of whom or what? D. roem? to whom? rooju? to what end? A. roen ? whom ? roaS ? what ? Neither of them have a plural, and roer applies both to the femi- nine and masculine genders. The genitive of roer only is followed by a noun. 2Ber ift f)ier ? Who is here ? SBeflen 5fcif& ^abel, 23anb, ift ba$ ? Whose table, needle, ribband, is that? SBem fyat er e$ gefa^t ? To whom has he said it? Sen roirft £)u befucf^en? Whom are you going to visit ? 2Ba$ ift bort? What is there? 5Beoon rcbet man? Of whom or of what do they speak? SBoju befennt er ftch? (To) what does he confess ? 3Ba$ or 2£ie inet bejafyten ©te fur bag Sleifcfc ? What or How much do you pay for the meat ? The English expression, What sort of, What kind of, is always rendered in German by roaS fur ein, eine, ein (what for a), or by roaS fur (what for) in the singular, and roaS fur in the plural ; as, 2£a6 fur einen ©artcn, roaS fur eine $a£e, roaS fur ein ©djaufpteujauS, fyaben ©ie gefefyen ? What sort of garden, what sort of cat, what sort of theatre have you seen ? 58aS fur Setter roar e$ geftern ? What sort of weather was it yesterday? SaS fur ©drren, $a§en, ©cbaufpielfyaufer, fyaben ©te gefefyen ? What sort (kind) of gardens, cats, theatres, have you seen? Contractions are formed by the combination of the adverbs roo, INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. ()!i where; b«, there; with the prepositions burd), through; uber, over; nacb, after ; aug, out ; with the interposition of the letter r, except rooburd) (not roorburd)) ; as, (buret) roelcbeg) rooburcb, whereby, by what means ; roortiber (uber reelcbes), about what ; (nacb n\'ld>em, nacb rocm) n>ornacb, concerning what ; rooraug (aug roetcbem), whence, on what ac- count ; roortn (in roetd)em), wherein ; rooran (an roelcbem), whereon ; as, 3cf? fann ntrfjt begretfen, rcoburcb; er fo arm cjeroorben iff, I cannot com- prehend by what means he has become so poor. Sr rcujjte, roortiber ber 2tnbere bofe rccrben roiirbe, He knew why the other would become angry. Sr rannte bag s&iel, roornad) cr jieten fottte, He knew the object at which he should aim. 3Boraug fjat er bag gefcbloffcn ?• Whence has he concluded that ? 5Boran erfennen Ste bag %>ud) ? How do you know that booK ? 3Ber=aud>, whoever ; roag^aucr;, whatever ; rcc^aud), wherever ; rcie^ aucb, as also, much ; are always separated in a sentence ; as, 2Ber eg aud) tt>un roirb, eg rotrb ifym ntcbt cjettngen, Whoever will do it will not succeed. SBag jie aucb fagen rcerben, ifl roafjr, Whatever they say will be true. 5Co er aud> iff, tft er unjufrteben, Wherever he be he is dissatisfied. 3Bte fefyr ft'e mid) aud) r>erfotcjen, fo roerben ©te mid) bod; ntd)t erretcben, As much as they pursue me, yet they will not reach me. The following are used both as adjectives and pronouns, but when not followed by a noun are considered as nouns ; as, alter, alle, a(fe$, all ; jeber, jebe, jebeg, each ; trgenb etn, eine, etn, any ; irgenb Siner, Sine, Sing, some one ; PI. Stntcje, some ; betbe, both ; Siner, Sine, Sing eon SSetben, one of either ; etn jeber, eine jebe, ein jebeg, each (of), every one ; manner, mancbe, mandjeg, many ; ftetner, $etne, $etng ron 25etben, neither of them ; fetn, feine, fetn, no ; Reiner, fteine, $eing, none ; etn anberer, eine anbere, etn anbereg, another ; PI. anbere, others ; etroag, some ; roenta,, little ; met, much ; foldjer, fotdie, fotcbeg, such. From these the following are formed, which are used as nouns only ; as, 3emanb, anybody, some one, somebody ; 3t'bermann, every one, everybody ; Meg, everything ; Reiner, £eine, $etng, no one, nobody, nothing ; Siner, Sine, Sing, one, one thing ; 9?tcbtg, nothing ; Sm>ag, anything, something ; SBentcjeg, few words ; SSteleg, (much) many words, many things ; 3eber, each ; £>afie(be, the same thing. 9)?an (one) is used when, in English, the third person of the plural, they, one, or you, would be employed. 70 AUXILIARY VERBS. Examples. Wan fagt, ber ^onta, fet> tobt, They say the king is dead. tylan follte auffyoren, They should leave off. 9jRcm t)at e$ ntd)t getjort, They have not heard it. Wan ift rticf)t immer aufgelegt ju arbeiten, One is not always inclined to work. Wan fonntc nid)t fyoren, n>a$ ft'e fagten, One could not hear what they said. Wan fann e$ faum ajaubcn, One can hardly believe it. Wan fann in £>eutfd}lanb bte 93ud)er rooi?lfei( bcfommcn, You can get books cheap in Germany. Wan tann fur fed>$ pfennig nad> Qfyetfea fasten, You can go to Chelsea for sixpence. Wan fann einen guten Rod fur brei ^funb ©terling faufen, You can buy a good coat for three pounds. § 16. AUXILIARY VERBS. Auxiliary Verbs are so called when they are used with the past participle or infinitive of other verbs for the purpose of forming tenses. They are considered as ordinary verbs when used by themselves ; as, 3<$ fyabe ben £unb, I have the dog ; 3$ bin cin $nabe, I am a boy ; 3d) roerbe ein Ufyrmacfyer, I become a watchmaker. AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. jpaben, to have. Infinitives (Mgemeine ©predjart). | Participles (OJftttelrcort). Present', jpaben, to have. ! Present, £>abenb, having (in= bem man fyat, whilst one has). Past, (Btyabt, had. Compound, &e\)abt fyabenb, having had (or nad>bem man Qtfyabtfyat, after having had). In all verbs, when used in ordinary conversation, the compound participle is more generally expressed by nacbbem. Compound, ©efyabt fyaben, to have had. AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. 71 Present (©egenrcart). Indicative (SSejUmmte (Screcban). Subjiincticc (Ungerciffe ©prednin). id) fyafo, I have. id) t?abe, I may have. bu f)Oft bu bflbeft er (fte, e£, man) fjat et fyctbe rcir f>abcn n>it bctben tbr babt it>r babet fte fyaben fte fyaben Imperfect (Sung* U $3ergangent;eit). icb f?attc, I had. id) fydtre, I might have. bu barreft bu f)dttejt er batte er t>dttc n>ir batten rcir batten i\)t fatter tbr fydrtet fte fatten. Perfect (r roerbet fyaben fte rcerben fyaben icb rcerbe fyaben, I shall have. bu rcerbeft fyaben er rcerbe fyaben roir rcerben b<*ben i\)v rcerbet fyaben fte rcerben fyaben Past Future OBergangene 3 utun ft). icb rcerbe gebabt fjaben, I shall have had. (like the first Future.) Conditional (©egenrcdrtige bebin= genbe £ett). icb rcurbe fyaben, I should have, bu rcurbeft (jaben er rcurbe fyaben rcir rcur ben baton if>r tcurbet fyaben \k icurben fjaben icb rcerbe gebabt fyaben, I shall have had. (like the first Future.) Past Conditional OBergangene bebingenbe 3dt). icb rcurbe gefyabt tyabcn, I should have had. (like the first Conditional.) 72 AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. Imperative (23efef)Ienbe ©presort). Singular. fyabe (bu), have (thou). J)abe er, (have he), let him have. Plural, fyaben rotr, (have we), let us have. fyabt (ifyr), have (ye), fyaben fte, (have they), let them have. Singular ((£tnfyeit). Spabe (bu) ba$ @elb, Have (thou) the money, jpaben ©ie ©ebulb, Have (you) patience. £a£ tfyn bte 35lume fyaben, Let him have the flower. 2a£ unS 35etbe 3faum fyaben, Let both of us have room. Plural CWeMeit). %a$t or 2affct unS bte 23ud)er fyaben, Let us have the books. Spabt (3f>r) ©ebulb, Have (ye) patience. %a$t or Saffet fie 25ucber fyaben, Let them have books. £affen ©ie un£ bte 2luSftcfyt fjaben, Let us have the view. ©enn, to be. Infinitives. Participles. Present, fewn, to be. Present, fejjenb, being (inbem Compound, gewefen fetjn, to have man ijj, whilst one been. is). Future, feim roerben, to be Pasf, geroefen, been. about to be. Compound, a,eroefen fewenb, having been (nacbbem man geroefen tft, after having been). Present. Indicative. Subjunctive. tcf) bin, I am. id) fen, I may be. bu bift bu fet)ff er iji er fet) roir ft'nb rotr feijen ifyr fet)b U)r fe»b fte ft'nb fte feijen Imperfect. id) roar, I was. id) rodre, I might be. bu roarft bu rodreft er roar er rodre rotr roaren rotr n>dren it>r n>aret (roart) tfyr rodref fie n>aren fte rodren AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. Perfect. Indicative. id) bin gerocfen, I have been, (like the Present.) id) roar gercefen, I had been, (like the Imperfect.) id) roerbe fewn, I shall be. (like the Future.) Subjunctive. id) fen gerocfen, I may have been. (like the Present.) Pluperfect. | id) roarc gerocfen, I might have been, (like the Imperfect.) Future. id) roerbe fenn, I shall be. (like the Future.) Past Future. id) roerbe geroefen fewn, I shall have been, (like the Past Future.) id) roerbe gerocfen fewn, I shall have been, (like the Past Future.) Conditional, id) rourbe fewn, I should be. (like the Conditional.) Singidar. fet) (bu), be (thou). fct> (cr), be (he), let him be. Past Conditional, id) rourbc gerocfen fewn, I should have been, (like the Past Conditional.) Imperative. Plural. fenen roir, let us be. fei;b (if>r), be (ye). feoen fie, let them be. The present participles fenenb or roefenb are mostly used as com- pounds ; as, bafenenb, being there ; abroefenb, being absent. Examples of the Imperative. Singular. ©ew fo gut, Be so kind. ©e«en ©te fo giutg, Be so kind. £ajj ifjn fletfug fewn, Let him be industrious. ©ei; (£r ntcfct fo grob, Be (you) not so rude (in addressing a peasant). ©ct) ©te rufyig, Be (you) quiet (in addressing a countrywoman or a servant girl). SaJTet or 2agt un$ aufmerffam fetjn, Let us be attentive. ©ct)b ruing, Be quiet. 2affet or tag t fie fparfam fettn, Let them be sparing. Sajfen ©ie fie etnig fet)n, Let (you) them be unanimous. 74 AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. SBetben, to become. Infinitives. Participles. Present, roetben, to become. Present, roetbenb, becoming Compound, gerootben fewt t, to have (inbem man tritb, become. whilst one be- Future, roerben rcetben, to be comes). about to become. Past, gercotben, become. Compound, gercotben fewenb, hav- ing become (nad)= bem man gewotben ift, after having become). Present. Indicative. Subjunctive. id) mtbe, I become. id) roetbe, I may become. bu rottft bu n?crbefl et roirb et rcerbe rott rcetben rcit rcetben ik nx-tbet if>r n^erbet fte roetben fte roetben Imperfect. id? rcutbe, I became. id) tmitbe, I might become. bu routbeft bu routbeft et rcutbe et rcurbe toit routben nut routben it>r routbet i(>r routbet fte tmttben fte tmttben Perfect. id) bin gerootben, I have become. id) fe» gercotben, I may have be r (like the Present of id) bin.) come. (like the Present of id) few,) Plupi jrfect. id) mat gerootben, I had become, (like the Imperfect of id) roar.) id) nxtte gercotben, I might have become, (like the Imperfect of id) nxtte.) Future. id) tt>etbe rcetben, I shall become, i id) metbe rcetben, I shall become. (like the Future.) (like the Future.) REGULAR ACTIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERB. 75 Past Put lire. Indicative, id) roerbe geroorben fetjn, I shall have become, (like the Past Future.) Conditional. id) rourbe roerben, I should become. Subjunctive. i<$ roerbe geroorben fe»;n, I shall have become, (like the Past Future.) (like the Conditional.) Imperative. Past Conditional. ich rcutbe geroorben fetjn, I should have become, (like the Past Conditional.) roetbe (bu), become (thou), rcerbe (cr), let him become. roerben roir, let us become, rocrbet (ifyr), become (ye), roerben fie, let them become. The augment ge of the past participle, when used with another past participle as an auxiliary verb, is dropped ; as, 3d> bin gefud)t roorben (not geroorben), I have been sought for ; (£t ift gerufen rcorben (not geroorben), He has been called. Examples of the Imperative. Singular. SBerbe (bu) fletfng, Become industrious. $ag it>n ein ©d>neiber roerben, Let him become a tailor. Plural. Saffet or Za$t un$ ftug roerben, Let us become prudent. SBerbet (3t?t) aufmetffam, Become ye attentive, ^aflfet or la$t fie ttorficfytig roerben, Let them become cautious. § 17. THE REGULAR ACTIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERB. Regular active verbs express both an action and a suffering ; as, 3d) tabe ben $ranfen, I comfort the sick ; £>er $ranfe roirb gelabr, The sick is comforted. They are conjugated in the same way as td> fjabe, I have ; ich labe, I comfort. Their compound tenses are formed by fyaben, to have. 76 REGULAR ACTIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERB. Infinitives. Present, laben > to comfort. Compound, a,elabt fyaben, to have comforted. Future, laben roerben, to be about to comfort. Participles. Present, labenb, comforting (in= bem man labt, whilst one comforts). Past, gelabt, comforted (nacbr bem man gelabr fyat, af- ter having comforted). Present. Indicative, id) labt, I comfort (I do comfort), bu labft er labt rotr laben it?r labt ft'e laben Imperfict Subjunctive, id) labt, I may comfort, bu labeft er labe rotr laben U)r labet fie laben icb labte, I comforted (I did com- bu labteft [fort), er labte trit labten tf>t labtet fie labten Perfect id) labete, I might comfort. bu tabeteft er labete roir labeten ifyr labetet fie labeten id) tyabe gelabt, I have comforted, (like the Perfect of fyaben.) id) \>abe gelabt, I may have com- forted. (like the Perfect of fyaben.) Pluperfect. id) fyatte gelabt, I had comforted, (like the Pluperfect of fyaben.) id) \)dtte gelabt, I might have com- forted, (like the Pluperfect of fyaben.) Future, id) roerbe laben, I shall comfort. | id) roerbe laben, I shall comfort, (like the Future of fyaben.) (like the Future of tjaben.) Past Future. id) roerbe getabt baben, I shall have comforted, (like the Past Future of fyaben.) id) roerbe gelabt fyaben, I shall have comforted, (like the Past Future of fyaben.) REGULAR ACTIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERB. 77 Conditional. id) rourbe laben, I should comfort. (like the Conditional of fyaben.) Singular. labe (bu), comfort (thou), labe er, let him comfort. Past Conditional, id) n>utbe gelabt fyaben, I should have comforted, (like the Past Conditional of fyaben.) Imperative. Plural. laben nnr, let us comfort, labet (tfjr), comfort (ye), laben fie, let them comfort. Examples of the Imperative. Singular. %abe (bu) ben $ranfen, Comfort (thou) the sick. £a£ u)n ben Unglucfltcben (aben, Let him comfort the unfortunate man. Plural. ^affet or Za$t un$ bie fttanfen laben, Let us comfort the sick. Sabet (3f>r) bie Unglutf lichen, Comfort (ye) the unfortunate. 2af)*et ft'e bie jpungtigen laben, Let them comfort the hungry. Saffen ©te un£ bie £)urfttgen laben, Let (you) us comfort the thirsty. § 18. PASSIVE VOICE. Infinitix Present, gelabt roerben, to be comforted. Compound, gelabt morben fetjn, to have been com- forted. Future, rcetben gelabt roetben, to be about to be comforted. Participles. Past, gelabt, comforted. Compound, gelabt rootben, been comforted. Present. Indicative, id) roetbe gelabt, I am comforted, (like the Present of roetben.) Subjunctive, id) n?etbe gelabt, I may be com- forted, (like the Pres. Subj. of rcerben.) Imperfect. id) nuirbe gelabt, I was comforted, (like the Imperfect of reetben.) ich rourbe gelabt, I might be com- forted, (like the Imperf. Subj. of rcetben.) 78 AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. Perfect. Indicative. tch bin gelabf rcotben, I have been comforted, (like the Present of fet)n.) Subjunctive, id) fet) Qthbt morben, I may have been comforted, (like the Pres. Subjunct. of fet)n.) Pluperfect. id) nxit getabt roorben, I had been comforted (like the Imperfect of fet)n.) id> rcdte gelabt rootben, I might have been comforted, (like the Imperf. Subj. of fet)n.) Future. id) roetbe §elabt rcetben, I shall be comforted. (like the Future.) id) roetbe getabt metben, I shall be comforted. (like the Future.) Past Future. id) roerbe gelctbt wotben fet)n, I shall have been comforted, (like the Past Future.) Conditional, id) rcittbe gelabt roerben, I should be comforted, (like the Conditional.) id) reerbe gctabt rcotben fet)n, I shall have been comforted, (like the Past Future Subjunct.) Past Conditional, id) routbe gelctbt rcotben fenn, I should have been comforted, (like the Past Conditional.) The Imperative is like the Present Subjunctive where the pro- noun is placed after the verb. 19. THE AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. Saffen, to allow, to let, to permit. Present. Indicative, id) laffe, I allow, bu Idffef* et ta£t roir tafien tt)t lagt (lafTet> fie faf|Vn Subjunctive, id) (affe, I may allow, bu raffcft er laffc rcit laffen i^r laftet fie lafifen AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 79 Imperfect. Indicative. ich lief, I allowed (did allow), bu liefeft er hep n>ir ttefen ifyr lief t (liefet) fie liefen Subjunctive. id) liefc, I might allow. bu liefeft er lief e roir liefen i\)t lief et ft'e Uefjen id) fyctbe gelaffen, Per I have allowed. feet, id) fyahe gelaften, I may allowed. id) ijatfe gelafien, Pluju I had allowed. >rfect. id) fyatte gelaffen, I might allowed. have hav Future, id) roerbe laffen, I shall allow. | id) reerbe laffen, I shall allow. Past Future, id) roerbe gelaffen fyaben, I shall have I id) rrerbe gelaffen fjaben, I shall have allowed. allowed. Conditional. Past Conditional, id) rcurbe laffen, I should allow. | id) rourbe gelaffen fyaben, I should have allowed. Imperative. laf (bu), allow (thou). Iaffe er, allow him. laffen a>ir, allow us. fofiet ((aft) if>r, allow (ye), laffen fie, allow them. None of the auxiliary verbs of mood, with the exception of this, have the imperative. £affen corresponds with the English verb to let. There is an active and a passive voice ; as, 3d) lajfe ben ©arten, I let the garden (for hire). £>er ©arten rotrb gelaffen, The garden is let (for hire). The following examples shew the difference of idiom in Ger- man and English : 2af u)n %\\ ipaufe bleiben, Allow him to stay at home. Sajfen ©ie it>n avbeiten, Let him work. laffen <3te ba$, Leave that alone (commanding:). 3d) lief ben jtofynarjt tommen, I ordered the dentist to come. fet i)at ben SSetbtecfyet auSteben taffen, The judge had permitted the criminal to finish his speech. £)te !Kegictung rottb tyn feinem %atet fyctben folgen lajfen, The government will have permitted him to succeed his father in his duties. 3d) wutbe mit* hie $leibet fyaben mac&en lajfen, I should have had the cloth made for me. Mujfen, to be obliged. Present. Indicative. id) mufj, I must (I am obliged bit mu£t et mufj rott mujfen ifyt tmifjt (mujfet) fie mujfen Indicative, id) mufjte, I was obliged, (like the Imperfect of the regular Active Verb.) Perfect. id) \)tbe gemufjt, I have been obliged. Subjunctive, id) mujfe, I may be obliged, bu mujfejt er muife n?ic mujfen ifyt mujfet fte mujfen Imperfect. Subjunctive, id) mufjte I might be obliged, (like the Imperfect Indicative.) id) fyabe gemufit, I have been obliged. Pluperfect. id) fycttte $emu£t, I had been obliged. id) fyatte gemufjt, I might have been obliged. Future. id) roetbe mujfen, I shall be obliged. | id) roerbe mujfen, I shall be obliged. Past Future. id) roerbe gemugt fyaben, I shall have | id) n?etbe gemujjt fyaben, I shall have been obliged. I been obliged. AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 81 Conditioned. ich tmirbe muffen, I should be obliged. Past Conditional. icb rourbe gemujjt fyaben, I should have been obliged. Examples. ©ie muffen ft'cf) anfletben, You or they must dress. 5Btr mu£ten einen 55efuch mad>en, We were obliged to pay a visit. %)ex £>ienet fyat cuiScjefycn muffen, The valet has been obliged to go out. %)a$ #tnb \)at feme ©tern wrtaffen muffen, The child had been obliged to leave his parents. Ztte ©cbufer roetben folcjen muffen, The pupils will be obliged to follow. <£r rotrb bte <5tabt fyaben t?erlaffen muffen, He will have been obliged to leave the town. 2>u rotirbeft e$ tfyun muffen, Thou shouldst be obliged to do it. 3d) rourbe ba$ ®efrf)dft fjetben aufgeben muffen, I should have been obliged to give up business. ©otten, to be compelled, to be obliged. Present. Indicative, id) foil, I shall (I am compelled), bu faUtf etfatt n>it fatten $t fattt, (fottet) fte fatten Subjunctive, id) fatte, I may be compelled, bu fatteft. et fatte. n>ir fatten, tbr fottet. fte fatten. Imperfect Indicative. td}fottte,I should(I was compelled) (like the Active Verb). Subjunctive. ich fottte, I might be compelled. (like the Indicative). Perfect. id) fyctbc cjefottt, I have been com- pelled. id) fyctbe cjefottt, I may have been compelled. Pluperfect, id) fycttte cjefottt, I had been com- I id) fykte gefottt, I might have been pelled. ipelled. 82 AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. Future. Indicative. Subjunctive. utrcerbe fallen, I shall be compelled. | iitrcerbe fallen, I shall be compelled. Past Future. icb roerbe gefallt tjaben, I shall have been compelled. Conditional. id) roerbe gefottt fjaben, I shall have been compelled. Past Conditional. id) rotirbe gefoltt fyaben, I should have been compelled. id) roiirbe fallen, I should be com- pelled. Examples. SBtr fotlten @ute*> tfyun, We ought to do good. ©otticMt&un? Shall I doit? £r f)cttte feine ^flidjt tfyun fallen, He should have done his duty. <5r fallte ifym wrgeben fyctben, He might have forgiven him. £)er ©tubent (©tubirenbe) fall ben %jt erftodjen fyaben, The student shall have stabbed the Physician. SBenn er ju ipaufe bleiben fattte, (fa) roiirbe et franf roerben, If he should stay at home he would become ill. ©otlte e$ nad)tf)etlig fur <3ie fewn? Should it be disadvantageous for you 2Ba$ fall bat fyetpen ? What is the meaning of that ? SBollen, to be willing. Present. Subjunctive id) rootle, I may be willing, bu roolleft. er rootle, roir roollen. if>r rootlet. fie roollen. Indicative, id) roill, I am willing, bu rotllft cr roill roir roollen ii)x rooltt (rootlet) fie rootlen Indicative. id) rootlte, I was willing. (like the Active Verb). Imperfect. Subjunctive, id) rootlte, I might be willing, (like the Indicative). Perfect. id) fyabe geroottt, I have been willing. I id) tjabe geroottt, I may have been willing. AUXILIARV VERBS OF MOOD. Pluperfect. Indicative, id) batte geroodt, I had been willing. Subjunctive, id) fyatre gereotft, I might have been willing. Future, id) roerbe rootlen, I shall be willing. | tcb roerbe n>ol(en, I shall be willing. Past Future, id) roerbe gerooCU fyaben, I shall have I icf; roerbe gerooUt fyaben, I shall have been willing. Conditional, id) roiirberooUen, I should be willing. been willing. Past Conditional, id) roiirbe geroollt fyaben, I should have been willing. Examples. $Btr roollen e$ oerfudjen, We will try it. ©ie roolten un$ gem fefyen, They were much inclined to see us. 2)u \)a\t e$ nid)t oerfytnbern rcotlen, Thou hast not been willing to prevent it. ©ie fyaben tyn nur be$ SlbenbS fprecben roollen, They were only willing to speak to him in the evening. (£t roirb e$ nicbt fyaben tyun rootten, He did not like to do it. £)ie ftinber rourben fyaben fpielen roollen, The children would have been willing to play. 2Bollt 3t>t ruljig \t\)n? Will you be quiet? £)urfen, to dare, to be allowed. Present. Indicative, id) barf, I dare (I am allowed), bu barfft er barf rotr bur fen ifyr burft (burfet) fie bur fen Subjunctive, id) burfe, I may be allowed, bu burfe jr. er burfe. rotr bur fen. ifyr burfet. ft'e bur fen. Imperfect, id) burfte, I was allowed, j id; burfte, I might be allowed, (like the Active Verb). (like the Indicative). g2 84 AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. Perfect. Indicative, id) fjctbe geburfr, I havebeen allowed. Subjunctive, id) \)ohz geburft, I may have been allowed. Pluperfect. id) fyatte geburfr, I had been allowed. id) tjdffc geburft, I might have been allowed. Future. id) roerbe burfen, I shall be allowed. | id) roerbe burfen, I shall be allowed. Past Future. id) roerbe cjeburft fyaben, I shall have been allowed. Conditional, id) rourbe burfcn, I should be allowed. id) roerbe o,eburft fjaben, I shall have been allowed. Past Conditional, id) rourbe geburft fjaben, I should have been allowed. Examples. ©ie burfen nicht laut reben, You dare not speak loud. 2Bir burfen ju ifym fommen, We may come to him. ©cine &6d)ter burften auf ben SSatt gefyen, His daughters were allowed to go to the ball. &$ burfte nicht fpdter r fet)n, It ought not to be later than ten o'clock. ©te fyctt u)re ^reunbinn befucben burfen, She has been allowed to visit her friend. (Er \)at ben ^(an entbecfen burfen, He had been allowed to discover the plan, ©te fydtten nidjt ofyne Srlctubnifs au&jefyen burfen, You dared not go out without permission. 3d) roerbe ©ie einlaben burfen, I shall be allowed to invite you. 28ir roerben ben tnerten October beenbigt fyctben burfen, On the fourth of October we shall have been allowed to have finished. 3d) rourbe auf ben Sftarft gefyen burfen, I would have been allowed to go to the market, ©te rourben ba$ 2teb fyctben anfangen burfen, They would have been allowed to begin the song. AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 85 .Vtonnen, to be able. Present. Indicative. Subjunctive. id) fann, I can (I am able). ici> tonne, I may be able (I could). bit fcmnfr er farm rcir fonnen it>r fonnt (rennet) fie fonnen bu fonneft er forme roir Fonnen ti?r fonnet fte fonnen. Imperfect. id) fonnre, I could. I tch fonnte, I might be able. (like the Active Verb.) (like the Indicative.) Perfect. icf; t)Ctbe cjefonnt, I have been able, i id) tjabe ijefonnt, I may have been able. Pluperfect. id) fjatte cjefonnt, I had been able, i icf; fydtte cjefonnt, I might have been able. Future. tch roerbe fonnen, I shall be able. | icf; rcerbe fonnen, I shall be able. Past Future. tch roerbe cjefonnt fyctben, I shall have | icf; roerbe cjefonnt fjaben, I shall have been able. been able. Conditional. Past Conditional, id} roiirbe fonnen, I should be able, icf; rourbe cjefonnt fyaben, I should have been able. Examples. 3cf; fcmn nocb fefjcn, I can still see. (£r fann e$ ^ie(Ieicf)t ernjrfyaft meinen, Perhaps he may mean it seriously. 2Bie fonnten ©ie e$ gjcutben ! How could you believe it ! Sie fonnten e£ t>crfucf;en, You might try it. 3cf; f;abe e$ ntcf>t ofyne fte tf;un fonnen, I have not been able to do it without them, ©er Sift&er f?at ben M ntct>t fancjen fonnen, The fisherman could not (had not been able) to catch the fish. 86 AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 3<$ roerbe ba$ @etb ndcbften 2)onnerftag empfangen ftmnen, I shall be able to receive the money next Thursday. 5Btt roerben cS mtt @en>if?bett fyabcn ernoarten fcnnen, We shall have been able to expect it with certainty, ©ie rourben e$ ofyne ^lad)t\)d\ ettauben fonnen, You could permit it without disadvantage. ©ie nxirbe e$ fyaben utrternefymen fonnen, She would have been able to undertake it. Indicative. id) mag, I like, bu magft er mag rait mogen if)t mogt (moget) fie mogen 9Kogen, to like. Present. Subjunctive, id) moge, I may like, bu mogeft cr moge n>ir mogen tfyt moget fte mogen id) mod>te, I liked. (like the Active Verb.) Imperfect. j id) mbd>te, I might or should like, (like the Indicative.) Perfect. id) tyabe gemodtf, I have liked. | id) fyabt gemoc^t, I may have liked. Pluperfect. id} \)atte gemod>t, I had liked. i id) fjdtte gemodjt, I might have I liked. Future, id} roerbe mogen, I shall like. | itf> roerbe mogen, I shall like. Past Future. id> roerbe gemod)t fyaben, I shall i id) roetbe gemocfyt fyaben, I shall have liked. have liked. Conditional, id) n>urbe mogen, I should like. Past Conditional, id) rcurbe gemocf>t f>aben, I should have liked. AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 87 Examples. 3cb mag fefjr gem in ©efetlfcbaft fcnn, I like to be in company very much. ©ie mocbte feine ^tafylerei nid>t, She did not like his boasting. ffibfyten ©ie gem einc $tafd)e 28ein fyaben ? Should you like to have a bottle of wine ? (£t t?at it>n nirf)t jtur&en megen, He did not like to ruin him. (Sic tjaben jie ntc^t eettatfyen megen, They did not intend to betray them. SBerben ©ie batum bitten megen ? Will you like to ask for it ? ©ie rcurbe Ueber bie SBabtfyeit reben megen, She would have preferred speaking the truth. § 20. IRREGULAR VERBS. There are about 200 irregular verbs. Irregular verbs are those which deviate from the conjugation of regular verbs in their im- perfects and past participles, and in the latter case the imperative retains the vowel of the 2d present indicative. Some have their imperfects in te, and their past participles in t, with the augment ge before them like the regular verb ; as, 3$ roeip, I know ; id) roupte, I knew ; gcroujjt, known ; roiffe, know. The vowels of the present indicative in all irregular verbs are changed, as, e into a, a into ie, ie into 0, a into u ; as, 3d) befefyle, I command ; id) befafyl, I commanded ; befofyten, com- manded. 3d) laffe, I let; id) tie£, I did let; getaffen, let. 3d) gietje, I pour ; id) go§, I poured ; gegofien, poured. 3d) fd)(age, I strike; id) (d)lug, I stroke; gefd)lagen, stroke. These form their past participles in en, and their imperfect sub- junctives in e, and change the vowels of their indicatives, as, a, 0, u, into a, e, u, like ordinary irregular verbs. There are six classes in which changes take place in the 2d and 3d person of the present indicative, the imperfect indicative and subjunctive, the past participle and the subjunctive. GENERAL VIEW. The imperfects of irregular verbs generally end in a consonant, and the past participle in en. 88 IRREGULAR VERBS. CD c3 CD CD CD > P> > t> t> Cfl cd Cd cd cd ?H Fh « ^H s-i CD CD CD 0) cd o< &< »H Oh c^ £ a S a a <3> ft» HH HH HH H- 1 hH C "£ O O O O o £££ Jzjfe CD Q a §, "fifc s <5) 2 ^ 22 « ? g g ? ? « s « =1 s H§o vO -JO CD r43 £ B e .2- S £ £ UOUUUOUVU&IUOu ft> ft> ft> <3>cr>cncr>cf>c?)cr>cn<35 c» ^ ^ w CD "^ C2 « 5 ^ M ■« _ CD *£> Oh IE- a CD • l-H f> Fh -+J CD c« fe ^G .a *CD 1 ft> E ft* .5 n **— E E e « 3 c c: EJ _ JD A vO « a a C ^i & S £ en CD a !§ .G H ^ CD w CD r4 H CD £ CD ^3 1 -S 1, t 3 ^ rG s cd O -t-3 G ■a CD O CD O M CD Id CD +J CD G Fh O ■♦J G 3 CD ft> g B" e e e « s" s E? c .5 E e E &1= 1 £ >£> jO JO SM— SB a a c .0 £ £ ■J3 >0 w ^> e ,ft> -*i, <35 ft> ft> ft* G cd a .a 1 %* § S* c ft» ft> IRREGULAR VERBS. 89 s . = • . o o B •—► JR o B «- • • ^rj- CO tE- IE- B g ^r .5 *j 'S s £ £ E tr £ ■§ ^ -5 H - £ = = 2 •B- CO CO CO Cf> en CO « 1 s s £ 1 B B at b b en E B o e S 1= B B B B efi --^ B B B --. E B o b l-l O- at 3 1 o - •^ 7Z ^o *zj vT> vO ■SJ en , ^— >i en B1 n O ■o £ a> ^-. en *o CO cr; tgi en Ctt «l o CO Cfi « cr: t, es Cfi en «5 ^S Ot "73 /-^~ =: r§ (j a /" N P T"» *-» IB- E «-. «-cs -a .>o *ej 2" T^iH o s ;>£>> c >*-«c3e73S «s SS^c^ "E b ST « o B <3 « $_ ^. ^ s-> B B s-» t i°. « o «vi « o'rr o S -s ^ ! H >S ^ - ^ ^ ^ ft? i_, »B- niloo •— c >*- r- u^. «— i^» -^ vO ^> — ^ c z 3 2 -•-^ ^£ =^ >E£ ^^tJ^S-r; g ^DvO vOvO>OV3 ^>o oo O iB- O © gj «) (J) c) C5 .53 • .... . . . . • • • • a» .S • o .JS I I gB .S r^ i 73 BO 0-£ B^^aJfli? 1 ^ hi > 1) V CD — o o „ B B vj •ti c o -P- E S « >S 5 B X ^ §> «S. B 2 e « fi ,«* ^ o* 3 .S JS j^ fc» J->B BiJ ks= Boooo^oo ^O »B- *0 *0 >^ .O v^ o o o o ft> 3 ^ b*J I fMf If llM s ; * If r3 «.» ^ ./-* ^f) HI Ig||I IllJiiilllllit 1 CO cococbcbcococococbcocOcbcOcbcocbcbcbcococo — ^ IS :S IS 4 -5 s £ o o O 1 3.3 It tflf-l-lllIIIStltltlttaa f g^ ._ «•- _ W- » •— *- *- »-► j_, t_ l_ >— t_ ._ i_ ._- l_- «— - «—«_«_ q s *& •»•&••- "^ N — ► o -— ^ — g <&. ,- co 5 e c _ ~ *2 tf _. g> e ^| cp g^ § | | | co^c g *§ 1§ g _. _ „S J2 ^S £ C S g^S-22-32-2.»^li2.i c i« c i*2-.B:,»: *S -y> *& • e. _: *_ ** jBr ^^ w ^ o £ „ co o ._ co £ e c _g 5 i^cofl|'S^_B£So C o_^ogf ^ X_lSJ^f^8'-|i&;SS££:£££SS££ 1 _::::::: ^ ^ :::::::::: : g. ^ CD ^ ^O .S ^ be o i*sL hlgllj'i'i **1 ■■at .iff ili||flliiift|igif X J 1 1 # § f # f « S S _ S ;f £ e s e g £ c r £c- ttee.eij sit? 8 8 8-1 CC Si £ -M t ISSSSSll * is I £ 1 1 '§ & i s o — • O ^ • »v | g_ « « <3 <3 <3 i& c~ cjs. £=. c~ c~ vO <4— « id •in. <3 CO 3-» S> 8 8 B 8 8 MO 2 s .^1 ■"1 ^ . » ^ „ >C~ <73 >-s "■a a » /— >. ^s 8 I 2 ft. i: «v e» «v> o .— i& c~ ex cji. C=- Ci. § S-l a* §£ O «* IB u 61 <*> & en 8 '1 b> O 8 8 C 8 & MO g : r§ llllll§ll-ill If If sf £c»e.^c|£es i i & S 888fe § 92 IRREGULAR VERBS. cd f> > » •43 -43 03 o3 fi %-t a e *§ ^ >& ?h vo ^ >c i4- a ^> >o vc- ws2^5C«-^»j-.s-»«ii- c±iii-tii. CD ^>^>0^>00^>^>^>^>^>^>^>^i>0^>0 tl> ^> o .9 CD s ■^ s .2 1 3 3 o 3 en 3 3 ^- tin. ti— 3 O J Si ^e <■& ^ «^— i^— »*— CD Ph cc Oh 02 03 1 3 *-> US- 3 o 3 o 3 I?" «£L «*- J^ ^ w I ja- o 5 1 P-. "*"* Ph CD ^3 /-*N s? 9: -« 3 3 £5 § -<3 .9 CO ^1 •-CJ ^ «. J3 3 3 3 o 5S- 1 ^& ^s- ^ « ^ ^ O i Pi C2 CD ,?H O CD Ph ,P * :fl &h 'C ^ .9 « „i ^ £3 nr ^ « llsNs^iJtggji^&i: 111 H ^ o 3 o^ - o o o- o o 3 3 o o I - I ^3 IRREGULAR VERBS. 93 I 4 ^ 1 1 si & £ '§> £ ^ ^IiSi«;i5!&|i!S I^IIiffll-f fit 5 cd>r> N r>u±enenenen.j^i£N>£ *£1 CT, *> enenenenenenenen o § *©■ IB I >g> • • • ' ^ :::::: : £ ^ O p Pn en c res en n =: *£■ e i Cq5 en c t o -o Oh * r<5 ■s g 6i 8 at en en at --• «5 en o es "S »0 «fc- S : ^C3 ^e s Fh OJ O CD CD T3 CO a c «+-. 09 CD CD o __ 02 >> ^ ^2 | QD « o o ~ O CD «B "EH o S -t-J Fh Ed ft o to o cd 03 s o CO o H 1 CD o n CO O b-3 Is B o ^ bD o o *1 CD O 4H O s QD o 1 -o •— ' CD o m *- o o e o '8 e i2t g s ft) c s e 'Er Si J-. cs en en *3) e^ g 94 IRREGULAR VERBS. O «0 ^ 'xi 5> .?» IS "■S e a e & ^ S- JS ~ - . S S ^ ^ ^ £:£:£.<£ & g 1 , ^ .1=f s S u § CO CO s ^ 4B .& CD CO •& 1 a, a S l s|l si si 1 ^^^-e-^^^.tiS co «-.— U— C— L. t«— •-«— U— 1-* J_» e O CD > a CD S3 ft, CO «.> CO £ •^j &i s ej 0«>«l>Sj«i>^>ri>00 a Oh «> « GO © CO C0COCOC0C0COCOS> $> CO ^ .a co >o >£> -a s _&H 1 * CD Oh rS 4 o !§ o ^j ^; £ c S 2 .- ^ ^q. ^ ^q- ^. £ i: O O e £ O St •2J •-d 9 g 6=5 CO CO £ a. ^— < ft- s-> "a CZ-x^-uz-iz-*5± J> a. ^J1> >o >£> § !§ CO •1— 1 4 r§ • s "5 3 CO CD •v» r H H h4 1 1 -4-< a '2 £ £ it £ £ £ £ | $ CD CO CO ►J Oh * CO a £ s ^ H Eh # a N ^e • cT *CD ^3 *** ' fl, H-J ^f 5 " CO s tl— <3 .a CO 8 CD Oh •e 1 P 03 ^ CD s K ^ a "g ^ 'S - 1 ■- *g> ^ ^> s> 3 3; S e £ "5 "S >g *§> a O iX! CD O CD CD Oh .a # Sh *CD £ CO CO £ § CO C3 I J CD 02 CD H r§~ CD cd _ ^ § 1 fc g S -a -* jf ft * ^-s § BoSS a o|-- f tr 'S s •- ^ « - ^ ^e ^ ,*e ;e & £_ £ | | »^- «^- «^- t^- \^— L^- U^- $> J) ^1 CD CD t 1 O e to O o 0) -^ c '3 £ Oh a a CD -a H e 03 O f 1 2 *cu CD c CO .a .5 CO £ • — > a s-> *■* CO s^> vO vO IRREGULAR VERBS 95 Ph £ b ^» 1 e e >P- ~ g g n g o e c c ^Si-e:c H ^ ill II s*$t* * * ititl i *£*?£.£,£ 12. £<£-£- ^ ^ fc t«iJ§ c «i *& V. ^» «rf j_> i-> ^ j_, o ti> o ** *i. o o o o o o CS5 O <3) *> «* o o O CT> <*> <5> O C5 O O O CS 1 ) s. >o >r> vo S £ S S iC <&. (C- li- 5=- <£lcno<^<35 <^> *fj 4? ■ • • • ■» HB* • • • • -& • *6" • • <«> W g -X> %£> vO o «* o^> t»— <3=- li- <3i- <*^- <*— o § " w 1 | » t 2 al «■«=■£.* g, If 5^ * ^ * Is ? M 1 a ^> « t &l o si 1*1 it iji *&- **?- <£L en en *<$> *9* ; . • oj> ^ • • • ■ ->» • • ^ ■ • ^ a. i k I I f § ? * £ § I £> ! |§^a^ S 8 >5^ J I cS I 8 s § "> %>*■£ o o o 3o^^^ ^ « * c8 ^ p, o < c o ~ 3 ^ - o S o o o 3o-^o 1 5 tf * S 5 «I§IS § 5 5S~«~g E ^ g * it S f s 1 4r 1 1 f J 96 IRREGULAR VERBS. Sf*g£f ss.s c3 J3 cS CD CD CD g> S .Si .£ ci o ego o Jq -2 A sSi « s Si-fa ^> ^> ^> ^^ ^> ^> *j « O (S) O (J) «) cr><3)<3>Cf)CJ)<3} $> lSL t= -» 3 ^ -S -o tS f f f f I®" f f !§! f • -w> ^ •» ■>©■ s r§ : : : : : sS : ■3 £ #o I *° /-s :§: O s3D »£Q ^B g >e ->» ^g c: *- c c a •— be a — o 2 ° y£J «>» ^ CO 03 tl o CD v- ^©- *©• ^S~ .^S 1 g c ^S 2 2 e *5 e -e- .St •in "s-» IRREGULAR VERBS. 97 co co* co > > > > -> 3 CO co co CO M C & f-i fi Eh ''- 9 CO CO CO CO CO S Ph & a & Oh Dh ~ a a a a %> a S n H HH H o o o o _o 1— 1 O at o at J5 nrJ ^^^iz; £ & a £ at P CO CO .S< 2 .§ c: c CO Ja *£ en g o lE o «>t en vQ at C o r~ § 1 £ o o O Q Q en ""£ 8 fi P o ~ O «k> O ^> <3) en CO S> s> » en « en CO o X3 <*i .o S o ^ gi ^O 'O -O i* £ g 'O -O .Q Cp wg- -y> vg- • -yj *g ., a. B a> en s c — ^/ « -o JQ ,« « g o c so CO j> .& CO « e e CO e ft. •8 a> J2> 33 a ja /5 14. a E at Ol ■^ o en en CO ^T; en r^ ^ fl CO 4 aj 1 •a -3 en at CO « ' * £ ^ *= en £ £ ° 3 s c~ a a & & » Ctt *£> en O O 2 S 2 ^ «?» .t! »g- to *©■ ** -is e co 03 •B >o ^ cd »3 £ at e -so . >» T3 CO a co O .£ « CO ^2 co O O ^ O c O s- ^5 -u +j *t a> en va ;3 ^ co ' CO pCJ g _ '53 cB o 2 * £ - e o o e g *» *» 2t io ** § — ► - — . en vO S SI 8 'co CO 3 o S -st ^ o o 2 g « CO 2 ^ CO o -3 I CO CO a ft. AJ. ° *> aa <£i en vt o v^' •ft a s2 ^ ^ « g a & : : : £ CO bo CO *H 1 1 2 -fc 1 1 ^ 5 o o 3 o "S g. g ^ -^ CO +- ^ ^ * 98 NEUTER OR INTRANSITIVE VERBS. s? 4? ~ si ^F ;§: ^ ._. — j g. « « « « o" «> ^ *^ ^> «i> ■&> o ^ ft> 3-> ^•§•3 8 -3 -» "? £ 8 8 fi. ^ .5 J* 8 *g & : : : : rs- £ i Q .2 1 8 be £ o o c3 ■8 CO CD o cd s-< o3 CD -a 03 bs CD CD *& *3 &■ o o S 2 c e i | « Q w CD ^O «i=- *5» g, « <3 O O £ ^.\2r £ S 8 .<-» CD i-i 6? CD •r* 03 -a J 03 +» CO P> H g a* s i CD 1 o ^5 CD ;£j CD . .£} o CO -fl - D-. 03 CD &,1 fl .13 O s-» &o cji. S-i «J CD P* „ o o s CD CD O 03 co CO CD U Ph K CD $£ E CD- ^ ol 2 Q Hi- ss- • r3 CD CD CD 2 . 03 £ S t-i ^h en to <4-i CD Cfl CD cd rS &! CD CD § >■ CO o3 .j ■* c S'-S i-i fH fl o 2 bJD S ^ ^ ^ >5 * ^ ^ ® 1 ^ « i -a to ^ »- 03 o3 cd § B CO Ph CD P^ NEUTER OR INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 99 - a * 111 1 . 1 ^ £ « g I si rt 0) S 5§ r/2 Vi .S C ei g ^ ^q _a> eg § ... J ; ; : : ; ; £. £ ; ; ; 13 c^'s ?s S ^ : ; • • : • Z & ■ • 5 ^ & £ So-* 3 w j§ ^ .. .2i es o £ fl - w © S g § ^*5 ^ o c h2 100 NEUTER VERBS. •«* 9. . -d I . 41 . ** *J . -3 vD vO vO til =3 t2- a j^ -W O «+^ «> o w 5-> O *> ^» -d -cT O tS) CO CO o ej o CO CO CO ^~\ /»-"■> "6 ■3 P 03 ■u g 03 g P O fr- ee p 03 a" o •S 02 03 ! 1 ^ 5 £ <3 "« ^O »0 .A jO s 1 o ^» <^» ^§ S tt »- w w a w -ct & s-» ** -w O "cj *v2 «> t4— CP- »£> p 03 03 > P fl i— i a ired himself by runni ,nging their vowels, a P Sh S : : • 1— 1 o3 r 03 02 rP p 03 p o p o o l ^ 03 1 M c CO m o rP rG p 03 -d ;d geteift, I have t led through Ita CO g C « 11 CO >£> e e c en CO si «0 1 O C3 ;o throng ten, catch cold a 03 c3 P w -tf 03 g 1 ^ £ ^ -4_3 03 M 02 C6 1 o a O o3 "t^ c2 * cS H^rP o -w l& 03 rP !§ CO ^P !>, O 02 2 "5 3 «s .t2 -« «,o o u «* a o 3 3 M ^3 o H c5 jd /> a /> N— / ^^ o U_ C> /> JO P CO ^ II S3 a S « S "S t=S fc: <+-- U— 1X2- sT> 03 I 3 «i> O O O J-» j-> 5^ <^> *> ^> A) 02 03 CO CO CO CO o 6> O CO CS3 vis- O gl .£ O o o ■2J a ■ti* o 's an o GO P 03 .5 3 O fe- ed p e DO ea cu CO p 1 s 3*5 >• CO G 5° S a £ «3 <$ o j=> yO JO r§ : • co -£J to « a tea «tl o> o cs US. fce. J3v ^ 03 "33 43 o 03 O P 2 no 03 > ^ 03 «l 03 P 3 S b -d 03 P a 03 o O '2 «i> 4-» 11 CO vO '55 i .P 03 a o be P 1 03 ^P "<3 o 6 s to 1 f ten, to pray mpfen, to smoke rren, to become d 'o o 03 ^ bp s P bb 3 3 .a ^ o 03 O +j C a o o 03 o a « e c^ * "£ o 3 3 *r P tt*" c: o £ ^» ICQ. -w 5=f o «tr 3 <5 O <3 W i-» ^ t-a 3-> « -«i « J^ jO jO jO t>> o Q) u— 02- js^ NEUTER VERBS. 101 _R. .^ c CD .J 3 ^2 s-'S sp^S 2 2 v c o- s. ^ £ S S" <30 *J Si 3 *B 3 2 -^ a> O «b» o -- --- "^3" tl" ^-. --/ ~— «> CJ en 'T> o ci cr o •a* B JS 1> -3 gi s •to 5 *1 "e = £ g ^ & aS * ■a o o r±4 U o B O o C3 O e$ C3 1 en B "S B ^> ^> o b X2 e C C C 1 i 2 2 ^2: 4J B en ^* B >£ .2: '^S- b" s b" B CD 9 b£ a CO C3 B ^ /— V O -S -t-. »~ E B CD fl ft, -<— e' en e s £ <3 O 2 2 d c ^ 11 en B "b 2 ?3 2 »<5 s cS e CD •^. ■^ o a» «> ^ u ^ o o o ^> ftl ^> W en en en en en en en en en cr cn en en -n en £ £ 'co CD £» £ >^> CO "^ — ■^ o CD CD •♦«» H 4 j3 en J2 .£» >— • £2 « e$ S- o _ « 2 2 e o- j? £ ££ 32 B ,3 tax ,2_ en £ * B e: e: 2 en o 2 at es 8 s e: en ■""I -6 r§ : -s ^ B Eh CO a o s B B 5 «0 f *1 ^ <2 fcJD tj B C v — bJD S b£*£ l •> ^s JSd 8 >-> s- •3 3 /. c .2 o to use to spri to suck , to sou g '5b o '53 o Oh g CO ^ O .3 O O '3 o o es B es 03 c o - e? *- s= g 5 S ^ 2 2 g ♦5 B 5 B CO J» §1 b" b" at b" en B OS J5 -_. 2 g- ji ;§; g g B o ^2 fB- M 2 § Q 102 REFLECTIVE TERBS. REFLECTIVE VERBS ftd) ctbfubten, to cool oneself. 103 • dngfUgen, to fret about. . anflagen, to accuse oneself. . anfefyen , to look at oneself. . anjiefyen, to dress oneself. . drgern, to be angry. . auffiifyren, to behave. . auffyalten, to stay. . beffetn, to become better. . btngen, to be hired. . einmieujen, to lodge. . cinfdjrdnfcn, to manage. . entfetnen, to withdraw. . etfteum, to be glad. . faffen, to be composed. ©te fufytten jtd) ab, They cooled themselves. £)u tjaft bid) gedngjMgt, Thou hast been fretting. (£t fyatte fid) angeftagt, He had ac- cused himself. 3d) roerbe mic£ oft anfeljen, I shall often look at myself. @ie roerben ftcb angqogen fyaben, They will have dressed themselves. 3d) murbc mid) dnjctn, I should be angry. (£r nnttbe fid) gut aufgefufyrt fyabcn, He would have behaved well. 3d) t)telt mid) eine ©tunbe auf, I stayed for an hour. £>u bejferjt bid), Thou art becoming better. €r bingt ftd) fur bret Xtjatcr, He is hired for three Thalers. (£r mtetfjete ftd) in meinet iftdfje ein, He lodged close to me. Oftcm fd)rdn!t ftd) fefjr ein, They eco- nomize very much. 28tr entfetncn un£, We withdrew ourselves. 3f>t crfreuet (£ud) eutet ©cfunbfjeit, You are glad of your health. baran, You are accustomed to it. . fyuten, to take care. 3d> fyutete mid) pot bcm jpunb, I guarded myself from the dog. . frdnfcn, to be grieved. £>u fyaft bid) geftdnft, You have grieved yourself. . taben, to refresh oneself. €t fyatte ftd) an (£rbbeeren gclabt, He had refreshed himself witli strawberries. . mdjjiflen, to controul oneself. (Sic n>irb fuh nun mipigcn, She will now controul herself. 104 REFLECTIVE VERBS. The following reflective verbs require the dative, fid) cmmctfjen, to presume ; fl$ getrauen, to be confident. ft'cft oornefymen, to intend 3 ficb oorftellen, to imagine. 3$ mafje mtr an, I presume ; 3$ getraue mir, I am confident. 3 nefyme mtr uor, I intend ; 3d) jMe mit J?or, I imagine. The following reflective verbs require the accusative of the per- son and the genitive of the thing. entlebtge mtcb bet ©ad>e, I acquit myself of the thing. ©ie erfreuten fid) ibreS £eben£, They enjoyed their life. 3d) bebicnte mid) fetneS ©efbe^, I made use of his money. (£r fd)amte fid) bet %bett, He was ashamed of work. When the object of the active is not expressed, the reflective is used instead of the passive ; as, Reflective. 2)a$ $inb fyat ftd> mtoren, £)a£ £tnb ift t>er(oren (roorben), The child has been lost. £)er ©arten bejafylt jic^ (eid)t, £>er ©arten rotrb tetcbt beja^tt, The garden can be easily paid for. The following example will shew the conjugation of the reflec- tive verb ; as, ©id) irtcn, to be mistaken. Infinitives. Present, fief) trren, to be mis- taken. Compound, $ fie irren fid) Subjunctive. tcb trre mtcb, I may be mistaken, bu trreft bid) er irret fid) rotr trren un$ fyt irret eud) fie trren ficb. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 105 Imperfect. Indicative. . Subjunctive. id) irrte mid), I was mistaken. I id) trrctc micb, I might be mistaken. Perfect. tcb fyctbe mid) getrrt, I have been i id) fyabe mid) geirrt, I may have mistaken. been mistaken. Pluperfect. icb fyatte mid) getrrt, I had been i id) fjcttte mid) a,eirrt, I might have mistaken. been mistaken. Future. tcb roerbe micb irren, I shall be mis- i id) roerbe mid) irren, I shall be mis- taken, taken. Past Future. id) roerbe mid) gcirrt fyctben, I shall I id) roerbe mid) gcivrt fyaben, I shall have been mistaken. ' have been mistaken. Conditional. Past Conditional. id) rourbe mid) irren, I should be mistaken. tcb rourbe mid) cuerrt fyctben, I should have been mistaken. § 23. IMPERSONAL VERBS. Impersonal Verbs are those which are only conjugated in the third person singular of any tense, preceded by the pronoun eg, it; as, 1. Without an object : eg bebeutet, it signifies; eg bctuert, it lasts; eg bonnert, it thunders ; eg leud)tet fyeroor, it is clear ; eg reid)t f)in, it is sufficient ; eg tacit, it dawns ; and others. 2. Impersonal verbs with the accusative : eg gefyt mid) an, it regards me ; eg befrembete micb, it was strange to me ; eg berriibt mid), I am grieved with it ; eg fycU micb enrjucfr, I have been delighted with it ; eg lacbert mid), it is ridiculous to me ; eg rotrb micb reuen (icb roerbe eg bereuen), I shall repent; eg oerbriefjt mid), I am offended; eg fd)laferr mid) (or mid) fcbldfert), I am sleepy. 3. Impersonal verbs with the dative : eg fattt mir bei, I remember; eg kiud)t mir, I fancy ; eg teud)tet mir ein, I understand ; eg gcbufyrt mir, it is due to me ; eg cjelmcjt mir, I succeed ; eg ge&icmt mir, it is becoming to me; eg cjtucft mir, I am successful; eg a/berrc mir, it be- longed to me. 106 COMPOUND VERBS. 4. In speaking of a person or thing which is absent, or not per- ceived, the reflective verb eg giebt (there is or there are) is used; as, (£g giebt cine 3Rofe, roeldje fcbmcttj augftcbt, There is a rose which looks black. (£g giebt in (Snglanb ttiele $ftafcbtnen, There are many machines in England. The verb to be, fetjn, and not eg giebt, is used in the following sentences; as, (£g ift fetn 25rot in bem (tm) Ofen, There is no bread in the oven. £g ft'nb feine $mber in bem jUmmer, There are no children in the room. 5. If the subject is not mentioned, the third person of the passive is used reflectively ; as, Passive, <£g roitb oft barubet gefcbvieben, There is a great deal of writ- ing about it. Active, 9ftcm fcbteibt oft batubet, They often write about it. 6. Impersonal verbs with fyaben : eg rennet, it rains ; eg fxtf geregnet, it has rained. 7. Impersonal verbs with fepn : eg gettngt mir, I am successful ; eg getang mir, I was successful ; eg ift nut gehmgen, I have been suc- cessful. 8. Some are impersonal and reflective too ; as, (Sg dnbert fid? (ba$ SBettet), it changes; eg oetfydft ft'cb, it is the case; eg jiemt ftcb, it is becoming; eg oerbreitet ftcb, it is rumoured. § 24. COMPOUND VERBS. Verbs are compounded with Prepositions, Prefixes, and Nouns. 1. COMPOUND INSEPARABLE VERBS. The prepositions or prefixes be, emp, ent, er, ge, fyinter, mif?, uber, per, roieber, jet, t>oll, can never be separated from the verb, except when its meaning alters ; as, Compounds. Hoots. be, befucben, to visit ; fud)en, to seek, emp, empfinben, to feel ; ftnben, to find, ent, enterben, to disinherit. erben, to inherit, er, erfotfcben, to find out; fotfcben, to inquire, ge, gefyorcben, to be obedient ; fyoxfycn, to listen. COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERBS. 107 Compounds. Moots. fainter, f)intettretben, to prevent ; trcibcn, to drive. mifj, mifjrat&en, to dissuade from ; ratten, to advise, uber, iibetjeugen, to convince ; jeugen, to produce, rer, mbUtyen, to fade away ; blufyen, to flourish, rctbet, nnberftreben, to resist. tfreben, to endeavour. jer, jcrfcbnetbcn, to cut into pieces ; fcbnetben, to cut. Examples. (£r bcfud)t feinen $reunb jeben £ctg, He visits his friend every day. <5ie empfanb ben ^Berluft i\)U$ Cannes, She felt the loss of her husband. (£ntetbtf bu beinen ©ofyn? Dost thou disinherit thy son? 2)et Septet crforfdjte ben ©djuler, The master found out the pupil. @ute £tnber gefyotdjen, Good children obey. Wan fjintermeb ben r bie ©efellfc^aft be$ Cannes, Dissuade her from being in the man's company. 3Btr ubet jeugten u)n son feinem Untecbt, We convinced him of his error. £>ie 251ume setblufyfe febon lange, That flower faded away long ago. 3$ roetbe cittern 236fen nnbetffreben, I shall resist all wickedness. £>et ©cfytetbet jetfdmitt ben 3Rocf, The tailor cut the coat into pieces. The foregoing do not admit the augment cje in the participle ; as, befuefct, visited. 2. COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERBS. The separation takes place with the present, imperfect, and im- perative, and they then admit the augment cje, which follows the prepositions or particles ; as, abgefanbt, sent away. The preposition ju (to), before infinitives, follows after ; as, abjufenben, to send away. The prepositions or particles are to be always removed to the end of a sentence, except when it begins with a relative pronoun or a conjunction, which removes the verb to the end. Compounds. Hoots. ab (from, off, away), abjiefyen, to deduct, leave; jiefyen, to throw. ab abfecjen, to take off; fecjen, to put. an (on, at), anfyemejen, to adhere to ; fyemgen, to hang. an • • • • angretfen, to attack ; gteifen, to cease. auf (up, upon), aufmetfen, to listen to ; merfen, to notice. auf auftreten, to appear for; treten, to step. au$ (out, from), au£bred)en, to break, burst forth ; brecben, to break. au$ aitftitfcnj.to rest from; rufyen, to rest. 108 COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERBS. bei (by, at, near), bettor, (before), ba (there), bat (thereon) em, (in, into), bason (therefrom), bmd) (through), empor (up), fort (forth, on, away), fret (free) fyetm (at home) fjer, (here, hither), bin (thither, to), to$ (loose), mit (with, in company) nad) (after), nieber (down), ob (entirely), urn (about, over), ?or (before), roeg (away), $u (to), jurucf (back) jufammen (together), Comj)ounds. bettretben, to collect ; besotfafyen, to impend ; bafe»n, to be there ; barfatlen, to represent ; emreben, to persuade ; basonlaufen, to run away ; burd)fucben, to seek through ; empotfaigen, to ascend ; Sfortbrtngen, to bring away, carry off; fretfptecben, to acquit; betmfucben, to visit ; fyetfyolen, to fetch hither ; btnfafyren, to drive off, to ; loSbtnben, to loosen ; , mttfolgen, to follow one ; nacbjagen, to hunt after ; nteberfdbretben, to write down ; obfiegen, to conquer entirely ; umfto^en, to overthrow ; t>orfd)lagen, to propose ; roeggefyen, to go away ; jutaffen, to permit; juutcftefyren, to return; sufammenfommen, to assemble ; Roots. rteiben, to drive. ftefjen, to stand, fetjn, to be. fallen, to place, reben, to speak, laufen, to run. fudjen, to seek, faigen, to step. bvingen, to bring. fprecben, to speak, fucben, to seek, bolen, to fetch, fasten, to drive, binben, to bind, folgen, to follow, jagen, to hunt. fcbtetben, to write, ftegen, to conquer, frozen, to push, throw, fcblagen, to strike, geben, to go. laffen, to let. fefyten, to turn, fommen, to come. Examples. £)ie 2>ame tegt ifyten Mantel ab, The lady takes off her cloak. <£t rufyre son feinen 2lrbetten au$, He rested from his work. Sttetbe bie ©cbulben bet, Collect the debts. When a relative pronoun or a conjunction (which removes the verb to the end) precedes, the prefix or preposition is not sepa- rated; as, £>er, roefcfjer bie ^papiere butd)fucf)t, ijt ein fluget 9ftann, He who looks over the papers is a clever man. 3lfe ber 9tetd>ter ben SIngeflagten ftetfptad), roar icb jugegen, When the judge acquitted the accused I was present. ( 109 ) 3. COMPOUND 8EPARABLE AND INSEPARABLE VERBS. The following are used both as separable and inseparable verbs, and their sense is altered according to the manner in which they are used. In the first case the accent is laid on the prefix ; in the second on the first syllable of the verb itself. When used sepa- rably, the augment ge is added to the participle, which is not the case when considered as inseparable ; as, Separable. Inseparable. butcfyfafyren, to drive through ; burd)fat)ren, to penetrate quickly. burd)3t?faf)ren (Participle) ; butdjfafyven (Participle), butcbfeucfyten, to make wet through; burrfjfeucfyten, to become wet through. burrf)feud)tct (Participle), uberloufcn, to give a glance over, to trouble, to shudder (Reflect.) ubetlcutfen, (Participle), ubernefymen, to undertake, ubetnbmmen (Participle), ubettteten, to trespass, ubcttreten (Participle), umbtedjen, to transfer from one page or column to another, umbtocfyen (Participle), umfcifyten, to go round about in a burd>gefeud)tet (Participle) ; uberlaufen, to run over ; tibergelaufen, (Participle) ; ubernefymen, to take around ubergenommen (Participle) ; ubertreren, to step over ; ubergetreten (Participle) ; umbtecfjen, to bend round ; umgebrocfyen (Participle) ; umfabrcn, to overturn ; umgefafjten (Participle) ; unterfyatten, to hold under; untergefyaften (Participle) ; roieberfyoten, to fetch back ; rolebetgebott (Participle); roieberrufen, to call back; roiebergerufcn (Participle) ; umfctfjren (Participle). unterfyatten, to converse with, to keep, untetfyalten (Participle). n>ieberf)6(en, to repeat, rotebetfybtt (Participle), roibetrufen, to disavow. roibcrrufcn (Participle). 4. DOUBLE COMPOUND VERBS. Compound Prefixes. Separable. anfyetm (at home), a nfyeun faiie n, to fall to one's share. Sbabeibletben, to remain near, not to be changed in opinion (Nenter). babet (thereby), 110 DOUBLE COMPOUND VERBS. Compound Prefixes. Separable. better (along), bafyetremfeben, to rush along. ba\)in (therein), babinfMen, to put there. bat>on (away), bewonfuecjen, to fly away. einfyet (along, forth), einfcerfc&mten, to step along. berab (down), j fcerabtaffen (ftcb betablaffen, to condescend), to let ( down, betan, (near, on), fyeranfetfyten, to drive near. berctuS (out of), Ijerau^rct^crt, to pull out of. betbet (close to), fyerktbringen, to bring in, to provide (for), beretn (here, in), fyetetntufen, to call in. fyjtttbet (here, over), fyetubetfprin^en, to jump over, fyetum (round), fyetumgeben, to hand round, beruntet (down), betuntetnefymen, to take down, bettor (forth), fyewovtommm, to come forth, betju (hither, near), b er $utaufen, to hasten to one. itberein (over to one), uberetnfUmmcn, to agree with, umfyet (about), umfyerfefyen, to look about, umbin (about it), umfnnfonnen, to forbear, prevent, ttotan (before, on), »otanfcbtcfen, to send on, along. wmt (beforehand, ) m#| , tI| to {n advance m advance), ) rorbci (close, near, by), Jjorbeifcbtc^en, to fail, miss. sorbet (before), t>orf>etrr>tfTen, to foreknow. t?otuber (by), potubetetten, to hurry by. All these are irregular, except uotctuSsabfen and ttotubcreilen. The augment ge of the participle, and the preposition ju of the infinitive, are placed after the compound prepositions and particles ; as, bctbtngejMt, being placed there ; bafyinjujMen, to place there. Compounds with fyet change into bin when a change for one place to another is to be expressed ; as, fytnablaffen, to let down ; binan= ftei$en, to climb up ; fymautyctyn, to go out ; fyinetntegen, to put into ; binuberfafyten, to ferry beyond ; fytnimfetroerfen, to throw downwards ; btnjufugen, to add to ; except fyetbet and tywov. Return signifies motion from one place to another and returning again; as, £ie $tnbet ticfen urn ben S5aum fyenxm, The children were running round the tree. Umbcc signifies a motion about; as, £>te ^naben bettelttn umfyet, The boys were begging about. One active with fyaUn in the compound tenses ; as, babinjMen, SEPARABLE VERBS. 1 1 1 to put there; 3$ fabe ben ©tubl batjmgeftellt, I have put the chair there. One neuter with feyn in the compound tenses ; as, rorubercifcn, to hurry by; £r iff fo eben conibergeretlt, He was hurrying by just now. Compounds, Separable. 21nbe, anbefefylen, to command; anper, anr-ertrauen, to trust with; auger, au£erfef)en, to choose from ; porbe, (ficb) r-orbefjalten, to contrive. Examples. 3cf> befall ifynen an, es ntd)t ju tfyun, I commanded them not to do it. ©ie sertraute nut tt>r ©elb an, She trusted me with her money. (£r crfat? bie beften ©olbaten aug, He selected the best soldiers. (£r befytelt fid) t>or, feme $mber nt fefyen, He contrived to see his children. Compounds, Inseparable. 5lufer, auferroad>en, to awake again; auger, augerlefen, to select; auger, augerrodblcn, to choose. Examples. (£r auferroacbte urn fcd>^ Ufyr, He woke again at six o'clock. <5te fyaben mid) augerlefen, They have selected me. (£g (inb nur SBentge augerrodfylt, There are only a few chosen. 5. SEPARABLE VERBS, Compounded with Adverbs with the augment ge. $ef)l, fcbttreten, to slip out ; fret, fretftef>en, to stand isolated (miv, to be permitted) ; gletd), gleicb|Wfen, to conform oneself to another ; log, logfduefjen, to discharge; ft aft, ftatffmben, to take place. Examples. (5r frttt jebeS 9M fet?t, He slips out every time. (£r ftefyt fret ba, He is standing there isolated. (£g ftefyt u)m fret, eg $u tbun, He is permitted to do it. <5te fyaben fid) bem Stemben gleid)geftetft, You have conformed yourself to the stranger. (£t fd)op feme 23it<$fe log, He discharged his rifle. £>ie ftronung fmbet motgen ^iatt, The coronation takes place to-morrow. 6. INSEPARABLE VERBS, Compounded with Nouns or Adjectives. These take the augment ge, like regular or irregular verbs • as £uft, luftroanbeln, to walk in pleasure; ftecbt, redjtferrtgen, to justify '; 112 ADVERBS. 3fott), tatf)fd)tagen, to take counsel ; froi>, frofytocfen, to triumph; £anb, fycmbfyctben, to handle ; frufy, ftufytfucfen, to breakfast ; lieb, Uebfofen, to caress ; lieb, (kbdugeln, to ogle ; "D^iitf), mutfymafjen, to suspect ; »oU, »otUiet)en, to execute ; roittfafyren, to comply with one's wishes ; roeif= fagen, to prophecy. Examples. (£t luffrcanbelt jeben 5ftorgen, He is walking every morning in pleasure. 9ftan tcd)tfertigte it>tt, They justified him. ©ie fyaben potfyet getatf)fd)(agf, They have taken counsel before. (Et n>itb ni4>t micber ftofytotfen, He will triumph no more. ©te fyctt e$ gefyanbfyabt, She has (handled) managed it. ©ic fyctben nut ifynen gefrufyftucft, You have breakfasted with them. £>te Gutter fiebfofte if>rcn ©ctugtmc}, The mother caressed her baby. SXe junge £>ame t>at oft geUebdugett, The young lady has often ogled. 3$ mutfymafjte, ba$ <&k au£$ef>ett rcairben, I suspected that you would go out. $Han tyat ben 23efefyl t>ott$o$en, They have executed the order. 3d) fyabe 3fynen immcr genxllfafytt, I have always complied with your wishes. £)te ^ptopfyeten fyaben cjeroetfla^t, The prophets have prophesied. $off$tefyen does not require the augment gc. All the above verbs are regular, except polUiefyen, »oHjog, uoUjogen. § 25. ADVERBS. Adverbs are words which stand either immediately before or after the verb, and add a stronger meaning to nouns, adjectives, and verbs. The principal are red)t, very (right) ; fefyr, very or much, followed by a past participle or an adjective. Examples. 9)ton better fcfcldft re$t fanft, My father sleeps very softly. <£$ i)at btefe 9kd>t fefyt j!atf gefroren, It froze very hard last night, ©et 5Kann routbe fe^r gefutdxet, That man was much feared, ©ie muffen fefjt beutltd) fpteefcen, You must (should) speak very distinctly. There are adverbs of time, place, rank, number, qualification, affirmation, negation, doubt, and comparison. ( 113 ) I. ADVERBS OF TIME REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TENSES. 1. Present: jef?t, at present ; nun, now; fyeutc, to-day; fyeut ju Xage, now-a-days ; gegemvivtig, at present. Examples. artig babe id) fein @elb, At present I have no money. 2. Imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect: geftern, yesterday ; fd)on, already ; t>orI?er, before (heretofore) ; neulicb, lately ; bisjefjt, hitherto; efyemate, formerly; twrbem, efyebem, before, ere now. Examples, 9Bir gingen geftern eine ©tunbe au$, We went out yesterday for an hour. <£$ fyat fd>on ©teben gefcblagen, It has already struck seven. 3cb ging sorber jut ftircbe, unb nacbber fpetfte id), I went first to church, and afterwards I dined, ©ie ft'nb neulicb im (5d>aufyietbaufe geroefen, They have been lately to the theatre. 2$i$jefjt baben nut tfjn nicpt gefeben, Hitherto w r e have not seen him. Cremate roaten fie Sreunbe, Formerly they were friends. QSotbem roat er ein £utfe, Formerly he was a Turk. €bebem fptad) man mebr Sranjbfifd), Formerly they spoke more French. 3. Future and past future : mcrgen, to-morrow ; ubetmotgen, the day after to-morrow ; ton \e§t an, henceforth ; in ad)t £agen, a week hence; r-on nun an, hereafter; gteid), anon; fog(eid), imme- diately; augenblicntch, directly, presently; in $ur$em, shortly (ere long); nad)bet, afterwards ; ba(b, soon, by and by, now. In an inverted position the verb stands before the pronoun or noun ; as, 9)?otgcn reetben roir bier fenn, To-morrow we shall be here. Uebermorgen n>irb mein ©eburtetag fetjn, The day after to-morrow will be my birthday. Son jefjt an, roetbe icb fleipig fenn, Henceforth I shall be industrious. 3n acbt £agen roitb er angefommen fenn, A week hence he will have arrived. i 114 ADVERBS OF TIME. $on nun an roetbe id) feine %eit serueren, I shall henceforth lose no time. @teia> ttatb fie fyier fetm, She will be here shortly. ©oojeid) roitb bee Stfyee fcrtig fet>n, Tea will be ready immediately. Slugenbttdud) n>irb et fetne 2ltbett beenbigt fyaben, He will have finished his work directly. Slugenblidttd) bttnge ben 25rief auf bic *poft, Take that letter to the Post- office directly. 3n ^utjem rcetben roir unferen $reunb gefefyen fyaben, Ere long we shall have seen our friend. 9?ad)f)er rcerbe ich mtt 3fynen reben, Afterwards I shall speak to you. 23alb roetben n>tr ©dntee fyaben, By and by we shall have snow. 4. Uncertain times : oft, often ; fydufta,, frequently ; gelegentUcb, occasionally, conveniently ; bejtdnbto,, constantly ; fottrodfytenb, con- tinually ; roenn, when ; n>ann ? when ? bann, then ; tmmer, always, (ever) ; nie, ntemau?, (nimmet), never. Examples, 9Kan fottte oft juftiebnet fet)n, They might often be more contented. SHetcbtfyum mad>t tjduftg ungludlia), Riches frequently cause unhappiness. 3d) rcetbe getegentlicb be&afylen, I shall pay conveniently (when it is convenient). (£t ift befldnbig ju jpaufe, He is constantly at home. ©ie ftnb fortn>df)tenb befd)dftto,t, You are continually engaged. 38enn e$ gett ifr, (fo) n>etbe id) fommen, When it is time I shall come. 28cmn roetben ©te nad) 25erttn retfen ? When shall you go to Berlin ? (£r fagte ntc^f, n>ann et &u £aufe fet), He did not say when he was at home. £5ann bat fte batum, if>te tx>cfJec ju befua>en, Then she asked to visit her sister. (£t fyat unmet Beit, abet ntemate Sufi ju atbetten, He has always time, but no inclination to work. II. ADVERBS OF PLACE. 3Bo, where; toofnn, whereto; fuet, here; ba, bott, there; fyietfyet (tnefyer), hither ; bafyin, bottom, thither ; turn f)tet, baf>et, hence; t>on bort, thence; n>ot>on ? roofyet? whence? nafye, near; rcett, far; bid>f, close ; bet ©ette, aside ; fyinauf, up ; fytnuntet, down ; oben, above (upstairs); unten, below (down stairs) ; twrn, in the front; fyinten, behind; jutud, back; tudwdttS, backwards; t>otn>dtt$, forwards; ADVERBS OF NUMBER. 115 ab, off; inroenbio,, internally; auSroenbtg, externally (by heart); braugen, outside; aug, aujjerfyatb, out of, abroad; irgenbroo, some- where; nirgenbS, nowhere; anbcrSrco, elsewhere; atfentfyalben, everywhere. Examples. 3d) rcetfj, roo id) if>n ft'nben foil, I know where I shall find him. 3Bo finb <5ie geroefen ? Where have you been ? SEBiflen ©ie, roofyin fie gefjen roolten ? Do you know where they intend to go to ? &$ roaren einige 2eute ba, There were some people. £>ort gefjt mcin 95rubcr, There goes my brother, jpterfyer barf 9?iemanb fommen, Nobody is allowed to come hither. <£$ ift bafyin gefommen, It has come as far as that. 2>orn)tn gefjen fte 2ttte, They all go there. $on f>ter (tnb e$ tner Wetfen, It is four miles hence. £)af)er roerben fie fommen, They will come hence. III. ADVERBS OF NUMBER, ORDER, AND REPETITION. fyalb, half; etnmat, once ; jroctmal, twice, and others. The following are compounds : erjHid), first ; jroettenS, next ; fd)tte£lid>, at last; aftein, alone, apart; abcrmate, anew (a second time) ; roieber, again ; befonberS, asunder ; jufammen, together ; nur, only. The other denoting numbers are formed by adding tenS to the cardinal numbers ; as, jroeitenS, secondly ; brtttenS, thirdly ; tnertenS, fourthly : or by adverbial phrases ; as, bretmat, three times ; melmal, many times; mefyrere Wale, several times ; etnjeln, one by one ; (Einer nad) bem 2lnbern, one by one ; immer jroet, by twos ; (£tner urn ben 5lnbern, by turns; attmdfylig, gradually; nad) etnanber, one after an- other ; nad) einanber, body for body ; (Scfyrttt fur ©djrttt, step by step ; nacb unb nacb, by degrees. IV. ADVERBS OF QUALIFICATION. @er ed)t, justly ; eitig, hastily ; gero6fmud>, usually ; fd)led)t, badly ; einfad), simply ; roeife, wisely. These adverbs form their comparatives by er, and their superla- tives by am, with the affix ften; as, gerecbt, justly; geredrter, more justly; am gered)tejten, most just; except etltg, hastily, which is ren- dered by fetjr, very, which the others only require in the com- parative. i2 1 16 ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION. Examples. SBir fottten etnem 3eben gered)t roerben, We should become just to every one. £)er S?ote roar fefjr etfig, The messenger was in great haste. (£r ifr gcn>6t?nltc^> nid;t ofyne @efellfd>aft, He usually is not without company. (£r {janbctt fcbtecf>tcr, aU er fotfte, He acts worse than he should. ©te fleibet fid) etnfacber, ate tie anbern ©amen, She dresses more simply than the other ladies. (£r fyanbett am rocifeften, He acts wisest. V. ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION. 3a, indeed; ja roof)l,yea; ja fogar, even (ay, aye); ja, ja, indeed so, a stronger affirmation. The following are compounds ; viz. roafyrUcb, by faith, verily ; in ber Stfyat, indeed; fid>erltd>, surely ; geroi£, certainly; in ber Xfyat, atter= bingS, in fact. Adverbial phrases. @anj geroig roerbe id) ba fe*)n, To be sure I shall be there. Ofyne stoeifel roirb ct fommen, There is no doubt he will come. 2UIerbtng$ ftnb feine 3Borte roafyr, By all means his words are true. Ofyne alien jSrceifel n>irb er rebltcf; fet)n, Without any doubt he will be honest. Examples. (£$ ift ja fyeute fd)6neS ^Better, The weather is indeed fine to-day. 3a roofyf, e^ ift fefyr fcfcun, Indeed, it is very fine. 3 fyier fetjn, Surely she will also be here. <£.$ ift in ber %\)at roafjr, In fact it is true. MerbingS fyabe idj> gefefylt, In fact I have committed a fault. VI. ADVERBS OF NEGATION AND DENYING. ^Hein, no, nay ; nid)t gerabe ba$, not exactly that; nid)t etnmal, not even. The following are derived; as, fetneSroegS (no ways), by no means ; auf feine SSeife, gar ntd)t, not at all. ADVERBS EXPRESSING DOUBT. 117 Adverbial phrases, (£r ift feine&wgS (bureaus nicf>t) efyrgetjig unb ftolj, He is by no means ambitious and proud. 2Btr finb mit ifjr gan$ unb gar ntd?r juftieben, We are not at all satisfied with her. Examples. %?tn, er ijr nid)t reruttf?eitt roorben, No, he has not been sentenced. ^irf)t ger abe ba$ rooUre id) fyoren, I did not wish to hear that exactly. £r gefyt ntd)t einmal jur $ircbe, He does not even go to church. VII. ADVERBS EXPRESSING DOUBT. SBtefleicfct, perhaps ; mbgfid), possibly; roo 11163(1$, if possible; Sufillig, perchance. Examples. Sielletcfyt roetbe tc^ - ba$ ?erftef?en ? How shall I comprehend that ? (What is the meaning of it ?) £"£ ift eben fo roentg btUtg, ate red>t, It is neither reasonable nor right. %\\f dfynitdje SBeife f)at er gelebt, He has lived in a similar manner, ©te finb ifym dfynlid), You are like him. £>a*> SBaffer ift fo fait roie St$, The water is as cold as ice. £r bellt trie ein Jgunb, He is barking like a dog. 118 ADVERBS COMPOUNDED OF NOUNS. (5ie jTnb mit ebenfctlte roiltf ommen, You are just as welcome to me. (£t fottte anbet» gefyanbelt fyaben, He should have acted differently. 2lnbet$ foltte et nidjt ttetfctfyten, Otherwise he should not proceed. Adverbial phrases. @(eid)fam, fo &u fagen, as though it were ; auf biefe SBeife, in this manner; auf jene SBeife, in that manner; o,anj o,lei<$, eben fo, all alike. ExamjAes, 3cb tjabe iJ>n gjetcfyfam (fo $u fagen) ate meinen n angenommen, I have received him as though he were my son. 2Iuf biefe SBeife mufj man fyanbeln, In this manner one must act. 2tuf jene 5Beife fyat et fetn @e(b t>erloren, In that manner he has lost his money. <£$ ijl mit ganj a,(et& It is quite the same to me. IX. ADVERBS COMPOUNDED OF NOUNS, AND THE AFFIXES {[<$, fyaft, and i<$f. 5len<$U$, anxiously; g&ttftcfc, godly, godlike; fcerrficfr, magnifi- cently (masterly) ; bilblick figuratively ; freunblitf), friendly ; roeltltcb, worldly ; (obtid), praiseworthy ; f)6fltd), politely ; ofttid), easterly ; (eb= \)afty lively ; ernftyaft, seriously; Iafier^aft, viciously ; fjoljtd;*, woody ; fy&tid&t, silly; erbtcfo earthy. X. ADVERBS DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES. $teinti$, meanly ; autlicfy, friendly ; f ctajUcfc, economically ; flugUcb, prudently; drmttd), poorly. Z is added to those which end in en ; as, 6ffentltd>, publicly ; o,ele= gentlicf), occasionally, conveniently ; gefriflTenrtic^, purposely. XI. ADVERBS DERIVED FROM VERBS. $ermun;li$, probably ; petmeibUcb, avoidably ; f>df?ltd>, ugly ; erbdtni= U<$, miserably ; nHtfttd), really ; Ibblid), praiseworthy. Those of IX. X. and XI. are all declinable, except gefegentltcb, occasionally, and ttermun)ticb, probably. Examples. £)et £)id)tev fprac^> bilbtid), The poet spoke figuratively. <£.$ roar (6b(icf) t>on U)m, It was praiseworthy of him. (£r fagte eg etnjUid), He said it seriously, ©ein 35etrao,en roar tf)6rid)t, His behaviour was silly. ©ie (ebte fdro,U$, She lived meanly. PREPOSITIONS. 119 £r fjanbelte ftugticf), He acted prudently. <5ie waxen drmticfc gefleibet, They were poorly dressed. (5r tf>at e$ n>ift"entUcf), He did it purposely. <5$ ijl t>ermutf)licb n>af>r, It is probably true. d$ roar ttermeibltrf) obet unmmciblicf), It was avoidable or unavoidable. £)ie Wen ftnb ^dglicb, Monkeys are ugly. £r fat? crbarmlirf) au$, He looked miserably. 9Mn Jpcrr ifl n)trf(id) nicbt ju £aufe, My master is really not at home. § 20. PREPOSITIONS. Prepositions are originally adverbs, and as such they do not govern cases. They either stand alone or in connection with other words. Examples. 2>te <&d)\\U if! au$, The lessons are finished. 3)a$ (Spiel ift au£, The game is finished. 2)a$ SHd)t brennt auf, The candle is burning up. 3cb fenne ben 9Kann ju gut, I know the man too well. When circumstances of the subject or object are stated, they are called prepositions, and govern cases; as, the genitive, the dative, the accusative, and both the dative and accusative. I. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 2tnftatt or ftatt, instead of, in the place of. The former is some- times separated, and <5tatt takes the place of a noun ; as, (£r nafym fie an £inbe$ ©tatt an, He received her as his own child. £)et 33acfer a,ab, anjlatt be$ 25robfeS, @elb, The baker gave money instead of bread. £)te£feit$, on this side ; as, £>te$fett$ be$ UfetS liegen bie fitfdbe, On tliis side of the shore the fish are laying. 3enfettS, on the other side of; as, SenfeitS berf StuffeS ftefyen bie Sifter, On the other side of the river the fishermen stand. £alb, fyatbet, fjatben, on account of, for the sake of. The former signifies particularly a reference to a place, and is always com- pounded with some other word; as, oberfyalb, above; unterfjalb, below; augerfyatb, without; tnnerfyalb, within. £albet, signifies a motive; as, gfyre fjatber, for the sake of honour. 120 PREPOSITIONS. £>alben i3 used with the personal pronouns ; as, beinetfyalben, on thy account 5 fetnetfyatben, on his account; tfyretfydben, on her account; ifyretfyalben, on their account ; 3fyretfyctlben, on your account ; (Suretfyatben, on your account. Likewise, befjfyalb, on that account ; roefjfyalb, on which or what account. Examples. Oberfyalb be$ ©attend (te$t ein ©cfctofj, Above the garden lies a castle. Unterfyalb be$ JpaufeS fdjUept ein %>ad), Below the house flows a rivulet. $ugetf?alb be» £>orfe$ ftefyen feine ©ebdube, There are no buildings out of the village. 3nnert>atb b& SBalbeS butyen feine 25aume, Within the forest blow no flowers. 3nnerfyalb eineS 9Ronat$ n>irb er Fommen, Within a month he will come. £r mufjte (£fyre t?atbet bejafylen, He was obliged to pay for the sake of honour. £)etnetfyatben roerben n>tr e$ tfyun, For thy sake we shall do it. Wlan roitb e$ meinetfyalben tfyun, They will do it for my sake. Sxaft, by the power of, according to, relates to the authority of a person ; as, <5r fyanbeft haft feineS 2lmte$, He acts according to his duty. £aut, according to, refers to an understanding, either by conver- sation or letter ; as, £aut feiner $u$fage tft e$ wafyr, According to his evidence it is true. 2aut fetneS erften 25riefe$ tjt er gefunb, According to his first letter he is well. £rofj, in spite of, notwithstanding, shews courage of mind, or defiance ; as, £ro£ bet grofiten ©efafyr rettete er ba$ $inb, In spite of the greatest danger he saved the child. £roi| be$ @en>itter$ ging er au$, In spite of the thunderstorm *he went out. (Dat.) Stro§ bem guten ^Better blteb er ju Jpaufe, Notwithstanding the good weather he remained at home. SBermittelft, by the means or influence of; as, #ermtitelft etnes 9}ctd)en$ famen rotr an'$ 2anb, By the means of a boat we came to shore. • SBermtttelft ber Smpfefylung ber £)ame ttmrbe id) eingefufyrt, By the influ- ence of the lady's recommendation I was introduced. Um widen, for the sake of, refers to a motive or wish, and is always separated ; as, PREPOSITION 121 Um ber Scute nxtfen fcbroeigen Sie, For the sake of the people be silent. Um feiner Samihe rortlen fotfre er tfyaria, fet)n, For the sake of his family he should be active. Ungeacbtet, notwithstanding, without regard to, shews the state of an indulging or opposing mind, and is used before and after the noun ; as, Ungeacbter feiner @ute rourbe er betrogen, Notwithstanding his kindness he was deceived. Seiner (Brrcnge ungeadjtet rcurbe er geacfyter, Notwithstanding his severity he was esteemed. Unrcett, not far from, refers to the short distance of a place ; as, Unrcett bed £>orfe£ roofynt er, He lives not far from the village. 23ermco,e, by the power of, by dint of, according to; as, 33ermc<}e 3fyte$ SSefefyte blteb er rubto,, According to your command he kept quiet. 23erm6o,e ifyrer £>utfe fonnren ft'e leben, By means of her assistance they were able to subsist. SBibrenb, during, refers to a continuation of time or action ; as, SBabrenb be$ Sn-'ibtingS btuben bie erften 251umen, During spring the first flowers bloom. 2B%enb feiner 3\ebe jlanben Me auf, During his speech all rose. 38eo,en, on account of, by reason of, relates to some considera- tions, or to a necessity, and stands either before the noun or after it ; as, SBegcn metneS ^rubers bin id) fet;r beforgt, On account of my brother I am very uneasy. ©etneS tjofyen 2tlter£ rcegen f onnte er nicbt arbeiten, By reason of his old age he was not able to work. SdngS, along; as, 2dna,S be£ -R^eing cung icf> oft fpcttjieren, I often walked on the banks of the Rhine. (Dat.) £ing$ bem SBege traf id) if>n, I met him in the road. (Entlang, along, all through ; as, (inrlana, bed 2BatbeS i)6rte man ben fyanbeln, I shall act according to your commission. All prepositions which govern the genitive are derived from nouns, except una,ead)tet from ac^ten, to regard ; nxtfytenb from rodfyten, to last ; unroett from roeit, far. The prefix un, whenever used, shews the negative state or power of a person or a thing ; as, <£t ift fcf>r unatucftirf), He is very unfortunate. ©ie roat uneetmogenb, She was not wealthy. £>a$ y&tttzt roat ungunftig, The weather was not favourable. 2. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE DATIVE. 5Iu$, out, out of, from, signifies a distance from, or removal to a place, but figuratively it indicates an origin or a motive ; as, (£t roarf ba$ @etb au$ bcm Sender, He threw the money out of the window. (£t eilte au$ bcm £aufe, He hurried out of the house. (£t t(?at i$ au$ Stcfytuna, fut jeinen ijetrn, He did it out of respect for his master. £)a$ ijl ganj au$ bee SEftobe, That is quite out of fashion. Idioms. <5t ijl mcfct bet £cmne, He is out of humour. $on taufenb 23etfpielen nenne i$ nut ein$, Out of a thousand instances I name but one. (£t ijl ofme ©telle, He is out of place. (£t gtno, nut am? bem SBege, He went out of my way. 2tu$ er, out of, on the outside of, beside, signifies the external posi- tion or state of a thing or person ; as, (£t roctttet aufjer bee <5tabt, He is waiting on the outside of the town. SJufjet mic roar flttemanb ba, Besides me nobody was there. Idioms. SBtt roaten au£et 2lu)em, We were out of breath, ©ie roaten au£et ft'<$, They were beside themselves (had no presence of mind). 33ei, by, near, with, refers to places, persons, former times, cus- toms, rules, and affirmation ; as, 25ei meinem jpauje flefyt nut ein 25aum, Near my house stands but one tree. 3$ n>at l>eufe bti meinem gteunbe, I was with my friend to-day. PREPOSITIONS. 123 (£r roar bci fciner Slbreife befebdftigt, He was occupied at his departure. (£$ t)l bet un$ feinc ©itte, It is no custom of ours. (£$ iff feine £Regel bei un$, It is no rule with us. <£$ if! bet metner (£f>re roafyr ! Upon my honour it is true ! Idiom. (£r ift bci guter ©efunbfyett, He is in good health. SMnnen, within, refers to an appointed time which cannot be ex- ceeded; as, 5Hnnen cttf)t £agen foil ba$ ©elb au$be$afytt roerben, Within eight days the money shall be paid. SttfeS btefeS f>at fid) binnen brei 2Bocf>en eretgner, All this has happened within three weeks. (£ntgegen, opposing, towards, applies to a meeting, and stands after the noun ; as, 2)er 28inb roar un$ entgegen, The wind was against us. 3fyre ©timmen roaren mir entgegen, Their votes were against me. 9Keine ©Item famen mir entgegen, My parents came towards me. ©egenuber, opposite to, refers to persons or things, and stands after the noun ; as, 9fteinem ^efannten gegenuber roofjnt ein ^merifaner, Opposite to an ac- quaintance of mine lives an American. £)a£ £au$ fh?f)t bem ©arten gegenuber, The house stands opposite the garden. St jMte ftcf) mir gegenuber, He placed himself opposite me. £dng£, along, signifies progression in a straight line ; as, 3Btr gingen langS bem $u£pfab, We passed along the footpath. Idioms. ©te fiifjrten mid) uber einen bunflen ©ang fort, They led me along a dark passage. Unermefjticbe J?eere t>on SBolfen fdjroebten (fegelten in Poetry) fangfam einfyer, Innumerable hosts of clouds sailed slowly along. 9JUt, with, refers to a meeting, or to occupation, and to pleasure; as, £r roar oft mit mir in @efetlfd)aft, He was often in company with me. 3d) roar jroei ©tunben mit ifjm befcbdftigt, I was occupied with him for two hours. €r fd)ricb biefeS mit eigner Jganb, He wrote this with his own hand. 3d) bin mit bem ^>erm gut befannt, I am well acquainted with that gentleman. ©ie ftnb nafye mit mir wrroanbt, They are nearly related to me. 124 PREPOSITIONS. 9ftit ben 3af)ten roitb man Aug, With years one becomes prudent. 3$ mtbe ©ie mit SSetgnugen begleiten, I shall accompany you with pleasure. Idioms. €r ift bofe auf mid), He is angry with me. 3)a$ if! md)t bet Ball bci mtt, That is not the case with me. ©ie jtttetten sot $utd)t, They trembled with fear. 3d) n?at mube com £aufen, I was weary with running. (£t f?at (£tgenfyetten an ftc^>, He has peculiar ways with him. <£t roar von ifytet ©d)bnf)eit fyingetijfen, He was smitten with her beauty. £t ift vot 28un) aufjet 2ln)em, He is out of breath with passion. Wad), after, to, refers to time, country, place, order, locality, direction, and inquiry ; as, Wad) etnet 9lbroefetu)eit »on btei 3af>ten Utytte t$ na$ £)eutf#(anb jutucf, After an absense of three years I returned to Germany. (£t teitfe balb batauf nad) jpamburg, He travelled to Hamburg soon after. SfJiein Sreimb rcitb ben erffcn ©onntag nad) Oftetn anfommen, My friend will arrive the first Sunday after Easter. 3d) roerbe batb nad) jpaufe fommen, I shall soon come home. 3f* bieS bet SBeg nad) 25itmingf)am ? Is this the way to Birmingham ? £)et $Kann ftagte nad) 3fynen, The man inquired after you. 9?eben, beside, by the side of, refers to the presence of persons, places, or things ; as, ©ie jlanben neben mtt, They were standing beside me. £)ie $ttd)e jlefyt neben bn ©tabt, The church stands near the town. JDie Sa§e Uegt neben bem Stifle, The cat is lying beside the table. ^ftebfl, besides, together with, refers to a connection with others ; as, ?$eine Steunbe empfafylen ftcf; 5lnbetn nebft mit, My friends recom- mended themselves besides me. Ob, on account of, is used in Poetry, and by sacred writers; as, (Poetry) <£t etftaunte ob bet 3ftebe, He was astonished at (on account of) the speech. ©amrnt, together with, applies to the satisfaction or dissatisfaction of mind, also to sacrifices ; as, (£t ift fammt feinen gteunben mit un$ juftieben, He together with his friends is satisfied with us. ©ammt u)tem ganjen ^Betmbgen fyat fie bod) feinen Stieben im £etjen, With all her whole fortune she has still no peace of mind. £>ie mutagen $rieget ftelen, fammt ifyten. £anb$leuten, fur ba$ SBofyl bu> PREPOSITIONS. 125 $atertcmbe£, The brave warriors fell together with their country- men for the welfare of the country. <5ett, ever since, since, signifies both a continuation and com- mencement of time; as, (Beit meinem ©eburtSrage roar er nid>t fyler, Ever since my birthday he has not been here. £)ie$ ift ba$ jroeite 3«fyt feit feinem Zobe, This is the second year since his death. 93on, from, of (by, on, upon, in), refers to motion, separation, distance, motive, origin, order, commencement of time, possession, rank, and materials ; as, 3cb fomme ton $b\n, I come from Cologne. (£r gef)t ton Sinem jum 2Inbern, He goes from one to another. (Er routbe ju fruf? ton fetnen Sltern getrennt, He was separated from his parents too soon. 9)iein 25ruber roofynt fefyr roeit ton mir, My brother lives a great distance from me. <£$ finb tide Weikn ton Sonbon nadj (Ebtnburg, It is many miles from London to Edinburgh. (£r reifte ton Stalien nad) bet ©d)roetj, He travelled from Italy to Switzerland. (Er gab e$ ton ganjem Jperjen, He gave it with all his heart. 3Bir rourben ten fetner 2Ib|iu$t uberjeugt, We were convinced of his in- tention. (£r ftammt ton guter famine ab, He is descended from a good family. (£r roar ber (£rfk ton unSroetcfcer fprad), He was the first of us who spoke. (£$ gab S&erge ton bcr ©d?6pfung t?cr, There were mountains from the creation. (Er i\t (Etgentfyumer ton ^id)t^, He is in possession of nothing. 2)te ^rinjc(finn ton SBolfenbuttcl roar fei?r liebretd), The princess of Wol- fenbiittel was very charming. (Ein S8ed)er ton ©ttber rourbe tcrmt^t, A beaker of silver was missed. Idioms. (Er terbarg e$ tor mtr, He concealed it from me. (Er entjog ftd) bcr ©efellfdmff, He withdrew from society. (Er tt>at e$ au$ ©etj, He did it from avarice. ©te fyinberte micb am (2d)reiben, She prevented me from writing. ©te littcn an ifyren SBunben, They suffered from their wounds. £Hefe$ 2Berf rourbe au$ bem (Engttfcben uberfe^t, This work was trans- lated from the English. (Er fprtdtf auS (Erfafyrung, He speaks from experience. 126 PREPOSITIONS. gu, to, towards, at, signifies motion, rest, time, position, appoint- ment, arrangement, value of money, accident, choice, connection, number, and readiness ; as, 3$ mtbe ben $dtbet ju 3fynen fdnrfen, I shall send to you the dyer. (St ging jut ^itefce, He went to church, ©ie gtngen bem Sanbe ju, They went towards the land. £t roofynt ju ©ottingen obet in bonbon, He lives at Gottingen or in London. £)et 2ttjt routbe jut 9?ad)tjeU getufen, The Physician was called at night-time. <£t ijl ju spfetbe, He is on horseback. ©ie famen jut ted>ten jtett, They came at the appointed time. £>et Secret fam urn btei Uf)t, The master came at three o'clock. £>et 95ertrag fam ju ©tanbe, The treaty was settled. 2>et JDufaten tmirbe ju btei Stealer getecfynet, The ducat was accounted to three thalers. St ftutjte ju 25oben, He fell to the ground. 9ftan \)ttb balb jut (bet bet) jpanb fei)n, He will soon be at hand, i. e. ready. Idioms. 3$ bin an ^Kdjngfeit geroofjnt, I am accustomed to frugality. 3 tfyue e$ auS ©efdfltgfett gegen ©ie, I do it out of kindness to you. <£t ticfytete feine 2lugen auf ft'e, He turned his eyes to her. 3$ nxHige in 3^ @efud>, I consent to your demand. €t ift mit u)m setroanbt, He is related to him. ©ptec^en ©ie mit mit ? Do you speak to me ? tbet, against, in opposition to, refers to an opposition and aversion. It stands after the pronoun or noun ; as, ©ie fyanbetten mit jurcibet, They acted in opposition to me. €t fyanbelte bem ©efeije jurcibet, He acted against the law. £)et Stfyee n>at mit juroibet, The tea was repugnant to me. £>et £dtm ift if>r jumibet, The noise is disagreeable to her. PREPOSITIONS. 127 3. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE. 95i$, till, is generally followed by another preposition, or preceded by it ; as, 3d) rcerbe bt)? jc&n Uf)t ju jpaufe bleiben, I shall remain at home till ten o'clock. Batten ©ie bis ben jefjnten (10 ten) btefeS donate, Wait till the 10th of this month. <5ie femnen tract) son fed>$ bis acfyt Ufjr etrcatten, Yon may expect me from six to eight o'clock. St tao, bis an ben jpate im 2Baf[et, He was lying with the water as high as his neck, ©tc ftnb bis auf jto&lf etttunfen, They were all drowned except twelve. St cjincj bis uim (Batten, He went even to the garden. et 9ftann fonnte et fut un$ bejafylen, Being a rich man he was able to pay for us. (Die SDttnijfet fyanbetn fut bm SanbeSfycttn, The Ministers act for the Sovereign. 3d) xvexbc fut <3ie fptecf>en, I shall speak for you. St (ebt nut fut fid), He lives only for himself. 5Btt fyielten ifjn fut einen j?eud)tet, We thought him a hypocrite, ©tufe fut (Stufe cuncjen rcir roeitcr, We went on step by step. 128 PREPOSITIONS. €r faufte ba$ 33ud) fur eincn Stfjatec, He bought that book for one thaler. Idioms. 3d) ging, jut SBieberfyerjMung meiner ©efunbfyeit, nad> 3tatten, I went to Italy for the recovery of my health. <£r fkrb au$ Mangel an 'iftafyrung, He died for want of food. 3 fefyne mid) nad? 3fynen, I long for you. <5ie ift, roegen ifyrer ©d)6nf)ett, berufymt, She is celebrated for her beauty. 3d) fummre mid> ntd)t urn it?n, I do not care for him. £>as> ©cfytjf iff na$ bonbon beftimmt, The ship is bound for London. ©tefeS £eber ift gut ju ©djufyen, This leather is good for shoes. @egen, against, towards, signifies opposition, approach, direction to, and exchange ; as, (£r fyanbelte gegen feinen ©ruber, He acted against his brother. (£r ftarb gegen ba$ (£nbe be$ 28inter$, He died towards the end of the winter., SSir fegetten gegen Often, We sailed towards the east. Q£r »ertaufd)te $3aare gegen SBaare, He exchanged goods for goods. @en, is an abbreviation of gegen ; as, gen jpimmel, gen Often, (to heaven, towards the east), and is frequently used in Scripture. Ofyne, without, signifies non-existence, deficiency, absence, and exclusion ; as, X)te £t)iere ftnb ofjne ^erftanb erfc^aflfen, Animals are created without reason. £)er £tfd) ift ofyne $u£e, The table is without feet. SSir lebten (ange ofme unferen 93ater, We lived a long time without our father. (5$ frmn ofme ifyn gefdjefyen, It can be done without him. 3cf> ging auS, ofyne 3emanben ju fefjen, I went out without seeing any one. ©onber, without, is only used in poetry and in refined language. It is the same as ofyne, (£r faf) bem £obe fonber ©rauen entgegen, He looked for death without fear. Um, round, about, for, of, signifies rest, motion, and prospect; as, <5ie fa£en Mc um ben 23oum fyerum, They were all sitting round the tree. €r lief um ba$ j?au£ fyerum, He run round the house. £)er Pettier fam einen um ben anbern Stag, The beggar came one day after the other. (£iner um ben 5lnbern fprad), One after the other spoke. PREPOSITIONS. 129 3d) fam urn ba$ 95ucb, I lost the book. dx rcujjte urn bie <5ad>e, He knew of the circumstance. Wan fotttc nicbt urn @elb fpielen, One should not play for money. <£x Sat urn Arbeit, He asked for work. £er £ifd) iff urn jroei Suj? tjohcr, ate bic S6anf, The table is about two feet higher than the bench. 2>e$ Htaib* urn acbt Ityr gef>e id) aitf, I go out at eight o'clock in the evening. When urn is used before infinitives, it signifies "in order to," urn— ju, and in this case it is used as a conjunction ; as, £r fpridjt, urn ge&ort ju rcerben, He speaks in order to be heard. When it is used as an adverb, it signifies the passing away of time ; as, Sffienn bet Wlonat urn iff, n?erbe icb beja^en, At the end of the month I shall pay. SBiber, against, in opposition to, expresses opposition, endeavour, disinclination, and religious tendency ; as, <3ie fyanbelten roibet ba^ ©efef?, They acted against the law. <£r fcbnxtmm rrtbet ben ©trom, He swam against the tide. dt fotttc e$ fetbft rotber feinen Men tfcun, He ought to do it even against his will. Jpanbte ntcfu roibet @otte£ ©ebote, Do not act against the command- ments of God. 4. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN BOTH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. With the Dative, asking the ques- With the Accusative, asking the tion rco? rccran? where? question n>ofytn? where to? Continuous state. Motion from one place to another. 2In, on, near, at, by, to. 3)et Slpfel bangt an bem SBaume, The 3d> rcerbe ben 5Kccf an bie 28anb ban= apple hangs on the tree. gen, I shall hang the coat on the wall. JDer jpunblaa, an ber $ette, The dog 3$ lecjte ben jpunb an bie $ette, T was lying by the chain. fastened the dog to the chain. %xx\ 2tbenb fduen ber Wonb, In the (£r fc&rteb ein @ebtd)t an ben 3Ronb, evening the moon shone. He wTote a poem to the moon. <£$ febtt nicbtan^cvleumbetn, There SHefetf 2Bort n>ar an ^Berleumbet a,e= is no need of slanderers. ticket, This word was directed to slanderers. 130 PREPOSITIONS. St ftyrieb am Stifle, He was writ- ing at the table. St fd)teibt an ben Stifty, He writes on the table. 5Iuf, upon, at, to. 3d) mar auf bem SDad&e, I was upon St ftetgt auf ba$ ©ach, He is climb- the roof. SBtt maten auf bem 2>a(te, We were at the ball. 3d) bticb auf bet jpocbjeit, I remained at the wedding. 9Kan kaucbt auf bet 3teife tnel @elb, One wants much money upon a journey. 2)a$ Sflen f!et)t auf bem Stifle, Din- ner is standing upon the table. ^)tntct, £>et ©tod f^ef>t fytntet mtt, The stick stands behind me. IDec £iget mat fyintet 3f>nen, The tiger was behind you. 3n, in, 3d) tufe bem fttnbe im Bimmet, I call the child who is in the room. St gtng im ©atten fpa^ieten, He was walking in the garden. St mat in feinen 35ettad)tungen t>er- ficft, He was immersed in his meditations. ©te fiel im $eflet, She fell in the cellar. St mat fd)0n in meinet Samitte c'm= gefufjrt, He was introduced al- ready to my family. St kbt im Ungtud, He lives in mis- fortune. St fotgfe tf;m in bet <5tabt, He fol- lowed him in town. ing upon the roof. SBir gingen auf ben S5aff, We went to the ball. 9Kotgen metbe id) auf bk £od>$eit gefjen, To-morrow I shall go to the wedding, ©ie gingen jufammen auf bie SRetfe, They went upon a journey together. 3$ ftette ba$ SjTen auf ben Stifcfc, I put the dinner upon the table. behind. St )tetite ben ©tod Winter mid), He put the stick behind me. £>et £tget mitb Winter ©ie fommen, The tiger is coming behind you, i. e. to bite. into. 3* tufe ba$ $tnb in ba$ Btmmet, I call the child into the room. St gtng allein in ben ©atten, He went by himself into the garden. St sertiefte ftd) in feme 35ettad>tun= gen, He immersed himself in his meditations. ©ie ftel in ben Reflet fytnein, She fell into the cellar. St mutbe in meine Samilie c i n g C= fufytt, He was introduced into my family. St ftutjt fid; m'$ (in ba$) Ungtud, He draws himself into misfor- tune. St folgte iljm in bie <5tabt, He fol- lowed him into the town. PREPOSITIONS. 131 Idioms. (£r nbtlugte micb auf cine freunbfd>aft= lidje SBcife, He invited me in a friendly manner. 3d) ftnbe gropcn 93orn)eit babei, I find a great advantage in it. Idioms. (£r forfd)te bet (3ache nad), He in- quired into the matter. 3Bir mtiffen btc ©acbe genau unter: fudjen, We must search closely into the matter. With the Dative, asking the ques- With the Accusative, asking the tion too ? rooran ? where ? question rcot?in ? whereto ? Continuous state. Motion from one place to another. •fteben, beside. $5atf roert neben fid), He sword was hanging beside him. (£r fag neben feiner Gutter, He was sitting beside his mother. hung the sword beside him. ©ie fef?te ftd> neben ibren ©eltebten, She placed herself beside her lover. €r lecjte ba$ 23ud> neben mid), He placed the book beside me. £>a$ ©eroefjr lag neben mir, The gun was lying beside me. Ueber, over, above, beyond. £)er £nabe ft'tjt uber mir, The boy £>er Sebrer fe£te ben &nabcn tibct is sitting above me. £)er 2ib(er ftiegt uber bcm Stuffe, The eagle is flying over the river. £)er ©deleter tying uber ifyrem $opfe, The veil was hanging over her head. Idiom. (£r fd)Uef beim Sefen cin, He slept over the book. mid), The master placed the boy above me. 2>er Sibler fuegt uber ben Ship, The eagle is flying beyond the river. <5ie tying ben ©cbleier uber i(?rcn $opf, She put the veil over her head. Idiom. (£r betrauert ben £ob fetnetf #reunbe£, He mourns over the death of his friend. Unter, under, below, beneath, amongst, among. 3tyr £afd)entud) Ucgt unter bem ©tutyle, Your pocket handker- chief lies under the chair. 3cb fanb ityn unter ben 2lufrutyrern, I found him among the rebels. (£r rcirb bat papier unter ben Stutyl legen, He will put the paper under the chair. £r jog mid) unter btc 'ilufrutyrer, He threw me amongst the rebels. k2 132 PREPOSITIONS. (£r gtno, unter bem (£rfer fyafjteren, He was walking below the balcony. <5a ift !cin @elb unter ben ©o(baten, There is no money among the soldiers. dr fluc^tetc ft'$ unter ben ^r!er, He made his escape under the bal- cony. <£r ttertfyeilte tnel @elb unter bte ©o(= baten, He divided much money amongst the soldiers. 53 or, before. ©te fod)ten tor bet Seftuno,, They were fighting before the forti- fication. 3$ fctm eine ©tunbe t>or Sfynen, I came an hour before you. (£r prebtcjte tor bem ^Bolfe, He was preaching before the multi- tude. Brcifdjen, <£r fafj sn>ifd>en fetnen ©ctaftern, He sat between his sisters. <£$ ift fein 3laum jrotfcfyen ben Stt= fctjen, There is no room be- tween the tables. ($.$ roar ©trett jmifcben ben 2JuStdn= bern, There was strife between the foreigners. 3cb lebe jn>ifcf>en Surcbt unb #offhung, I live between fear and hope. ©te cuno,en t?or tie $efhmg, They went to the front of the fortifi- cation. §r ftelfr fid) tor ©te, He places himself before you. <£t brad)fe ft'e ttor ben Dftcfcter, He brought them before the judge. between. (£r fe§te ben <5najdnber jrotfcfyen bte $ranjofen, He placed the En- glishman between the French- men. Segen ©te ba$ 23ud) jrotfdjen ba$ papier, Put the book between the paper. 9)ftfd)en ©ie fetnen ©amen jrcifcfyen ben ^feffer, Mix no seed with the pepper. <£$ ijl etn proper Unterfcfyteb jmifc^en ben betben 25rubern, There is a great difference between the two brothers. 5. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH THE ARTICLE. 5Jm (instead of an bem, at the) : ©ie 93irne fydngt am S5aum, The pear hangs on the tree. £ur (instead of ju ber, to the) : <£$ gtncjen Siete &ur $ir$e, Many went to church. 3um (instead of ju bem, to the) : ©ie £ngldnber reifen sum SSerom'igen, The Englishmen travel for pleasure. PREPOSITIONS. 133 £)utch» (instead of burtf) ba$, through the) : £ie jjitynetftefen burch^ Jr>au^,The fowls were running through the house. gurS (instead of fur ba$, for the) : <2te fhutten fur 5 £ -Batertanb, They were fighting for their native country. The following expressions, although frequently used, are not correct; as, X)urd)n (instead of burcb ben, through the) : $Bir fangen burd>n SBalb, We were singing through the forest. 5tu$m (instead of au$ bem, out of the) : <5ie gtng au£m jjaufe, She went out of the house. <8orm (instead of t>or bem, before the) : 3rf) f?ei?e tform $euer, I stand before the fire. 6. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH THE ADVERB bet, AND THE demonstrative pronoun berfetbe, biefetbe, bafielbe, the same. £>abei (near by) : C£r frcmb babet unb lacf)te, He was standing by and laughing. Idiom : (£$ blieb babei, It remained the same thing. IDctbutrf) (instead of butch baffelbe, through that) : JDabutd) ift et rcicf) gerootben, Through that he has become rich. 2)afut (instead of fur baffetbe, for the same thing) : IDafur t?iett id) it?n nid>t, I did not think him so. 3$ gab nur etnen ©chiding bafur, I gave only one shilling for it. £)agegen (instead of gegen bafietbe, against it) : (£t fagte ^cirf)t^ bagegen, He said nothing against it. £)amit (instead of mit bemfelben, with it) : <5ie ijt bamit juftteben, She is satisfied with it. 6. prepositions compounded with the demonstrative pronoun bet, bie, baffetbe. £)arnad) (instead of nach bemfelben, after it) : (£t griff ntcht batnad), He did not grasp it). Daneben (instead of ncben bemfelben, neben baffelbe, close to) : (£t flanb baneben (neben bem £tfct)e), He stood close to (close to the table). (£t jtellte ficf> baneben (neben ba$ ©opfya), He placed himself close to the sofa. 134 PREPOSITIONS. £)atcm (instead of an bemfelben, an bafielbe, on it, it) : atauf (instead of auf bemfelben, auf baffelbe, thereon, towards it) : St ftet>t barauf (auf bem SSetge), He stands thereon (on the mountain). St o,et)t barauf (auf ben .Spunb) tog, He is going towards it (towards the dog). £)atin (instead of in bemfelben, therein) : St ift barin (in bem ©atten), He is therein (in the garden). £>arein (instead of in baffelbe, in it) : St legte ftcb ba.tetn (in ben ©tteit), He interfered in it (in the quarrel). 7. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH THE RELATIVE PRONOUN rcetcbet, e, e$. SBobutcb (instead of butcb reeled, but<$ roen, by what means, through whom) : SSBobutcb eg gefcbat), wax nifyt befannt, By what means it happened was not known. $3obutcb (butd) n?en?) etfnelten ©te bin ^acbticbt? Through whom did you receive the news ? 5Bofut (instead of fut n>elcbe$, fut n>en, for what, for whom) : S$ tjf nicbt bex 5ftube roetn), roofut et atbettet, It is not worth while to work for what he receives. S&ofut (fut roen ?) atbeiten <&ie ? For whom do you work ? 2Boa,ea,en (instead of o,eo,en rcelcbeg, gegen rcen, against what, against whom) : SBogegen (gegen ^etfeumbuno,) »ettf>eibia,te et ftc^>? Against what (against slander) did he defend himself? SBoge^en (gegen rcen) fptad) et ? Against whom did he speak ? Somit (instead of mit roelcfyem, mit roern, by what means, with whom) : SBomit rcoften ©ie eg beroeifen? By what means will you prove it ? SBomtt (mit n>em) rootten ©ie au&jefjen ? With whom will you go out ? SBornacb (instead of na$ roelcbem, nacb n>em, according to which, for whom) : 2Botnad> (nad> reelcben ©tunbfd^en) et b^nbelt, ift befannt, The principles according to which he acts are known. PREPOSITIONS. \S5 SBornad) (nad) rcetcbem $r$te) trerben ©te fcf>icfcn ? For whom (to which physician) shall you send ? 2Borcm (instead of an iwlcfcem, rcelcf)er, roetc^c, by what means, of what, to whom) : SBoran erfennen ©w ba$? By what means do you know that? SBoran (an metier ^ranff?cit) flarber ? Of what (of what disease) did he die ? 2Boran (an rcetdje 23ef)6rbe) roerben ©w ftcf> rcenben ? To whom (to which authority) will you apply ? SBorauf (instead of auf rcetcfyeS, n>a$, on what, what for) : SBorauf (auf reeffen $erfpred)en) rcrfjnen ©ie ? On what (upon whose promise) do you depend ? SBorauf n>atten ©ie ? What do you wait for ? SBorauS (instead of au$ roelcfyem, auS roetdjen, from whence, from what) : SBotauS (au$ rocldjcm Binimer) fam er ? From whence (out of which room) came he ? 2&orau6 (auS rcelcfyen SBotten) fd>tte^cn ©ie ba$ ? From what (from which words) do you conclude that ? SBorin (instead of in roelchem, in which, of what) : £>a$ Spau$, roortn et roofynr, tft fefjr alt, The house in which he lives is very old. SBorin befiefyt 3fot 93ermogen ? Of what does your fortune consist ? SBorein (instead of in rcelcbeS, into which, with what) : SBorein (in n>el$e 3fngetegenf)et0 f>at cr ft'tf) cjemifcbt ? With what (into which affair) has he mixed himself? 8. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH THE ADVERBS tjtCr, tyt, fun, nebcn, fort, jpietan, hereon, hereat ; tyetauS, hereout, by this ; fyiettn, herein ; fytetbei, herewith ; permit, herewith, with this ; fjteroon, hereof; fyer= au$, out from; fyinauS, out of, out to; fyetetn, in; {jinein, into; f>erun= ter, down from ; fytnuntet, down to ; fyernarf), hereafter, afterwards ; fortan, henceforth ; nebenfyer, besides, &c. 9. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS. ©urcfcauS, throughout, altogether; nebenbei, close by; porau$, be- forehand ; ubetautf, exceedingly ; uoruber, over ; mituntcr, sometimes ; injroifeben, in the meantime. ( 136 ) 10. PREPOSITIONS BEFORE INFINITIVES DO NOT GOVERN ANY CASE, AND ARE REGARDED AS CONJUNCTIONS. £t ging rceg, ofme mit <£tvoa$ ju fagen, He went away without telling me any thing. (?t ram nid)t roieber, urn ba$ @efb $u bejafylen, He did not come back in order to pay the money, ©ein $5ruber fom fyierfyer, anftatt mit fetnen ©tenet ju fdncfen, His brother came here instead of sending me his valet. LIST OF ALL PREPOSITIONS WITH THE CASES WHICH THEY GOVERN. The Genitive. anjtatr, ftatr, instead of. au^erfyatb, outside, without, biefteit^, on this side of. balben, fyalber, on account of. innerfyatb, within. jenfeitS, on the other side of. haft, by virtue or power of. taut, according to. okrfxtlb, above. um rciUen, for the sake of. ungeacbtet, notwithstanding, unterfyalb, below. umt>etr, not far of or from. tYrmtttelft, by the means of. t>ermc>ge, by virtue of. rodbrcnb, during, roegen, on account of. au$, out of, from. aufjer, out of, beside. bet, by, near. binnen, within. entgegen, opposite to, against. gegenuber, opposite to. mit, with. nacf>, after, to. bte, till, from, to. burd), through, fur, for. gegen, to, towards. The Dative. neb ft, beside, together with. ob, over, at, on account of (in Poetry), fammt together with, fetr, since, tton, from, of. ju, to, at. juroiber, contrary to. The Accusative. ofyne, without, um, around. rctbet, against. The Genitive and Dative. ldng$, along ; tro§, in spite of; jufofge, in consequence, according to. The Dative and Accusative. uber, over, at. an, on, near, auf, upon, on. Winter, behind, in, in, into, neben, near, near by. unter, under, below, amongst. »or, before, ago. jroifeben between. ( 137 ) § 27. CONJUNCTIONS. Conjunctions serve to connect single words or sentences and refer from one part of the sentence to another. They also serve to ex- plain the whole of the sentence. Those marked * remove the verb and the auxiliary verbs in their compound tenses, to the end of the sentence. Exept atfein, benn, (for), fonbern, unb, ober. There are six classes: the disconjunctive, conditional, copulative, comparative, consecutive, and explanative. 2Iber, aflein, but, are conjunctive at the beginning of a sentence, and signify conjunction, failure, negation, explanation; as, 9?un abet iff e$ ju fpctt auSjugefyen, But now it is too late to go out. 3cf) fud)te tr>n, aber er roar nid)t ba, I sought him, but he was not there. 3$ rounfd)te aber, ba$ e£ nirf)t a,efd>df)e, But I wished that it might not happen. <5ie roaren ajucflicb ; ba abet famen Strubfafe unb ^ranfyeiten, unb jetft&rten tfyr Qtiiid , They were happy, but then came sickness and trouble, and destroyed their happiness. Mein, refers to the contrary of what has been said before. 3d) fyoffte, attein tcb fanb mid) getdufd)t, I hoped, but found myself deceived. £>ie 3fteicf)en fyaben hie 9)ttttel, atfein oft nitf>t ben guten SBitfen ju fyelfen, The rich have the means, but often not the good will to help. 5lber, may take the place of alfein ; but the contrary can never take place. * 2Ife, as, than, when, refers to time and the cause, and signifies character, change, rank, time, cause ; as, (£r jeigt ficfc afe etn efyrttcfyer $ftann, He shows himself as an honest man. <£.$ roar geffern falter, aU fyeute, It was colder yesterday than to-day. X)et &fkrretd)tfcbe ^aifer regtert aud) ate ftontg son 236bmen, The Emperor of Austria is also the reigning King of Bohemia. 2tte eS gefcbefyen roar, gtng i$ roeg, When it had happened I went away. (£r iff ju aufrid)tig, ati ba$ icb tfym nic^t glauben fotlte, He is too sincere for me not to believe him. 5tffo, thus, consequently, then, signifies comparison (solemnly speaking) or conclusion ; as, %\o \)at &ott bie 'Belt geliebt, Thus has God loved the world. 138 CONJUNCTIONS. (£t erbt We$, ctlfo aud) ba$ fyauS, He inherits every thing, and con- sequently the house. (£s bletbt atfo babet, It remains then the same thing. 2tucb, also, and, signifies affirmation, conjunction, a future time, supposition ; as, 3tu$ id) roetbe e$ tfyun, or ^ 5Iud> rccrbc id) e$ tf)urt, or V I shall also do it. 3d? rcetbe e$ aud> tburt, 3 SRctc^t^um, (Styre, aud) felbfl ^ergnugen ftnb wrgdngttc^, Wealth, honour, and even pleasure are uncertain. <£$ gefdjefye and), roann eg rooKe, It may happen also when it will. ©o reid) et aud> ift, fo ift et bocb ntd)t gtucfftd), However rich he is, he is yet not happy. * 2Iuf bap, in order that, is used in high language, and signifies purpose or assertion ; as, 3$ arbeite, auf ba£ t<# meinc Samtlte erndfyre, I work in order that I may provide for my family. £)a$ Sort ift a,ea,eben, auf baj? 3b* c $ baton fottt, The word is given in order that you may conform to it. Slufjer, except, signifies exclusion, and is followed by ba$ ; as, (St b«t 2Hfe$ wrfcfcroenbet, au£et bafs et fut feme ^amtfte geforgt ^atte, He has spent every thing except that he had provided for his family. Slufjetbem, besides, else ; as, <£t fd)(ug micb, unb roar au£erbem fe^t unbardbat, He struck me, and besides (that) he was very ungrateful. * 2$etfot, before, refers only to time ; as, 25et>ot bte gtanjofen famen, roar SItteS tufjta, im £anbe, Before the French came, all was quiet in the country. * 23tg, until ; as, 3$ roetbe roatten, bit et fommt, I shall wait until he comes. *£)a, as, since, whilst, because, refers to the cause ; as, £>a id) tf>n genau fenne, fo rcetbe id) u)n ftagen, As I know him well I shall ask him. 2)a id) fam, fo roottte et weaken, Because I came he wished to go away. CONJUNCTIONS. 189 £hi fannjt Wity* lernen, ba bu plauberjr, You cannot learn any thing, because you talk. 2)u plauberfr, ba bu bod) fdjreiben follrejr, Thou art talking, although thou shouldst write. ©afjer, therefore, signifies a reason or a cause; as, £>u fjajt geftoftfen ; bafjer roirft bu befkaft rcerben, You have been stealing ; therefore you will be punished. * £>afern, supposing, if, is not used in good language. * £)amtf, in order that, signifies a final cause ; as, 3d) bcfkafe tfjn, bamtt er ftcb beJTern foil, I punish him in order that he may become better. £>amit, as a conjunction, has the accent on the last syllable, and as an adverb, on the first syllable (bamtt, bamtt). ©arm, then, refers to time, order, and condition ; as, 3Benn ber jperbjr fommt, barm fottft bu anfangen, When the autumn comes then you shall begin. puerft rebc id), barm bu, I speak first, then you. SBenn bu ffeifng bift, barm fottjl bu bag 55ud) fyaben, If thou art indus- trious, then thou shalt have the book. ©arum agrees with be^alb, beproegen, on that account, therefore, and signifies cause or reason ; as, (£r tjr arm ; barum roerbe td> u)m fjelfen, He is poor; therefore I shall assist him. ©ie 3kucfe ifr fdjabfyaft ; barum fonnfe id) nid>t !ommen, The bridge is damaged ; I was therefore unable to come, ©arum fjafr bu bein 23arerlanb wrlaffen, On that account thou hast left thy native country. *©a£, that, connects the object of the first part of the sentence to the second, and expresses certainty, uncertainty, caution or referring to the past ; as, 3$ roetf?, ba$ er fommen unrb, I know that he will come. 3d) furd)te, bafj bu tf)n md)t treffen nnrjt, I fear that you will not meet him. ©et) rufoig, ba$ ba$ $tnb einfd)lafr, Be quiet, that the child may sleep. €$ ift lange fjer, bafc id) ©U gefefjen tyabc, It is a long time since I saw you. 140 CONJUNCTIONS. If a verb expresses a certainty, commences the sentence, or follows the conjunction baf?, it requires the indicative. In case of uncertainty the subjunctive is used, as the above second example will show. The conjunction ba$ is used more frequently in German than in English, as the following sentences will show: 3d? n>ei§, ba$ ec tin efycltcbec 9ftann ift, I know him to be an honest man. (§.$ ift feme jpoffnuno, ba, bctj? ec rotebec fyecgefteflt roerbe, There is no hope of his recovery (that he will recover). The following sentences will show that ba$ may be used or not : (*c gtctubte, ec babe ©ie gefefyen, or ) He believed that he had (£c ojaubte, ba§ ec te tf?n, bctfj er mir fyelfen moge, j might assist me. <£c befall, ec fotte e£ tfyun, or ) He commanded that he <£c befall, ba$ ec e$ tfnm foffe, > should do it. (£c t?ecfprad>, ec rcoUe if>m @etb geben, or \ He promised that he €c ttecfycctd), ba$ ec tfym @elb geben n>olte, j would give him money. If the conjunction ba$ is not used, the verb is removed to the end of the sentence. 2)emnad), accordingly, consequently, indicates principle or con- sequence ; as, £)emnacb {janbelte ec fcb(etf)t, Consequently he acted badly. ©te btieben ju jpctufe, bemnad) fonnten ft'e ntd)t ju mic Fommcn, They re- mained at home, consequently they could not come to me. £)enn, for, because, signifies a reason or cause, consequence, con- dition, comparison, instead of aU (than), exclusion, in- stead of ati, or interrogation ; as, £)ec $nabe rotcb gelobt, benn ec ift ffeifng, The boy is praised, for he is industrious. 33(eiben ©ie nid>t fyiec, benn icfy bin nid)t roofyl, Do not remain here, for I am not well. @o Meibe eg benn babet, It may be so then. <£.$ fet) benn, baf ec e$ leugne, In case he might deny it. (£c roar acbeitfamec, benn affe feine 25cubec, He was more industrious than any of his brothers. CONJUNCTIONS. 141 s Jlid)td benn @otb roirb if?n permogen, eg pi thm, Nothing but gold will enable him to do it. 3(1 et benn roirflid) ba ? Is he really there then ? £)ennod>, yet, agrees with beffenuncjeacfuer, notwithstanding, nidug= beftoroentger, nevertheless. They signify an absolute con- sequence or effect ; as, (£g ftnb Wtyxfycn, unb bennocb gtaubt man fte, They are fables, and yet they believe them. Obojeid) id) ntd)t ba bin, fo fann eg bennod) in Orbnuna, a,ebracf)t roerben, Although I am not there it may yet be settled. £)e£a,leid)en, and inajeid)en, of the same kind, in the same manner, are rarely used. 2)efro, is generally preceded by je ; je, bejto, the more, the more. *2>teroett, because, agrees with metl, ba, because, as, and is fre- quently used in the holy scriptures. £>od), yet, still, nevertheless, but, refers to a limitation, contra- diction, condition, request, hope, wish, or emphasis ; as, £g ift jroar [pat, unb bod) rottf id) nod) roarten, It is indeed late, I shall yet wait. £)u bt)t retd), unb bod) bift bu nid)t rcofyttfydtto,, Thou art rich, and yet thou art not charitable. 3$ roitt eg bit fao,en, bod) bu mupt mid? ntd)t mratfyen, I will tell you, but you must not betray me. Sage eg mit bocb, Pray tell me. (£g ift bod) nid)tg Unangenefymeg ? It is nothing unpleasant (I hope) ? 2Benn id) bod) retd) roare ! If I were only rich ! ^ein bod) ! ntcbt bod) ! Certainly not ! £>od), sometimes agrees with bennocb, but not the contrary. * (£i)e, ere, before, expresses time or condition ; as, (£t;e rotr famen, roaren fie auggegangen, Before we came they had gone out. or <5te roaren auggegangen, efye rotr famen, They had gone out before we came. ©je id) tbm bag @e(b gabe, rourbe id) eg lieber eincm 'ilrmen geben, Before I would give the money to him I would give it to a poor person. 142 CONJUNCTIONS. £nm>eber, either, is never used without being followed by ober (or), and shews that either one thing or another must be done; as, <£ntn>eber bief? or ba$ mu$ gefcfyefyen, Either this or that must be done. £>te j?auptn>6rier ber beutfcfyen ©pracbe ftnb entrceber mdnnticfyen, ober meib= licfyen, obet fdd)lid>en @efd)led)t^, The nouns of the German lan- guage are either masculine, or feminine, or neuter gender. * galls, or im gattc, in case, agrees with rcenn, if; as, galls er eS md>t rfyun follte, (or SBenn "J In case he should not do it, (If er e$ nid)t tfyun follte,) fo mu£ ic6> > he should not do it,) I must jufrteben fetjn, ) be satisfied. getner, farther, in the future, refers to a continuation of speech, or to future times, and agrees with wetter ; as, gerner fprad) er bie bebeutuna,&?ollen SBorte, Farther he spoke those important words. 2)u ttnrft ferner mein £>iener fet)n, Thou wilt be my valet in future. SolgUcfy, consequently, of course, agrees with bafyer, also. (£r if* arm, folglidj mufj er arbeiten, He is poor, consequently he must work. golajicl) muf man f>6ren, roaS gefprocfyen roirb, Consequently one must hear what they say. golgltd) ift *fttcl>tS gerettet rcorben, Therefore nothing was saved. @leid>fam, as if, even as if, refers to the similarity of two or more persons or things ; as, €r fiefyt auS, gleicfyfam me auS bem SBaflfer gejogen, He looks as if he had been drawn out of the water. @tetd)n>ot)l, yet, agrees with benno$, beffemmgeadrtet, however, ne- vertheless ; as, 2Sir finb fyeute befd>dftigr, gfetcfyroofyl rcerben roir mit Slmen fpetfen, We are much occupied to-day, nevertheless we shall dine with you. S^unad), hereafter, nad^er, afterwards. The former expresses future time without, but the latter future time with re- ference to any subject; as, 2>u barfjt fyernad) auSgeljen, Thou wilt be allowed to go out soon after this. CONJUNCTIONS. 143 Buerjr rcoflrc er fommcn, aber nacbbcr btelrcn il n ©efchafte ab, At first he wished to come, but afterwards he was prevented by business. Jjingegen, bagcgen, on the contrary, on the other hand; as, £)aS ienffe geletfret, aber bagecjen fjabe id) ifyn bejaf?(t, It is true he has done me service, but then I have paid him. The conjunction fc^cgen has the accent on the first syllable, but the adverb bagegen, (against), on the second syllable. *3c, is regularly followed by bejto before a comparative as, je befto, the more, the more, and refers to quality, quantity, time, or proportion ; as, 3c proper bie $Intagen, befro tetcbrer ftnb bte ^ortfcrSritte, The greater the abilities the easier is the progress. 3e mefyr SBcin ba ijl, befro mefyr rcirb getrunfen, The more wine there is the more they drink, ©efyen ©ie je efjer, jc liebet, Go, the sooner the better. 3c nad)bcm ex gcarbeitet l;at, fo rcirb er bc&afylt, He will be paid according to his work. 3cbod), yet, but, however, nevertheless, expresses migitation or interruption ; as, <£r tjr reicb, jcbod) niefct ftofj, He is rich, but yet not proud. (£r finer, an ju reben, jcbod) rourbe cr unterbrocfyen, He began to speak, but he was interrupted. Q.x txant fiinf $lafcben 2Bein, jebod) fonnre cr nicbt tricar trtnrcn, He drank five bottles of wine, however he could not drink any more. * 3nbcm, when, as, while, whilst, agrees with ba, ati, recti, nxtyrenb, and expresses time and cause ; as, 3nbcm tcb an if>n fdjrieb, tarn cr felbfr, Whilst I was writing to him he came himself. Sir muften 23robt faufen, inbem n>tr fetn'S fyaben, We must buy bread, as we have none. * 3nbcjTcn, in the meanwhile, however (unterbeffen is vulgar, inberj is used in high language and life.) 3nbc|Tcn id) nut u)m fpracfc, fam cin 3Reifenber, Whilst I spoke to him a traveller came. 3 rcerbe e$ inbefTen uberlea.cn, In the meantime I shall consider of it. 144 CONJUNCTIONS. £r bracfyte @elb ; tnbeffen fyat er ntcfyt Wc$ bejafytr, He brought money ; but yet he has not paid all. * 3n=fo-fern, in=fo=roeit, as far as, so far, is generally followed by afe. 3n fo fern er ?Red)t fyar, rnufien rott tfym nad>geben, As far as he is right we are obliged to yield to him. <5ucr> nut 33ergmtgungen, in fo fern e$ betner ^ffidjt enrfprtd)t, Seek only after pleasures as far it is consistent with your duties. 3d) fuc&e in fo fern $ergnugungen, ate e£ mtt metnen '•pfudtfen uberemfttmmf, I seek so far for pleasures as it is consistent with my duties. * 3n rote fern, how far, in what manner. 3n rote fern fonnte er e» nid)t tfyun? In what manner could he not do it ? 3d> roetf? ntd)t, in roie fern er eg rinm fonnre, I do not know in what manner he could do it. $aum, no sooner. $aum roar id) ba, fo !am er, No sooner was I there than he came. $aum fjarte id) tfyn tferlajfen, fo rourbe id? roieber $u tfym gerufen, No sooner had I left him than I was called to him again. 9)Uri)Ui, of course, consequently, agrees with fo(gltd), better ; as, 3d) liebe bid) ; mitfytn rotrft bu mir folgen, I love thee ; consequently thou wilt follow me. * 9?ad)bem, after, refers to time, and implies that one event has been stated and that another will take place ; as, ^ad)bem er bteg gefagt fjatte, gtng er roeg, After he had said this he went away. €r fcr^rteb, nad)bem er gelefen fyatte, After having read, he wrote. ^amlid), namely, as, agrees with o.U, rote, namentltd). It is expla- natory, and rarely met with in English ; as, (i$ barf Reiner mefyr tn'S JpauS fommen, ndmltd) (namentltd)) fetn $rember, Not any one beside is allowed to come to the house, namely no stranger. 1fttd)t attetn, ntd>t nur, or ntcfyt blof?, not only, is followed by fonbern and), but also. It signifies distinction (relationship), abi- lities, and character, or reality ; as, Wvfyt ottein er, fonbern aud) feme ©efefyrotfter gingen in ba$ Concert, Not only himself, but also his sisters and brothers went to the concert. CONJUNCTIONS. 145 (£r ift nid>t nur gelebtt, fonbetn aud) tecbncbaffen, He is not only learned, but upright also. 6t nafym nid)t bIo£ ba$ @e(b, fonbetn arbeitete aud> bafur, He not only took the money, but also worked for it. Wod), nor, is preceded by rccber, neither, and is negative j as, 5Bir fyabcn rceber geit, no<$ ^ujl ft'e ju fetjcn, We have neither time nor inclination to see her. (Seine 9ftebe nw roebct anjiefyenb, nod) belefytenb, His speech was neither attractive nor instructive. <£$ t]r nid?t mein 2Sunfd), nod) ift H bet Sfyrige, It is not my wish, nor is it yours. 9hin, now, agrees with ba, inbem, and shews the consequence of a thing or a cause, encouragement, and surprise ; as, £>u tjaft nicftt gefjott, nun fo mupt bu fallen, Thou didst not obey (it), therefore thou must feel. s J?un fyaft bu e$ befd)(offen, Now thou hast decided, ^un wirb er fommen, Now he will come. 9hm muffen n>it fyanbetn, We are now obliged to act. Ohm ift We$ gut, Now all is well. ^ur, only, but, agrees with Mop, einjtg unb allein ; as, 3d) bemiifyte mid) fef)t ; nut fyatte id) feinen Stfolg, I troubled myself much, but I had no success. St Urn; nut wax eS ju fpat, He came ; only it was too late. 9?ut et benff an mid), He only thinks of me. * Ob, if, whether, signifies doubt, uncertainty, a question, direct or indirect ; as, 3cb roeip nid)t, ob id) U)n fefyen mzbe, I do not know whether I shall see him. (£$ ift nid)t entfd)ieben, ob n>it ben ^tojep gerctnnen roetben, It is not de- cided whether we shall gain the lawsuit (or not). Stiffen <2te, ob et roob,l ift ? Do you know whether he is well ? St ftagte, ob id> ju jpaufe f>))n nnitbe, He asked whether I should (might) be at home. *£)bgteid), although, is used instead of roenn gteid), rcenn aud). It is separated if followed by the personal pronouns with the singular or plural, and signifies admittance and assertion \ as, £)a$ SBettet ift angenefjm, obg(eid) bie flatter son ben SBauimn fatten, The L 146 CONJUNCTIONS. weather is pleasant, although the leaves are falling from the trees. Ob et gjetd) nod) nid)t f>tet tft, fo rottb et bod) fommen, Although he is not here now, yet he will come. Ob is sometimes omitted both in prose and poetry ; as, 3ft gleid? bie gtofjte ©efafyt ootubet, fo tft bod) bet $tanfe nod) ntc^t $mttet, Although the greatest danger is over, still the sick man is not yet saved. <&o butfen row un$ bod) gtudltd) nennen, Ob un$ £dnbet, ob im$ $fteete ttennen, Although we are separated by lands or seas, yet we may be called happy. Obet, or, is generally preceded by entroebet. It is sometimes used by itself, and is explanatory ; as, yiifyt atle 2Renfd>en fonnen jpetten fenn, obet Slnbetn btenen, Not all men are able to be masters, or to serve others. Ofyne, except, unless, is mostly used in solemn language, and agrees with aufsetbem, besides; as, Sftid)t$ fann gefd)efyen, ofyne ba$ bet jjett fetnen ©egen bct&u gtebt, Nothing can happen unless the Lord grants his blessing upon it. * ©ettbem, since, since then, refers to the past and also to the present; as, (£t ift fet)t arm gerootben, fettbem et franf toat, He has become very poor since he was ill. ©eitbem et fpatfam ift, tebt et g(ucfttd), Since he is economical he is happy. ©internal, as, whereas, since, is used in the Bible and in old ma- nuscripts. ©o, so, as, thus, and, if, signifies proportion, comparison, conse- quence, feeling, character, limitation, and condition ; as, JDiefe 23itne ift fo gut, ati jene, This pear is as good as that. 2Bte bie 2Itbeit (tft), fo (ift) bet Siofyn, As is the work, so are the wages. SBenn bu es> mfud)ft, fo rottft bu gludlid) roetben, If thou dost try it, then thou wilt be happy. €t ift fo juftieben ! He is so contented ! ©o ft'nb bie 9Kenfd)en ! Thus is mankind ! ©o getn id) aud> rooQte, fo !ann id) bod) nid)t, However much I should wish it, yet I cannot. ©o 3fyt ben SBitlen tfyut (£ute$ f)tmmUfd>en ?Batet$, >c. If you follow the commandments of your heavenly father, &c. CONJUNCTIONS. 117 If the conjunctions ate, ba, nacbbem, obgleid), obfd)on, reetl, rote, roenn, begin a sentence, the first part of the sentence ends with a verb, and is followed by fo, which cannot be translated into English ; as, %$ er abretffe, fo rourben %{U traurig, When he departed all became sad. ©onbern, but, is used if the former part of the sentence is expressed negatively; as, (Er fjat mid) ntd>t getobt, fonbern gerabelt, He has not praised me, but blamed. X)ie £tnte iff ntd)t fc^roarj, fonbern Matt, The ink is not black, but blue. £)a$ Xua$ papier ijt ntcbt r^eiier, aber gut, The paper is not dear, but good. s j7id)t nur fetne £rdgf)eit, fonbern aud> fetne Unoerfd)amtbeit mad)t ifyn tferadjtlicf), Not only his laziness, but also his impudence renders him despicable. ©onjt, else, otherwise, is frequently followed by nid>r, nid)t$ ; as, £6re, fonf! mu£t bu fiifylen, Hear, else thou must feel. (Er fagte fonft ^icbt^, He said nothing else. (Er roar fonfl ntrgenb£ ju fitnben, He was not to be found anywhere else. (Boroofyt — ate, afe and) ; as, (E$ ftnb foroofyl SMumen, ate aud) grud)te i n bem ©arten, There are flowers as well as fruit in the garden. Pettier foroofyt, ate ftontge- muffen fterben, Beggars must die as well as kings. %,b/iU — tfyeite, partly, partly; as, £f)ette fein 23etragen, n>tte fetne 25efcbetbenf)ett f>aben if>n erfyoben, Partly his behaviour, partly his modesty have raised him. UebrtgenS, however, besides ; as, UebrigenS tjr e$ nod; ntd>t pett, However it is not yet time. UcbrtgenS fagte er 9fttd>t$, Besides that he said nothing. Uebcrblefj, besides, moreover ; as, Uebcrbtef? fragte er mid) roeiter, Besides he questioned me farther. Urn, in order to, is followed by ju with the infinitive, and signifies purpose or intention ; as, (Er ifl fteipig, urn getobt ju roerben, He is industrious, in order that he may be praised. £r eilt, urn batb nad) jpaufe ju Fommen, He is in a hurry, in order to come home soon. l2 148 CONJUNCTIONS. Unb, and, connects one or more words or sentences ; as, 9ttein3kfer unb meine Gutter rcaren ba, My father and mother were there. SStati gcbraucbt t>on ben Mfyen bie s )Md), ba$ Sleifd), bie ipaut unb btc jporner, They use the milk, the meat, the skin, and the horns of cows. &$ tjorte auf ju regnen unb fog(etd) fafyen roir wU Scute auf ber ©tra£e, It left off raining, and immediately we saw many people in the street. llngectd)tet, although, notwithstanding, is used instead of obgleid); as, 3d) gebe Sfynen ba$ @elb, ungead)tet ®ie eS ntd)t mbtent fyaben, I shall give you the money, although you have not deserved it. QStelmefyr, rather, is used in opposition to t?teln>eniger, rather less ; as, %ielme\)\: riett) id) ifym, nicfyt auSjugefyen, I advised him rather not to go out. *3Bctyrenb, whilst, while, signifies duration of time; as, SBdfyrenb fie fpietten, fang id), Whilst they were playing, I sang. 5Bann, when, is generally used before questions, and denotes time in general ; as, SBann roerben <5ie 3fyrcn Sreunb fefyen? When will you see your friend? 3d) n>ei§ md)t, nxmn er fommt, I do not know when he will come. SBeber, neither, is always followed by nod), nor ; as, 3Beber er, nod) 2Inbere t onnten eg u)un, Neither himself nor others were able to do it. * SJBetl, because, alludes to a moral or physical cause ; as, 3d) ad)te il;n, roetl er efyrtid) ift, I esteem him because he is honest. (£tn fymb htm nid)t fftegen, rceil er feme J-lugel fyctt, A dog cannot fly, because he has no wings. *5Benn, when, if, denotes time. It is used with the present, first and second future, perfect, first and second conditional, which the first four sentences will exemplify ; as, S&enn er fd>ldft, fo read)? id), When he is asleep I am awake. 5Benn n>ir fte fefyen rcerben, fo rcotten roir eS rfyt mtttfyeilen, When we see her we will communicate it to her. 2Benn id) melne 23riefe gefdmeben fyctben rcerbe, (fo) fyoffe id) ©ie ju fef;en, When I shall have finished my letters I hope to see you. SE&enn id) ujn gefe^en \)nen gefyen, When I have seen him I shall go with you. CONJUNCTIONS. 1 I!) When the imperfect and pluperfect express time, they require the conjunction ate instead of n>enn ; as, 3tte er ben £iger fa!), erfdjracf er, When he saw the tiger he was frightened. 2fte fie jugebcrt fatten, fprad>en fie baritber, When they had been listen- ing they spoke about it. The following sentences express a condition, requiring roenn, if; as, 2Benn bu fommen roittjr,fo roirft bu ben $re»nben fcfyen, If thou wilt come thou wilt see the stranger. 3cf> rourbe mid) freuen, roenn <2ie e$ tfyun rourbcn, I should be glad if you would do it. (£$ fcbien, ate roenn er franf wave, It appeared as if he were ill. SBenn is sometimes not expressed ; as, (£rquicft eud) bie Worgentuft, fo gemepet fie ! If the morning air revives you, enjoy it ! 5Benn abet, but if; roenn etroa, if peradventure ; roenn gleid), trenn aud), roenn fd)on, although ; roenn nid)t, except, unless ; are separated ; as, roenn — nid)t ; as, SBenn er nicht fommt, fo roerbe id) an tyn fcbreiben, If he does not come I shall write to him. SBte, as, like, when, how, agrees with ba, ate ; and signifies pro- portion, similarity, qualification, liberality, time, and condition ; as, (£r iff fo gro£ rote ein SKtefe, He is as tall as a giant. (3ie finb roie ein SRafenber, You are like a madman. 5Bie ber ipcrr ijl, fo finb feine $ned)te, As the master is, so are his servant-men. 28ie e^ 3fynen gefiflt, As you please. SEBie et fort roar, wmtpte id) meine Ufyr, When he had gone away my watch was missing. 3* rounbre mid), une bu ba$ fyaft fagen ronnen, I wonder how you could have said that. <£.$ ift mtr gletcb, me er and) fyanbetn mag, It is the same to me, let him act how he will. 9Bic reid) er aud> ift, fo fyat er bod) S^inbe, However rich he is he yet has enemies. 5Bieroof)t (obgleid)) er junger ift, fo bin id) bod) gtudlicfjer, Although he is younger, still I am more happy. 150 INTERJECTIONS. *2Bo, if, as a conjunction; where, as an adverb. The former signifies a condition, and is not used in good language, except followed by nid)t ; as, St&un ®te e$; too nitt)t, fo merbe icf> @ie jTOingen, Do it; if not I shall compel you. *3Bofern, if, provided, in case, as far as, insomuch as; as, Sofetn ©ie barin roilltgen, fo TOirb e$ 3*>t 9}acbtf)eU fej)n, If you consent to it, it will be to your disadvantage. stomal, especially, is followed by ba (as), and agrees with befonberS, ttotjuajtd); as, €£ tft nun bunfel, jumat ba bit 5ftonb nid)t fd>etnf, It is dark now, espe- cially as the moon does not shine. j3n>ar, indeed, to be sure, true, however, is followed by abet, bod), affetn; as, (£.$ iff jnxtt £eif, abet id) rcerbe nod> cine ©tunbe Metben, To be sure it is time, but I shall still remain an hour. (it ift jroat jung, bod> fyat er feine Stfafyrung, However young he is, still he has no experience. (£t fcbmeid)dt mir %a>at, aflein id) TOerbe ifym nid)t ajauben, Indeed he flat- ters me, but I shall not believe him. Obfcbon, although, is separable, and agrees with objroat; as, Ob id) fd)on (ob=o>id)) rcenig %cit fyabe, fo TOerbe id) bod) fommen, Although I have little time, still I shall come. § 28. INTERJECTIONS. The Interjections express our thoughts most indistinctly. There- fore they cannot be brought in any connection with the other parts of speech which express our thoughts clearly. They are as various as our feelings. They express : 1. Joy and agreeable surprise; as, of)! ah! fya'.hah! o! oh! f>e ! heh ! ei ! ha ! lo ! 2. Liveliness ; as, fjetfa ! hey-day ! jucfyfyei ! heigh-ho ! 3. Pain, grief, and compassion; as, roefye ! woe ! ad) ! ah ! of) ! oh ! 4. Fear, disgust, and aversion ; as, fyufy ! woe ! ft ! fie ! pfut ! fudge ! 5. Surprise and admiration; as, af)! ay! fyofyo ! pooh! et'.ei! lack-a-day ! 6. Received intelligence and doubt ; as, fycfya ! indeed ! fmi ! f)m ! hum ! INTERJECTIONS. 151 7. Indifference ; as, pa ! pshaw ! 8. Wrong ; as, puf) ! pugh ! 9. Calling for one, or caution ; as, fye ! tyba ! hip ! fyotfa ! fyatfo ! halloo ! \m ! 'ft ! pft ! hush ! Interjections are mostly followed, but not governed (as no inter- jection governs a case), by the nominative ; as, o, bet acme 9ttann ! rarely by the genitive ; as, o, bee ©cftanbe ! for shame ! Other parts of speech are frequently used as interjections ; as, bra*! fort! frifcf, ! auf! t>att ! matfd) ! ©oittob ! @ott fet> 2>anf ! ©titf auf ! @lutf ju ! roofytan ! and others. With regard to the use of interjections, the subjoined are fol- lowed by the nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative, in the singular and plural ; as, Sing. 2lrf> or o, ber Stfyot ! (oh, the foolish man !) o, be$ Xfyoten ! o, bem Stfyoren ! o, ben £f)oren ! o, bu Stfyor ! PL 5td) or o, bie £fyoren ! o, bet Stfyoren ! o, ben £fyoren ! o, bte £f>oren ! o, U)t £f>oten ! SECOND DIVISION. SYNTAX. § 1. THE ARTICLE. A. The Definite Article is used — ■ a. When speaking of a particular kind or part, or of the whole species of materials, and refers to a particular kind, part, or species; as, (£t trntb ben porter, ben (Sjftg unb ba$ 23robt be$af)(en, He will pay for the porter, the vinegar, and the bread. Sr t>at ba$ ©ilbet wttoren aber ba$ @o(b getetfet, He has lost his silver, but saved his gold. £>a$ $Ke|Tina, ift gelb, unb ba$ $euet tfl ein ttetjebvenbeS ©ement, Brass is yellow, and fire is a consuming element. b. When speaking of friends or inferiors, also of notorious charac- ters; as, ©eben ©te bem §riebtic& feinen £ofyn, Give Frederick his wages. £>et gatf war ein £>teb, Falk was a thief. c. When adjectives are employed before names of persons, coun- tries, or towns ; as, £>et Heine 9Bityelm roar unatttg, Little William was naughty. IDic blutjenbe linnet ift auSjebtenb, The blooming Minna is con- sumptive. £>er bembmte ftant n>at ein ^fytfofopfy, The celebrated Kant was a philosopher. £)a$ tetcfye 33raftlien ift fe^t frudjtbar, The rich Brazil is very pro- ductive. %)a$ betwlferte ^aris mitb j?on mefen ©ngtdnbcrn beroofctrt, Populous Paris is inhabited by many Englishmen. d. When names of countries or provinces are used ; as, hie ©cfymetj, tie Xxittei, bie Sombatbet, hie 2e»anfe. THE ARTICLE. 153 c. When the same gender and number is used with nouns signify- ing a relationship ; as, £>et SSatet unb bet ©ofyn ftnb aulgegangen, Father and son are gone out. f. Before abstract ideas ; as, £)a$ menfcblicbe jpetj ift unbutd)bttngttd>, The human heart (i.e. the heart of every human being) is impenetrable. £>ie B^it tft foftbar ; bie £iebe fegnet, Time is precious ; love is blessing. £)ie @efd)id)te unb bie (£tbbefd)teibung ftnb nu^Ucfye S&tfienfdjaften, His- tory and geography are useful sciences. g. Before concrete ideas which refer to a whole species ; as, £>et @>eift ift unftetb(ttf), The spirit is immortal. £>et jpunb bcilt, bet Ocfyfe bruttt, The dog is barking, the ox bellows. h. Before nouns referring to time ; as, bet SBinter, winter; bet jpetbft, autumn; bet 3anuctt, January ; bet $teitemoftattc (bie 23olf$fyeti= fd>aft), democracy. j. It is also used in the following sentences ; as, St mtafjt bie <5tabt, He leaves town. £>te £eute gefyen jut &ttd)e, People go to church. 5Bit gtngen sot bem £fyee au£, We went out before tea. £>et 2It$t tommt nad? bem grufyftutf, The physician is coming after breakfast. And also after many nouns ; as, bet £ob, death ; £>et £ob if? unet= bitttirf), Death is inexorable. B. The Definite Article is not used — a. When speaking of materials, without referring to any particular kind or quality, nor to the whole species ; as, 3<$ effe tiebet Slepfet unb 23itnen, ate $itfd>en, I prefer eating apples and pears to cherries. (£fyte unb 3ftetd)tfyum macfyen oft ntcfrt gtiicmd), Honour and riches often produce no happiness. 154 SYNTAX. b. Before names of persons, countries, nations, or towns ; as, ©chiller n>at gro£ ate £>id)tet, aber @6n)e grower ate ©taatSmann, Schiller was great as a poet, but Goethe greater as a statesman. 9w$lanb ift em gtofjeS SKeicf), Russia is a great empire. (£$ ft'nb allentfyalben $tan&ofen, There are Frenchmen everywhere. Hamburg ift em Hemes bonbon, Hamburgh is a small London. c. The indefinite article is used in German in all cases where it is employed in English, except in the two cases before nouns ex- pressing quality or condition ; as, t gefyanbelt, She has not acted rightly as a sister. ($t ift Slbttocat (©arfwalter) gerootben, He has become a lawyer. § 2. THE CASES. A. THE NOMINATIVE. a. The subject requires the nominative case ; as, £)et Sefytet unb bn $nabe gingen jufammen au$, The master and the boy went out together. b. The nominative is required when several united ideas are ex- pressed before the verb without an article \ as, ©lucf, £fyre unb Dlufym etrcarten bid), Fortune, honour, and praise await thee. ©fjaf^eare, bee gro£e £>id?ter, 1ft ju ©ttatfotb geboten, Shakspeare, the great poet, was born at Stratford. c. The pronoun bit, as a nominative, is frequently omitted in fami- liar language, and particularly with the imperative ; as, £ett)e (bu) mir ba$ 23u$, Lend me the book. ©efyotcbet (u)t) euren ©tetn, Obey your parents. d. The pronoun e$, as the subject before impersonal verbs, is omitted when the passive of intransitive verbs is used impersonally, and before impersonal verbs used reflectively ; as, 3n bem jSimmet rcitb gefungen, or ag 9)ldbtf>en foiej? «XHatf?iIbc, The girl was called Matilda. /. The nominative is required after the passive voice of those verbs which govern two accusatives in the active voice : nennen, fyei^en, to call, to be called; fdnmpfen, to scold, to abuse; taufen, to baptize; as, (£r rcurbe ^riebrid) genannt, unb fyiejj 3<*cob, He was called Frederick, and his name was James. (Sic rourben £ugner gefd)o(ten, They were abused as liars. 9)*eine £od)ter i\t 9)ttnna getauft rcorben, My daughter has been bap- tized Minna. B. THE GENITIVE. a. The genitive either expresses possession, connection, or refers to an action of another ; as, £)a$ Spferb be$ Sremben, The horse of the stranger. £>te SBIumen beg ©drtnetg bhtyen, The flowers of the gardener are flourishing. JDie dimmer tnetneg jpaufeg ftnb gro$, The rooms of my house are large. £>ie Stfydtigfeit beg Wanneg ift bcfannt, The activity of the man is known. The following are true genitives, which must be expressed by the true form of the genitive ; as, beg Stemben ^ferb, the stranger's horse; beg ©drtnerg SMumen, the gardener's flowers ; meineg jpaufeg Bimmet, my house's rooms; beg Cannes £f)dttgfeit, the man's activity. b. The objective genitive does not admit the change of placing the. genitive before the nominative, and is used with nouns formed from transitive verbs ; as, £5et ©enug beg Sebeng, The enjoyment of life. £>et $er(uft ^ ®e\be$, The loss of money. £>er 25eftf| eineg <£belgutg, The possession of a Nobleman's seat. Changing the position of the nominative from before to after the genitive, causes a considerable alteration in the signification of the sentence ; as, 156 SYNTAX. 2)ie 9Bat?t einetf greunbeS, The choice of a friend (t. e. when one chooses a friend). SineS SteunbeS SBafyl, A friend's choice (^. e. the choice which a friend makes). c. When the English of is used with the genitive, to denote measure, contents, or weight, in German the two nouns ex- pressing the substance and the quantity follow, both in the nominative, and consequently without of', as, Sin ©eticbt ©patgeln, A dish of asparagus. (Sin ©tucf Sleifcfc, A peace of meat. Sin @(a$ SBaffct, A glass of water. (Sin «fliafl sjRttcfc, A quart of milk. 93ier Sllen £ud), Four yards of cloth. Sine $lafd>e porter, A bottle of porter. d. When a portion of any substance or measure is referred to, the true genitive, or yon, with the dative, is used ; as, Sin ©ericfct bet or btefer ©yargeln, or Sin ©eticbt yon ben or yon biefen ©yargetn, A dish of the or these asparagus. €in ©tucf be$ or biefeS $(eiftf)e£, or Sin ©tucf yon bem or yon btefem $tetfd)e, A peace of the or this meat. e. In the following examples the prepositions yon and au$, with the dative, are used instead of the genitive. Before names of metals or material of which a thing is com- posed ; as, Sin 3ftn$ yon <3ilbet, or Sin fttberner Sling, A ring of silver. Sine SBeffe yon 95aumtt>otfe, or Sine baumroollene SBejle, A waistcoat of cotton (i. e. made of cotton). Before words expressing measure, weight, value, or contents ; as, Sin ^tunnen yon &ef>n gu$ Stiefe, A well of ten feet depth. Sin #rug yon jn>ei 9fta$ Snfyalt, A pitcher containing two quarts. Sin £aib S3tobt yon brei ^pfunb, A loaf of bread of three pounds weight. Sine ©umme yon jefyn ©utben, A sum of ten gulden (florins). Before proper names of countries, districts, or towns ; as, £)et ^urfurtf yon £efien, The Elector of Hessia. 2ln ben ©renjen yon ^teujjen, On the boundaries of Prussia. THE GENITIVE. 157 2>er $ontg ron Sranfreich, The King of France ; or, £)er #6nig ber granjofen, The king of the French. £>er jpanbel ron Stettin, or (Stetttn'i? jpanbel, The trade of Stettin. Before nouns referring to character, origin, rank, nation, station, country, or place ; as, (Sine Dame ron guten @runbfaf?en, A lady of good principles. Sine ^tinjefftn ron ©ebliit, A princess of the blood in birth. Sin 9)iann ron (Stanbe, A man of station. Sin £>eutfcber ron ©ebutt, A German by birth. Sin ftunjHer ron Berlin, An artist from Berlin. Sin 9ftalet au$ £)eutfd)lanb, A painter from Germany. or, Sin beutfdjet Water, A German painter. Son is always used after the following pronouns, when of is used in English: feinet, manner, berjenige, rceld>er. Reiner ron ifynen fyat e$ a,efaa,t, None of them has said it. 3eber ron unS roitl 3ftecbt fyaben, Each of us will be right. Son is also used after numerals or the superlative ; as, Sine ron ifyten Steunbinnen gfctubte e$, One of her friends be- lieved it. 2)et jefjnte ron ben $nabcn n>at bet fluajie, The tenth of the boys was the most clever. £>et -ftuigjre ron ifynen fcfjnueg, The most clever of them remained silent. In expressing the day of the month, the numeral is used as an adjective, and is not followed by ron; as, £)et erfte Sanuar roar fein £obe$tag, The first of January was his death-day. Nouns derived from intransitive verbs which are governed by a preposition must be used with the same preposition which the verb governs ; as, Sr bacbte an fcinen Sreunb, He thought of his friend. Example. £er ©ebanfe an bte Snri^cit ijr rctdjtig, The thought of eternity is important. Other nouns derived from intransitive verbs require the following prepositions, an, nad), fur, ror, auf ; as, 2)et Mangel an @elb, The want of money. £>a£ ©treben nacb 3u*icbtf)um, The pursuit of riches. 158 SYNTAX. £>te ©orge fur ^tnber, The care of cliildren. JDte $urd>t ttor ©trafie, The fear of punishment. £)a$ QSerrrauen auf &ott, The reliance on God. f. In English the connection or interest of persons is always ex- pressed by the dative, but in German by the genitive ; as, Unfere je^igc $6nigtnn tjt eine Gutter be$ ?8olH, Our present Queen is a mother to the people. g. The following adjectives referring to substantives govern the genitive, as, beburftig, befTiffen, benotfngr, beroufjt, eingebenf, fdfytg, and many others already mentioned among those which govern the genitive in the Etymology. Examples. <5r roat bet Untetftui?ung bebutfttg, He was in want of assistance. <£t \)aften befTiffen, He has studied the sciences, ©ie n>at be$ SSetflanbeS benotfjigt, She was in need of the assistance. (£t roar ft'cf) be$ ^SerbredjenS beroufjt, He was conscious of the crime. €t tjr feiner Seller etngebenf , He is mindful of his faults. St ift be$ 2Imte*> fdfyig, or (£r ift fdfyig fur bag 2Imf, He is competent for the office. h. The following verbs require the genitive. The following transitive verbs govern the genitive of the thing and the accusative of the person ; as, anflagen, to accuse of; be= rauben, to rob of; beftf>u(btgen, to accuse of; entbmben, to release from; entlaflen, to dismiss; entlebtgen, to deliver from; entfe^en, to discharge ; entroofynen, to render unaccustomed, to wean ; ubetfufyren, to convict; uberfyeben, to save; uberjeugen, to convince; rourbtgen, to favour one with; mftd)ern, to assure one of (etnen t?erftern, to assure one's life); jetfyen, (used in the Bible), to accuse of; belefyren, to give hints; serroeifen, (bet <5tabt or be$ SanbeS) to banish from. Examples. 9ftan ffagte mtd> be$ Forbes an, They accused me of murder. ©te beraubten mi$ beS ©elbeS, They robbed me of the money. <£r tjr be$ £>iebjtar)l$ befct)ulbigt roorben, He has been accused of the theft, ©ie ftnb tt)rer ^ffic^ten ate 3fUd)ter entbunben roorben, They have been released from their duties as judges. THE GENITIVE. 159 The above examples will shew the use of the verbs. i. Neuter verbs govern both the genitive of the person and the tiling; as, beacbten, achtcn, to care for, to attend to; bebiitfen, to be in need of; gebraudjen, to be in use of; gebenfen, to re- member ; entbefyren, to miss ; erroarten, to expect ; ermanadn, to be without ; fcbonen, to spare. Examjyles. 3cb ad)te fetner unb fciner SBorte nid)t, I do not care for him and his words. (£r bcbarf 3fy«r unb 3fyte$ ©elbeS, He is in need of you and of your money. Some of them also govern the accusative ; as, <£t beafytete ba$ ftinb, He noticed the child. j. The following govern either the genitive of the person or of the thing ; as, leben, to live ; fterben, to die ; perb(eicf;en (beS £obeS), to expire ; pftegcn, to nurse one ; fetneS 2lmteS marten, to fulfil one's duty; 3emanbe£ fdjonen, to spare one; ladjen, to laugh at; fpotten, to mock. Examples. 3Btr We leben ber jpoffhuno,, All of us live in hope. (3te roirb eine£ fanften StobeS frcrben, She will die peaceably. (£r t>erbtid> beS XobeS, He expired (died). 3cb pfle^te feiner, I had care of him. 3cf> pflea,te tfyrer @cfunbf?ett, I took care of her health. (£r fd)onte be$ Cannes, He spared the man. ®te roarten ifjre^ SImteS, They perform their duty. <5ie tad)te ber £fyorf)etten ber SBelt, or ©te lad)te liber bte Xfyorfyeiten bet 'Belt, She laughed at the folly of the world. (£r fpottete beS ©tummen, or (£r fpottete liber ben ©tummen, He mocked the dumb person. (£t fpottete bet 'Belt, or <£t fpottete liber bie Belt, He defied the world. k. Most reflective verbs (or used as such) have the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing after them ; as, ficb annefymen, to take one's part ; fid) bebiencn, to make use of; ft# begeben, to resign ; fid) bemddjtigen, to take possession of; ftd) befleiftgen, to apply to; fief) befebetben, to be contented with; 160 SYNTAX. ficfy befinnen, to recollect; ft$ ciner <&a s 28etnen$ entfyatten, to forbear weeping ; fid) entfinnen, to recollect; ft'cf) erbarmen, to pity; fid) erinnetn, to remember ; {id) etroefyren, to defend one's self; fi$ fveuen or erfreuen, to rejoice; ftd> geitoflen, to console one's self; fid) rufymen, to boast of; fid> fdvamen, to be ashamed of; ftc^> untet= fartgen, untetftefyen, untetnxnben, wvmefien, to dare, venture ; fid? etneS 23e|Tetn ? on (Sinem tterfeben, to expect better things of one. (Sid) beftagen, to complain of; fid> wtmunbern, to wonder at ; fi$ freuen, to rejoice, are governed by ubcr, in preference to the genitive. The genitive is more used in poetry, and the prepositions in prose. Examples, <5r befcmn fid) eine$ SBcffern, He thought better of it. (£t entdugette fid) be$ $etbred)en£, He abstained from vice. 2Bic cntf?icltcn un$ be$ SBetnenS, We forbore weeping. (£rbarme bid) bet Unglucflicben, Pity the unfortunate. <&t entfann fid) meineS gteunbeS, He remembered a friend of mine. (£tinnette et ficb metnet SBortc ? Did he recollect my words ? <£ntn>ei)rtuber$ ntc&t, He is not ashamed of his poor brother. SBir uberrcinben un$ dicier ©efafcren, We venture many dangers. I. The genitive is also used when time, place, or manner is ex- pressed, except when the noun is feminine, in which case the nominative is used; as, ©tunbe, hour; 3Bod)e, week. Examples. £)e$ SftorgenS, in the morning ; be$ SSormittctgS, in the forenoon ; bet £ageS in the day (which differs from bin or am Stage, every day, or the whole day) ; bet Stbenbtf, in the evening (which differs from am 2tbenb, every evening) ; bet ^acbtS, at night ; ©onntagS, ?0tontaa,$, or bet ©onntagS, bet sjttontagS, on Sundays, on Mondays; (?tnma( bet 3al;re$, bet -JftonatS, once a year, once a month; QSiermat bie 5Bod)e, four times a week (which differs from €tnmal tm Safyre, im sjjionat, in bet 2Bod)e, once every year, every month, every week) ; $n>ei ganje ©tunben instead of jrcet gan&et ©tunben, two hours; alter Dtten or an atfen Dtten, every- where. THE DATIVE. 161 m. Adjectives, when used as adverbs, require the genitive ; as, folgenbct ©eftatt, fotgenbet gejlalt, fofgenber mafjen, as follows, in the following manner ; gerabetf SScgeS, straight on ; meinetf SBiffen*, to my knowledge. And also nouns with the verb fenn ; as, 3Bil(cn$ fe«n, to intend ; bet ^einung fenn, to be of opinion. Also with fasten, gefyen, fommen, reiten, which verbs are always fol- lowed by be$ 2Bege$ ; as, (£t tarn be£ SBegeS, He came that way. C THE DATIVE. The dative case is employed when a reference is required to a person or thing, denoting either an action or a continuous state ; w T hen shewing the advantage or disadvantage, the delight or dis- grace of a person, or in forming abstract ideas ; as, €r ttetfaufte feinem ^a#at ben ©atten fefyt bitUg, He sold the garden very cheap to his neighbour. £)te jpoffnung blufyt ben airmen, n>ie ben 3fteid)en, Hope flourishes for the poor and the rich. £)et 9locf ift mit $u gto£, unb bte jpofen ftnb mic ju flein, The coat is too large for me, and the trowsers are too short for me. @ute ^inbet tnctcben ifyten (£(tetn gto£e $teube, Good children give great joy to their parents. £>te @runbfa£e bee Sefuiten frfjaben jungen Seuten, The principles of the Jesuits are injurious to young men. (St ging ju feinem greunbe, He went to his friend. The preposition $u with the dative is only used to denote motion from one person to another, as the last sentence will exemplify. When the dative is used with the following adjectives, the auxi- liary verb fejjn, to be, is generally used in forming a sentence ; as, abgeneigr, disinclined, unkind; abfyolb, disaffected; abttiinnig, dis- loyal; ctynlirf), similar, like; angeboten, hereditary; angefyottg, be- longing to, &c. All the other adjectives will be found in the Etymology in alphabetical order, adjectives with the dative. The following examples will shew the nature of all the adjectives mentioned; as, (£t rcctt mit abgeneigt, He was unkind to me. ©ie ijt tfym abfyotb, She is disaffected to him. 2)te ©tenet routben u)tem £>ettn abttunnig, The valets became faithless to their master. 162 SYNTAX. £)er 33ruber war fetner ©dbroeftet dt>nticb, The brother was like his sister. £>er ©tots ift bem 9#anne angeboren, Pride is hereditary in that man. %)a$ ©d>to£ war bem £orb W. angefybrtg, The castle belonged to Lord N. ©em @efcf)dft ijl tf>m angelegen, He is devoted to his business. £)te Smtwort war bet ©a$e angemeffen, The answer was adapted to the affair. $3irb Sftnen mein 23efucb angenefym fet>n ? Will my visit be agreeable to you ? Sffierben ifym Me anfydngUcfy fet)n ? Will all of them become attached to him ? ©em 23etragen war $telen anftofng, His behaviour was objectionable to many. 38a$ er fagte, war ifjm felbft drgerlid), What he said was vexatious to himself. ie Slrjnet wirb 3f)nen btenlicb fejjn, That medicine will be wholesome to you. ^necfyte ftnb ifyren jjerren bienftbar, Servants are subject to their masters. £>a$ war tfym immer eigen, That was always peculiar to him. £>te SBiefe gefybrt ifym eigen tf)umltd>, That meadow is his own property. JDie ^ferbe ftnb mir or fur mid) etntrdglttf), Those horses are profitable to me. £)te Untertfyanen waren tfyrer $omginn ergeben, The subjects were devoted to their queen. £)er 9ftann war bem Strunf ergeben, The man was given to drinking. <£$ wirb 3fynen erinnerlid) fetjn, You will remember it. 2Bar e$ 3fynen erwunfd)t ? Was it desirable to you ? ©tnb 3fynen bte $inber gefyorfam gewefen ? Have the children been obe- dient to you ? 2)a$ Sefen tft tf)m getduftg, He reads fluently. ©te famen mir fef>r gelegen, They came very opportunely. 3ft e$ fetnen Sunfcben gemdj? ? Is it according to his wishes ? ©ie werben un$ genetgt fetjn, They will be kind to us. THK DATIVE. 163 2>ie$eamtcn waxen bcm £et*og gctreu, The officers were faithful to the duke. St roctt feinen ©egnetn geroctdtfcn, He was equal in strength to his adversaries. £>et ffonig ijt feinen gjttmffetn geroogen,The king is condescending to his ministers. <£$ routbe it>m cjanj gleicfcguttig, It became quite indifferent to him. £>ie ©rdfinn roctt bet Samitie gndbtg, The countess was condescending (gracious) to that family. 5Det SBinb war ifynen gunfttg, The wind was favourable to them. !Da$ SDaben ifi nut fceUfam, Bathing is wholesome for me. ©eine ftranfyett n?at tym f)inbet(id), His illness was troublesome to him. ©ie tft tym fjolb, She is affectionate to him. ©ein 35efud) roat mit Idftig, His visit was troublesome to me. (5$ ift mit licb, bct£ ©ie fommen, I am glad that you are coming. £>ie 3atyre$$eit roitb tynen nacbtfyetug fe»n, The time of the year will be disadvantageous to them. St ijl mit nctfye genug, urn mid) ju fefyen, He is near enough to me to see me. ©er Sranjofe max if>m fd)dt?bat, The Frenchman was valuable to him. £)et £ob feineS 93cttet$ roitb ifym f$met$ctft fe»n, The death of his cousin will be painful to him. (it roitb if)t tteu bteiben, He will remain true to her. Sic roaten mit unauSftefyltd), They were disgusting to me. $omme id) 3f)nen unetroattet ? Do I come to you unexpectedly ? JDciS ©erotttet roitb mit unttetgef3lid) feyn, I shall never forget that thun- derstorm, ©cine 2lnfunft tarn mit um?etfyotft, His arrival was unexpected (to me). (St foU mit ttetantroottltcb roetben, He must become responsible to me. 3d) bin 3fynen fefyt Mtbunben, I am much obliged to you. £>ie @efcl((d)aft wax tf>m mfyafct, The company was odious to him. ©cine JBotte ftnb bit pctftdnbUcfy, His words are clear to you. £)u roitjl ifym immet tfyeuet fetin, Thou wilt be always dear to him. ©cine sptafyletei ijl ifyt rotbetlid), His boasting is disgusting to her. (£$ ift ifym roofyt, bafc et tobt ift, It is well for him that he is dead. £>aS (£ffen roitb 3fyten juttdgttd) fenn, The dinner will be wholesome for you. The adjectives, when followed by a noun, must be always pre- ceded by a dative ; as, %)a$ meincm Ofyeim cmgefycrige £au$ routbe fetyt tfjeuer eerfauft, The house belonging to my uncle was sold for a great price. m2 164 SYNTAX. £>er feinen Untergebenen geroogene 9)Unttf er n>irb attentfyalben gead>tet, That minister who is condescending to his inferiors is esteemed everywhere. The following transitive verbs govern the dative of the person and the accusative of the thing; as, abfcblagen, to refuse; abtreten, to give up to; anbteten, to offer to; anfyeimftellen, to defer to; auftragen, to confer upon; befefyten, to command; betfatlen, to occur; beroeifen, to prove to; bejafylen, to pay; borgen, to lend to; entgegnen, to reply to ; erfe$en, to restore to ; erjctylen, to relate to ; geben, to give to ; gefyord>en, to obey; geloben, to vow to; geftatten, to grant to; gcftcfjcn, to confess ; glauben, to believe ; gonnen, not to grudge ; flagen, to complain to ; letfyen, to lend to ; melben, to announce to ; mtttfyetlen, to communicate to ; nefymen, to take (to deprive of) ; offenbaren, to reveal to; op fern, to sacrifice to; vorpfeifcn, to whistle to; fagen, to say to; fd>retben, to write to; ubergeben, to give over to; uberlafien, to give over to ; serbergen, to conceal from ; serbanfen, to thank for ; tterefyren, to present to ; r-ergeben, to forgive ; pergeffen, to forget ; »er= gonnen, to grant to; cergitten, to recover; J?erfyet£en, to promise; set* funbtgen, to announce to ; ttermacfyen, to bequeath ; t>erfcbreiben, to prescribe ; perfpredben, to promise ; sertrauen, to confide (in, to) ; t?et- roilligen, to grant ; roafyrfagen, to prophecy, to foretell ; rottlfafyren, to comply with ; jeigen, to show. Examples. <£r fcbtug e$ mic ab, He refused it to me. 3* roerbe tt)m metne ©telle abtreten, I shall resign my place to him. €r hot mit feine dimmer imentgeltlicfy an, He offered me his rooms gratuitously. ©te rotll mir bte liHedmung nic^t bejafylen, She will not pay me the account. ©te entgegneten unS folgenbe SBorte, They replied to us in the following words. 3d) fyabe tfjm eine @efcbid>te erjctytt, I have related a story to him. (£r gab mir ba$ @etb, He gave me the money. ©te gefyorcfyten mit eine lange %eit, They obeyed me for a long time. ©te gelobten mir £reue, They promised to be faithful to me. (£r geftattete mir mein ©efud), He granted my petition. 3$ geftanb u)nen mein ^Berbrecben, I confessed my crime to them. (5r opferte feiner ^flicfyt fein £eben, He sacrificed his life for his duties. €r pftff mir einen 5Karfd) t>or, He whistled a march to me. $Men ©te mir bte 2Baf>rt)eit fagen? Will you tell me the truth? THE DATIVE. 165 <£r wrbanft 3(wen fetn @(iicf, He may thank you for his fortune. SBotfen <5ie mir ben Scaler wrgeben ? Will you forgive me that fault ? 3cb rcerbe tfym bie SRetfefoften wrguten, I shall repay him his travelling expenses. (£r jeigte mir feine ©$d§e, He shewed me his treasures. The following intransitive verbs govern the dative ; as, abfyelfen, to attend; ctngefyoren, to belong; aufroarten, to wait upon ; cuiffylfen, to assist; auSroeidien, to avoid ; begegnen, to meet; beirommen, to get at; betpfticbtcn, to agree with; betftefjcn, to assist; betroofynen, to be present; banfen, to thank; btenen, to serve ; entfuefyen, to escape ; ent= fagen, to renounce ; enrfpredjen, to correspond to ; erfrf>etnen, to ap- pear; gefyorcben, to be obedient; gletcben, to resemble; @(ucf rounfcben, to congratulate ; fyelfen, to help ; fyulbtgen, to do homage ; fyolen, to fetch; nad>af>men, to imitate; pocfym (bat iperj), to beat; ratten, to advise; fterben, to die ; trauen, to trust; unrerltegen, to yield; pot- bauen, to prevent; n>etd)en, to make room for; ttnberfprecben, to con- tradict ; unftfafyren, to comply with. Examples. (£r fyalf mir fogtet<$ ab, He attended to me immediately. £>a$ s £ud) gefyort mir an, That book belongs to me. 9Kel?rere 23ebtenten roarteten mit auf, Several servants waited upon me. 28er rottb ifynen auffyetfen ? Who will assist them ? 9Bir n>id>en tfyr au$, We avoided her. 3d) begegnete etnem metner SanbSteute, I met one of my countrymen. (£t fonnte mit nid)t betfmrtmen, He was not able to get at me. 3<±> roerbe bit beipfTicfjten, I shall agree with thee. SBerben ®ie ben Jiputflofen beifrefyen ? Will you assist the helpless ? Me roofynten bem $efte bet, All were present at the feast. £)anh ber Same fur bat @elb, Thank the lady for the money. £r biente fetnem Jpertn treuhd), He served his master faithfully. ie ©olbaten fmtbtgten ifyrem $6ntg, The soldiers did homage to their king. (£r unterlctg feinen $etnben, He yielded to his enemies. SSiberfprtd) beinen SBorten nid)t, Do not contradict your words. The following reflective verbs require also the dative; as, ftd> anmapen, to claim, to assume; ft'rf) berougt fetm, to recollect; ftd> er* 168 SYNTAX. geben, to surrender; fid) getrauen, to dare; fid) perfdjaffen, to procure; ft'd) wrurfacben, to cause; fid) rotberfei^en, to resist; jtd) roibcrfpredjen, to contradict one's self. Examples. Wafjen ©te ftcfc s 3tt$t$ an, n>«$ 2tnbern gefyorf, Do not claim any thing that belongs to others. ?0tajjen ©ie ftc^> nid)t an, roa$ ©ie nid)t finb, Do not assume to be what you are not. (£r roar fid) be$ ^orfattS berou£t, He remembered the circumstance. Sit ergaben un$ ben 3ldubern, We surrendered to the robbers. 2Bir getrauen un$ btefeS nid)t, We dare not do it. Also, ©ie getraute fid) nid)t bafyin, She dared not go there. (£r eerfebaffte ficb fetbft SebentSmtttef, He obtained provisions for himself. ©ie roerben fid) ©corner jen t>erurfad)en, You will cause pain to yourself. (£r roiberfe^te ficfy feinen $orgefe£ten, He offered resistance to his superiors. ©te roiberfprad) \id) oft, She contradicted herself often. The following reflective verbs are followed by the dative ; as, Co afyn(e)t mir, mir af)n(e)t, I fancy ; e$ ftel;t mir an, it is agreeable to me; e$ befyagt mir, I like it; eS bettebt mir, it pleases me; eS fdflt mir bet, it occurs to me ; eg befommt mir, it agrees with me ; e£ bducbt mir or mtcfc, it strikes me ; e$ feud)tet mir ein, it is clear to me; eS fdtlt mir ctn, I recollect ; e£ cfclt mir, or mir efelt, I am disgusted with it ; e$ entfdtft mir, it escapes my memory ; e$ gefdttt mir, it pleases me; eS grau(e)t mir, or mir grau(e)t, it frightens me; e$ mangelt mir, I am in want of; e$ liegt mir ob, it is my duty ; e3 fdjaubert mir, or eS febaubert mir bie jpaut, I shudder ; e$ fdjroinbelt mir, I am giddy ; e$ ftyeint mir, it appears to me ; eS trdumt mir,' or mir trdumt, I am dreaming; e$ ttjut mir letb, I am sorry for it; e$ f ommt mir j?or, it seems to me ; eS t>erfd>ldgt mir 'iftidjtS, it does not matter; es? rodJTert mir ber 9ftunb (vulg.), it makes my mouth water; e$ rotberfdfjrt mir, it befalls me ; e£ jicmt mir, it is becoming to me ; e$ lommt mir $u, it is my duty. The following examples are purely idiomatic, and are used with the dative and accusative ; as, (Ace.) £>er ©efanbfe f!ef)t fit£ gut, The ambassador has a good income. THE DATIVE. 167 (Dat.) £r ftefyt ficb felbft im 2id>te, He acts to his own disadvantage, (He stands in his own light). (Ace.) £)te Woti) gef)t an (ben) 9)?ann, It comes to the worst. (Dat.) £)er #opf tfnit mir roef), I have headache. The dative of the personal pronoun mir, to me, is often used in German when it is omitted in English ; as, SReben ©ie mir nid)t$ mefyr baron, Do not speak any more of it. 2acf>en <2ie mir ntd>t mef>r, Do not laugh any more. D. THE ACCUSATIVE. The accusative is governed by active and transiti ve verbs which refer either to persons or things. Examples. 2)er 23ater beftrafte feinen ©ofyn, The father punished his son. £)er aSacfec bacft SSrobt, The baker bakes bread. 3d) bebaure feme UmjUnbe, I pity his circumstances. £>te $a£e fdncjt 9ftdufe, The cat catches mice. The following transitive verbs govern the accusative of the per- son or place with or without a preposition. Examples, (£r banb mid) an ben £tfd) (an), He tied me to the table. 3d) rourbe oon u)m an ben Stifcfc gebunben, I was tied by him to the table. (Sr fufyrte mid) in bte ©efettfebaft ein, He introduced me into the company. 3d) rourbe eon tbm in bte @efeUfd)aft etngefufjrt, I was introduced by him into the company. The following verbs, fufyren, to lead; geroitynen, to accustom; fd)tao,en, to strike; answer the questions, roobtn ? whereto? rooran? to what? roofyin? where? The following transitive verbs require the accusative of the per- son without, and the dative of the place with a preposition. Examples. (£r rebete mid) auf bet ©trafje an, He addressed me in the street. 3d) rourbe t?on ifym auf ber ©trafje angerebet, I was addressed by him in the street. 168 SYNTAX. (£r fyintercuna, mid) tn meinem @efd)dft, He deceived me in my business. 3d) rourbe t>on ifym in meinem @cfd)dft f)intera,en, to laugh; fcfyretben, to write ; fefyen, to look ; rufen, to cry, call ; fluftern, to whisper. Examples. (£t lacfyte mir in'g (in ba$) ©eftcbf, He laughed in my face. (£r fd>reibt mir auf ben 5lrm, He writes upon my arm. (£r fat) mir in ben 9)?unb fyinein, He looked into my mouth. (Er rief mir tn'g Ofyr, He called into my ear. The accusative of the personal pronouns generally follows re- flective verbs (those requiring the dative have been already mentioned) ; as, id) drgere mid), I am angry ; id) betriibe mid), I am grieved ; id) t>erfef>e mid), I am mistaken ; id) entfd)lte£e mid), I am determined ; id) janfe mid), I quarrel. The accusative is used after the following impersonal verbs ; as, eg befrembet mid), it is strange to me ; eg betrtfft mid), it regards me ; eg betriibt mid), or id) betriibe mid), I am grieved ; eg bctuertmicf), I am sorry for it; eg bunft mid), I fancy; eg freut mic|, or id) freue mid), I am glad; eg f)ima,ert micb, or mid) fyungert, I am hungry ; eg jammert mid>, I am grieved; eg Idcfrert mid), I am amused; eg reu(e)t mid), I regret ; eg fdjaubert mid), I shudder ; eg tterbriefit mid), I am vexed ; eg nMinbert mid), or id) rounbre mid), I am astonished. Verbs which govern two accusatives ; as, fufyren, to direct, (to guide) ; lefjren, to teach ; leiten, to lead ; nennen, or fyei^en, to call ; peitfdjen, to whip ; fdjeften, or fdjimpfen, to abuse ; taufen, to baptize. Examples. (Er fu^rte b9 aft or frf>impftc if?n etnen Sta^cbteb, She abused him as an idler. £>et graufame ^ann peitfd)te fcincn 9$ebienfcn jeben Stag, The cruel man whipped his servant-man every day. 2>er n>er, heavy ; tief, deep ; tetcf), rich ; alt, old ; rocrtt), worth. Examples. £>ie ©ofjlen ftnb eincn $3ofl btcf, The soles are an inch in thickness. IDu btft eincn Sup grower ate icfa, Thou art one foot taller than I. £)et 2Beg roar eine 9flei(e lang, The road was one mile in length. £>ie jpammetefeute roar fecf)^ ^pfunb fcbroer, The joint of mutton was six pound in weight. £)er ©rf>nee tft fe<$$ 5«P ticf, The snow is six feet in depth. 2)et $aufmann roat eine fyatbe Million ^funb ©terting retd), The mer- chant had a fortune of half a million sterling. £)a$ £inb ijt btet 3aben, We shall have company this evening. 3d) roar einen ganjen 2Ronat auf bem Sanbe, I was in the country for a whole month. (£t befud)t feme Sreunbe £tnmat bie 5Borf)e, He visits his friends once a week. The accusative is more frequently governed in poetry than in prose by the present or past participle. Examples. Seine 2Mttfe gen ipimmel ttcfytenb, tebete er fofgenbe 3Borte, With his looks directed towards heaven, he spoke the following words. or, Snbem et feine 2Mttfe gen jpimmel rid)tete, rebete et folgenbe 2Gorte, Having directed his looks towards heaven, he spoke the fol- lowing words. 170 SYNTAX. (Seine S&unben forgfctftig ttetbunben, elite et in bat S^ant bet $3unbatjte3, His wounds being carefully dressed, he hurried into the house of the surgeon. or, 9?atf>bem (ba, alt) er feme Sunben mit ©otgfalt setbunben fyatte, eilte er in bat §aut bet 3Bunbatjte$, After having dressed his wounds with care, he hurried into the house of the surgeon. The first and third sentences shew that both participles are used as adverbs, being placed at the end, and the second and fourth re- quire the conjunctions inbem, whilst, or natf)bem, ba, alt, after or when, with their respective tenses, i. e. the imperfect and pluperfect. § 3. THE USE OF THE VERB. NUMBERS AND PERSONS. The verb agrees with its object or subject in number and person. Examples. 3$ fud;e meinen Spmb, I am looking for my dog. 3£it ftnb jTeifHg, We are industrious. £)te 336gel ftngen, The birds are singing. 2)u, thou, is used in familiar language, and in speaking to chil- dren or to inferiors ; as, 2>u &ctjl Retit, Thou art right. @teb mit ben 23aK, Give me the ball. jpole mtr ben 3Betn, Fetch me the wine. ©te, you, is used in speaking to a friend advanced in age, or to a stranger, also to a parent ; as, $tebet Ofyetm, roetben eit, jSufriebenfjett unb 9?etd)tf)um finb bte gropfen ^oruuje be£ 2eben£, Health, peace of mind, and wealth, are the greatest ad- vantages of life. When a verb refers to several subjects of different persons, it is used in the plural ; as, £)er QSater, bte Gutter unb baS $tnb ft'nb ertrunfen, The father, the mother, and the child, have been drowned. The singular is employed after a negation ; as, tfhcht bcr Water, fonbern bat $tnb fyat e$ gefagt, It was not the father, but the child who said it. In speaking to a person of high rank or title, the plural of the verb is used ; as, (£ro.) Sure 9ftajeftdt fyaben befofyten, Your Majesty has commanded. (Sro.) Sure SrceHenj roerben entfcbulbtgen, Your Excellency will excuse. In speaking of persons of high rank, the singular of the verb is used ; as, (@r.) <2einer 9)?ajetfar, ber $cmig, ift au%?fafyren, His Majesty, the King, is gone out in a carriage. In writing to persons of distinction, the verb is used in the plural ; as, 3f?re f6nicjfid)e fyob/it fyaben befotrten, Your Royal Highness has com- manded. 3f>re 9flaje[tdr, bte ftenicunn, fyaben befd)toffcn, Your Majesty, the Queen, has decided. The personal pronoun bu, thou, if>r, ye, can only be omitted in the second person singular and plural of the imperative ; as, £aufe (bu) unb fomm (bu) balb utriitf, Run and come back soon. Abetter (ifcr) unb nacbfjer rufyet aue, Work, and rest afterwards. When the same personal pronoun or noun is referred to by two verbs in the same sentence, it is omitted in the second part of the sentence, except when a conjunction which removes the verb 172 SYNTAX. to the end of the sentence is used, in which case it is ex- pressed, as, 3$ sefye K£t <* U S> abet f omme fyeute ntdrt junicf, I am now going out, but shall not come back to-day. SSenn id> arbette, (fo) mup td> allein fepn, When I am engaged I must be by myself. TENSES. The use of the present tense in German differs from that in English. There is only one way of expressing the same idea in German, and there are three forms in English ; as, 3$ tebe, I live, I am living, I do live. (£t faufte, He bought, He was buying, He did buy. ©ptette et gut ? Played he well ? Was he playing well ? Did he play well? The present tense is used in preference to the imperfect in narra- tion; as, 3$ mlafie mein JpauS, unb afe id) burd) bte ©tta#e gefye, fefye id) etn gto$e$ geuer, I left the house, and when I went through the street I saw a great fire. When an adverb of time is used to express certainty, the present is always used instead of the future ; as, £eute gefye id) aug, unb bringe 3fynen Me 23iid)er mit, I shall go out to- day and bring the books for you. 2Bit fyolen ba$ @elb, unb bejctf>len btc Seute, We shall fetch the money and pay the people. When an adverb referring to the present time is used, or when one sentence refers to a former one, the present is used instead of the perfect ; as, SBir fagen e$ 3fynen t>otfy>t, ba$ 3^re Untetnefjmung nid&t gettngen roirb, We have told you before that you will not succeed in your undertakings. The imperfect tense is employed in the following manner : When it refers to an action which has recently occurred, which is the same case in any other language ; as, ©o eben n>ac bzt ^oftbote fytet, unb bracfyte mir einen 23tief, The postman was here just now and brought me a letter. THE VERB — TENSES. 173 21fg id) cunning, begegnete mir cm alter 95efannter, When I went out an old acquaintance of mine met me. It is called historical tense when referring; to historical events, when a narrative has been begun and continues to be related ; as, $art ber ©rope beftrberte bie 3BiJTenfd)aften, bilbete bit ©dutlen, unb wr= breitete bat £f?riftenu?um, Charles the Great promoted the sciences, improved the schools, and propagated Christianity. If any thing happens in the presence of a person ; as, 3* fat? ein armeS $inb bluten, naf>erre mid) if?m, unb bracftfe e$ &um 58unb= arjt, n?eld)er feine SBunbe balb fyeilte, I saw a poor child bleeding, I approached it, and took it to the surgeon, who soon healed its wound. The perfect is employed — When an action has come to its conclusion, and a certain time has elapsed; as, Die Diebe finb gefangen unb beg £anbe£ r-errotefen roorben, The thieves have been caught, and have been transported. 2Bir finb brei 2Bod?en in £)eutfd)(anb geroefen unb fyaben tnele ©tabte befucbt, We have been in Germany for three weeks, and have visited many towns. When persons or things no longer exist, in which case the im- perfect is employed in English, instead of the perfect in German ; as, 9ftetn Ofyetm ijt ju 9)*abrtb gefforben, My uncle died at Madrid. When the pluperfect is used in English ; as, <£r fjat Sreunbe gebabt, He had had friends. <2ie fjaben 5Kuf)e getjabt, They had had rest. When an action or state alone is mentioned, in English the per- fect is expressed by " I have ;" as, 3d? fyabe in bem Spau\e geroofynt, I have lived in that house. But when time is also mentioned, the expression is different ; as, " I have been ;" as, 3d) i>abe met 3afyre in bem jpaufe geroofynt, I have been living in that house for four years. The pluperfect is used — When it refers to an action which has taken place a long time ago; as, 174 SYNTAX. 2fleranbet, bee @ro$e, fyarre befd)loffen, hie ganje SBctt ju erobern, nad)bem er in alien feinen Unternefymungen fo gtucfltcb geroefen roar, Alexander the Great had determined to conquer the whole world, because he had been so successful in all his undertakings. The first and second future correspond entirely to the English, except when, in English, the word " going," followed by the infini- tive, or the phrase " to have done," followed by the present parti- ciple, is used : in the former case of which the phrase, 3d) bin im 23es griff (I am going), followed by an infinitive, and in the latter case the phrase, 3$ bin ferrig (I have done), is used in German. Examples. 3$ roerbe, or id) bin im 25egriff, ein @la$ SBein su trinfen, I am going to drink a glass of wine. 3cb roollte, or id) roar im SSegriff, tym 2lKe$ ju fagen, aU er micb unterbrad), I was going to tell him every thing when he interrupted me. ©ie ft'nb mit ber 2trbeit ferttg, They have done working. ©ie roar mit bem ffialen ferttg, She had done painting. MOODS. The indicative mood is employed — If one speaks with an undoubted certainty, either positively or negatively; as, £>ie $naben ftieten, abet ft'e ft'nb nicbt artig, The bd^s are playing, but they are not well behaved. (Stner bee Septet* fyat ft'e beobac^tet, One of the masters has observed them. (£r roirb ft'e nacbfyer befrrafen, He will punish them afterwards. When the imperative is employed in English 3 as, £>u gefjft nid>t auS, fonbern arbeiteft, Do not go out, but work. 2)u foil ft ntc^t ftreiten, fonbern rul)tg fenn, Do not fight, but be peaceable. The subjunctive expresses a possibility, condition, or doubt, also a wish or disgust. It is employed — After verbs or conjunctions which signify an uncertainty of suc- cess, or a condition. After the conjunctions bafj, bamit, roenn, roenn bod>, ate roenn, ob, obgletd), falls (im Sail), &c. ; and after verbs signi- fying request, wish, intention, hope, apprehension, condition, faith, or appearance. MOODS — THE SUBJUNCT1\ 175 Examples. $3ir roerben itm bitten, ba$ er ju un$ fommc, We shall ask him to come to us. 3cb anmfcbte, ba$ er ju ipaufe rodre, I wished that he might be at home. (*r fagte ctj mir in ber ^Ibftcbt, bafc id) eS roeiter libertegen mbge, He told me of it, with a view to my taking it into further consideration. 34) t>offe, ba$ er fich pertfyeibigen roerbe, I hope that he will defend himself. (£r fling autf SSeforgnifj, bap er.ju fpdt fame, He went, for fear that he should come too late. <3ie tfyaten c$ unter ber s £ebingung, ba$ tnan fte gut bejafyle, They did it on condition that they should pay them well. 3$ glaubte, bay ct e$ gctfyan babe, I believed that he had done it. <£$ fcf)eint inir, ati roenn ec tafenb mire, It appears to me as if he were mad. When speaking positively or negatively of ourselves or of others ; as, (£r erfldrte, er fyabe mir hie SBafyrfyeit gefagt, or ba$ er mir bk 3Baf>rf)ctt gefagt t^abe, He declared that he had told me the truth. £>te 3ucf>ter tterfiigten, er folfe fterben, or £)ie 9ucbter tferfugten, bafj er fterben folic, The judges decided that he should die. (£r glaubte nicbr, ba$ er Unrerfjt fyabe, He did not believe that he was wrong. When asserting or denying a thing absolutely, or when the pre- sent indicative precedes the conjunction, ba$ requires the indicative mood; as, (£r tterftcbert, ba$ er $ett fyat, or er fyat %eit, He declares that he has time, or he has time. (£r fagt, bafj er nicbt f cm men roill, He says that he will not come, or, (£r fagt, er roill ntd)t rommen, He says he will not come. When an imperfect, followed by the conjunction ba$ with any of the auxiliary verbs of tense or mood, is used, the present subjunctive is required, while the imperfect indicative would be used in English. Examples. £r bellagte ftd), ba$ er feine Arbeit liabe, He complained that he had no work. St bebauerte, ba$ er nicfyt reid) fei), He was sorry that he was not rich. (£r rotinfcbte, bap e$ Sftad)t roerbe, He wished it were night. 176 SYNTAX. (£r fyoffte, bafj er balb jurttcffefjren moge, He hoped that he might re- turn soon. The present subjunctive is employed when a proposition has been made, the result of which is uncertain; but after indirect questions implying certainty, the indicative is used. Examples. 3d) fragte bie £>ame, rote ml fte fur bie 2Irmen geben rootte, I asked the lady how much she would give for the poor. £)er Xpert fagte mir fo eben, ba$ er funf ^funb (Sterling geben mitt, That gentleman told me just now that he would give five pounds. The imperative is often used in English where the subjunctive is used in German when implying abstract ideas. Examples. £>er @ute moge tange teben ! or 9K6ge ber @ute tange (eben ! Let the good live long ! £er Ungtucfltdje t>er jctge ntcbt ! Let not the unfortunate despair ! Sebermann tiebe feinen ^dd)ften ati \id) fetbft ! Let every one love his neighbour as himself ! (£r fyanbte, rote er rootle ! Let him act as he likes ! The conditional is used — When a probability, but no certainty of granting a wish or request is implied : the sentence may, in this case, be expressed in two ways. Either the imperfect subjunctive may be used in the first part of the sentence, in which case the second part of the sentence also must contain an imperfect subjunctive ; or else, if the sentence be com- menced by roenn (if), with the pluperfect subjunctive, the second part must have the second conditional; but if the imperfect sub- junctive precede, with the conjunction rc>enn, the first conditional must be used in the second part. Examples. SSdre e£ mir mog(id) geroefen, fo fyatte id) ©ie getfern befudrt, Had it been possible, I should have visited you yesterday, or SEBenn e$ mir mog(td) geroefen roctre, fo rourbe id) @te geffern befud>t fyaben, If it had been possible, I should have visited you yesterday. £dtte id) je£t @etb genug, fo faufte id) mir einige 95ud)er, Had I money enough now, I would buy some books for myself, or SEBenn id) jefct @e(b genug fyatte, fo rourbe id) mir etnige 93tid>er faufen, If I had money enough now, I should buy some books for myself. MOODS — THE CONDITIONAL. 177 SBdre id) unternchncnb, fo i?attc id) (^rfotg, Were I enterprising I might have success. or 5Benn id) untcrncbmenb rodre, fo roiirbe td> (frfofg fyaben, If I were enterprising I should have success. 2Bdrc id) je$t bungria,, fo bite id) um 25robr,WereI hungry now I would ask for bread, or SOScrtn id) jeljt bungrtg roire, fo roiirbe icb um 23robt bitten, If I were hungry now I should ask for bread. $Bdre id) ju jpaufe gcroefen, fo bdrte er mid) gefeben, Had I been at home he might have seen me. or 3Benn id) ju jpaufe getoefen n\ire, fo roiirbe cr mid) gefcben fyaben, If I had been at home he would have seen me. In the following sentence two pluperfects or two second con- ditionals, with or without the conjunction roenn, are used. Examples. jpittc or mtr gefd)rteben, fo bdrte id) tfym geantroortet, Had he written to me I might have answered him. or, 5Benn er mtr gefcbrieben baben roiirbe, or SBurbe cr mtr gefcbrieben fyaben, fo roiirbe id) thn geantroortet baben, If he would have written to me I should have answered him. When a possibility is implied, the pluperfect subjunctive or the second conditional is followed by the pluperfect subjunctive with the conjunction rcenn. Example. 3d) bdrte eS getban, I might have done it. or, 3d) rourbe e$ getban baben, roenn e£ mtr mogltd) gereefen ware, I should have done it if it had been possible. In case of impossibility, the pluperfect subjunctive is employed. Example. SBdren roir bocb fyduftger jufammen gefommen ! O, had we but met often er ! or, 3d) rounfdjfe, roir rodren bduftger uifammen gefommen ! I wished we had met more frequently ! If there be a mere probability, the present indicative is used in the first part of the sentence, with or without the conjunction roenn. Example. 85ijt bu Hug, fo fycmbte Hug, or 2Bcnn bu ftug bift, (fo) banbte flug, Art thou clever, act cleverly. 178 SYNTAX. The Imperative mood is employed — The second person singular is used in speaking to one person in very familiar conversation, or in commanding. Examples. @teb mit bod) cine Saffe Sttyee, Please give me a cup of tea. ©et) gut unb fletjjig, Be good and industrious. £f)ue (bu) betne 2lrbeif, Do thy work. The second person plural, when speaking to more than one person. In addressing respectable persons, ©te, you, is used, and in speak- ing to boys, it)t is required. Examples. ©ef)t cud) »ot, unb tdufd)t cud) ntcbt, Be (ye) cautious, and not mistaken. Sltbeitet unb Utct, Work and pray. 'tdtafyttn ©tc mcinc SBorte, unb fyoren ©te, rca£ id) [age, Mind my words, and listen to what I say. ©ctb tbr culjig ! Be (ye) quiet ! The third person singular. Example. 2Bed)S(e et mir cincn Stealer, Change (he) me a thaler. The above is a German idiom, and is only used in addressing inferiors, as servants. The third person plural. Example. Sctffen ©ie fie bic 33ud)ct fjaben, Let (you) them have the books. %a$i or (aflfct (u;t) fie bk 2$ud>er fjaben, Let (ye) them have the books. Although the first of these sentences has the true form of the third person plural imperative, and the second that of the second plural imperative, yet both of them, when used with a capital letter, answer to the second imperative in English, viz, ye or you. The first person plural j as, 1a§t or (affet un3 nidtfttevjagen, Let us not despair. The verb to let or permit, lafien, is also used in German — £a£ in the singular; Za$t or Safjet or 2affen ©te ung, Zafct eud), Safjt fie, in the plural. MOODS — THE INFINITIVE. 179 The imperative frequently expresses a condition for accomplish- ing any thing. Examples. SBerbe geptiifr, fo nxtft bu (Srfafjruno, t;aben, or Benn bu gepruft rctrft, fo roitft bu fage ! or jpott nur ju, roaS id) fage ! Do but listen to what I say ! ^icbt fo Dtel gefptocfoen, ifyt $naben! or ©ptec&t nid)t fo »iel, itjr iTnaben! Do not speak so much, boys ! The second person present indicative is employed instead of the imperative in the second part of the sentence. Example. 3d) fage bit, bu fommft balb jutucf, I tell you, come back soon. The infinitive mood can be employed with the preposition ju, or not. The infinitive is preceded by ju. After verbs which signify chance, necessity, obligation, exhorta- tion, command, request, permission, motive, advice, wish, or fear. Examples. &$ n>ate tneUeidtf moglid), tf>n ju fefyert, It might perhaps be possible to see him. £t ift notfjig, fpatfam ju fetjn, It is necessary to be economical. (£t tuHfngtc mid), e$ ju t&un, He obliged me to do it. 3d) vwcbt 3l)ncn nid)t ettauben, ba& s £ud) ju fefen, I will not suffer you to read that book. (£r etmafjnte fie, folgfam ju fei;n, He admonished them to be obedient. 3d) bcfetjte 3f>nen, nid)t ju teben, I command you not to speak. St bat itjrt, ju jpaufe ju bk'iben, He requested him to remain at home. (Srlaubcn Sic mit, ©te ju befud)en, Permit me to visit you. 3d; fyatte erttjctbigcn ? Have you reasons to defend him? SRatfyen ©ie tf>m, bte %jnet ju etnjunefymen, Advise him to take the medicine. £r roimfd)te rmcfc ju f)6ten, He wished to hear me. (£t furd>tetc ftd>, ju mir ju femmert, He was afraid of coming to me. When the verb is used in the active voice. Example. T)ie$ iff fcfyroet auSjufufyten, This is difficult to accomplish. After nouns expressing desire, pleasure, or courage. Examples. (£t fycttte feine £uft ju atbeiten, He did not wish to work. i£$ geroctytt mir $ergmtgen> <5ie ju fefyen, It gives me pleasure to see you. £Xe ©otbaten fatten Oftutfy, gegen ben $etnb ju fdmpfen, The soldiers had courage to fight against the enemy. After adjectives which signify inclination, possibility, easiness, curiosity, desire, readiness, or joy. Examples. (St if! geneigt, frci ju urtfyetfen, He is inclined to judge freely. (£s roar nur fur tfyn mogtid), Srfotg ju Ijaben, It was only possible for him to succeed. <&$ ift teid)t ju begrcifen, It is to be easily comprehended. (£r ift neugtertg, $rembe ju fefyen, He is curious to see strangers. ju roerben, He deceived others in order to grow rich. After the adverbs ofyne or anflatt. Examples. £r i)at fid) fc!>r bemubt, obne (Erfolg ju fjaben, He has exerted himself much without having success, ftebe, anjratt ju fd>roeigen, Speak, instead of being silent. The infinitive is not used with ju After verbs which express judgment, assertion, approval, or wish ; in which case ju is expressed by the preposition fur (for), or by the conjunction ka$ (that). Examples. C£r fydlt ifyn fur einen recbtfcfjaffencn "Warm, He judges him to be an honest man. SCir fytelten u)n fur einen ©d>uru?n, We thought him to be a scoundrel. (Er roupte, ba$ er anberer 9ftetnung fet), He knew him to be of another opinion. SttefeS beroeift, ba$ er 3fted)t t?at, This proves him to be right. 3d) glaube, ba$ er glucn'tcb ift, I believe him to be happy. After the following pronouns, adverbs, and conjunctions, roatf, what; rocm, to whom ; roie, how; roof)in, whereto ; n>ejjl;alb, where- fore, preceded by the verbs roiffen, to know ; fagen, to say. Examples. (Er fagte mir, roa£ id) n)un folt, He told me what to do. (Er roetfj, rcem tcb trauen fann, He knows w r hom I may trust. (Er rceip, roie er fid) betragen fed, He knows how to behave. (Er jetgte mir, roobtn id) gefyen foil, He showed me where to go. (Er fagte mir, roepMb ic& fcbreiben folt, He told me why I should write. JBollen ©ie mir fagen, wo id) einen Jufyrer fi'nben fann ? Will you tell me where I can find a guide ? After the auxiliary verbs of mood or tense, when followed by an infinitive, it forms the future. 182 SYNTAX. Examples. <£t fonnte rceber roctncn, nod) (ac^en, He could neither weep nor laugh. ©ie fonnen e$ ffyun, You may do it. ©ie muflen bafyin gefyen, You must go there. Saffen ©ie ifyn gefyen, Let him go. SBit reetben tym gefyotdjen, We shall obey him. (£t roitb ju ftiif) fommen, He will come too early. After verbs which express the faculties of seeing, hearing, and of perceiving in general. Examples, 3d> \)ktc ii)\\ lefen unb fpielen, unb et faf> mid> fc^vetben, I heard him read (reading) and play (playing), and he saw me write (writing). SBic gotten fie ft'ngen, We heard them sing. After any passive voice, to be is expressed by fatten. Examples. Die 25ud>et fotten in baS dimmer gebtad>t rcetben, The books are to be brought to the room. After the verbs (etnen, to learn; fefyen, to see; (efyten, to teach; fyoten, to hear; fyelfen, to help; tyeijjen, to bid ; fufyten, to feel. Examples. 2Btr (ernten jeidmen, We learned drawing. <£t \ai) unS fpielen, He saw us playing. £t lefjtte mid; fed)ten, He taught me fencing. ©ie Morten micb rufen, They heard me call. SBir fjatfen tynen arbetien, We assisted them in working. 3d) fyei£e ©ie gefyen, I bid you go. 3d) futjtte mein iperj fd)lagen, I felt my heart beating. If any of these verbs are used with the auxiliary verb fyaben, pre- ceded by an infinitive, the past participles of those verbs which stand at the end of the sentence are changed into infinitives when the past participle' would be employed in English. Examples. (£t i)at unS fpielen fefyen, He has seen us playing (play), ©ie fyahm ifyn tufen fjoren, You have heard him calling (call). MOODS — THE INFINITIVE. 183 In order to avoid mistakes, the following examples should be carefully examined: 3$ fa() inn taufen, is in English, I saw him baptizing. 3$ fafy tfjn taufen, I saw him being baptized. The latter sentence is better to be expressed in German by, 3* fab ibn getauft roerben, I saw him being baptized. or 3* fab, ba$ et getauft rourbe, I saw that he was baptized. After the verbs auSfabren, to drive; gebert, to go, to walk; fegen, to lay, to put; nennen, to call; teiten, to ride, the infinitive is em- ployed where the present participle would be used in English. Examples. ©ie fubren auS, or ©ie fufyren fpafjieren, They went out driving. ©ie gingen au$, or ©ie gtngen fpa^ieren, They went out walking. €$ ge^en in bonbon tuele 3uben tjaufiren, In London there are many Jews going hawking. Nennen ©ie ba$ trinfen ? Do you call that drinking? 9)torgen roerben nnr auSreiten, or Worgen roerben rotr fpa^teren reiten, We shall go out riding to-morrow. 2afjen, to let, to make, or to suffer, is always employed in those cases when in English the verb to make expresses a command. 3cf) Uep ibn bie ©eite jum jroeiten 9)tate febreiben, I made him write that page a second time. Saffen ©ie ibn ain>get;en, um papier ju b;oten, Make him go out to fetch the paper. When the infinitive with the preposition to is used in English, the infinitive with the neuter article is used in German. In that case the infinitive is considered a noun. T>a$ ©eben rourbe mir farcer, It was difficult for me to walk. T)a$ $x'obacbten unferer ^flicbt ift fcfyroierig, It is difficult to observe our duties. £>a$ Sefen guter 35ucber ift lefjrreid), To read good books is instructive. PARTICIPLES. The Present Participle. The present participle is either active or neutral. It is generally used as an adverb; but when the syllables e, er, oretf, are added to it, it is declined as an adjective. 184 SYNTAX. Examples. £>er trotfcnbe @ebcmfe, The consoling thought. €in rotfenber ©tetn, A rolling stone. 25rutfenbe 26n>inn, Roaring lioness. (£tn fyielenbeS ^ndbletn, A playing little boy. This participle governs either the dative or the accusative, which always precede. It has no degrees of comparison. Examples. £)er mir folgenbe ipunb, The dog that follows me. or (£in mir folgenber jpunb, A dog that follows me. 2)ie mtr erfdjeinenbe ©eftalt, The form which appears to me. £>er un$ errcartenbe Ofyetm, The uncle who expects us. £>a$ un$ tdufcfrenbe (Mb, The gold which deceives one. Some adjectives end in enb which are not participles ; as, an= mafsenb, arrogant; anjiebenb, attractive; etnfeucbtenb, clear; erf;e= benb, elevating, exalting; fytnrei£enb, overpowering; unbebeutenb, trifling, insignificant; tt-wfyenb, furious, raving, &c. Examples. Sunge Seute ftnb oft anmafjenb, Young men are often arrogant. £)ie Unterfjaltuno, n>ar an&iebenb, The conversation was attractive, ©eine SBorte n?aren einleucbtenb, His words were clear, ©ein ©efano, roar erfyebenb, His singing was elevating. 3fyre ©timme ift f)inret^enb, Her voice is overpowering. 9ttetne ©cfymerjen ftnb unbcbcutenb, My pain is trifling. JDte Ziqm ftnb routfjenb, Tigers are furious. The above admit the comparative and superlative degrees. Examples. ©eme Unterfyattuno, n>ar anjiefcenber, afe bte fcine^ betters, His conver- sation was more attractive than that of his cousin. 34) f)6rte ben erfyebenbften ©efcmg, I heard the most exalting hymn (song). £)er ©tester era,o£ ftcb in bie erfyebenbften ©efufcte, The poet displayed the most elevating sentiments. When this participle expresses cause or reason, the conjunctions tnbem, ba, roetf, roenn, are used in its stead with their respective tenses. The relative pronoun roelcbet is also used. In English the present participle is used instead of these conjunctions. PARTICIPLES. 185 Examples. 3nbem rotr fo fefren jufammen trcffen, fo muffen rotr befto haunter fcbrcik'n, Having met so seldom we must write the more frequently. £)a rotr @elb baben, fo rotrb bte Unternebmung Icid>r fur un$ recrben, Being in possession of money the undertaking will he easy for us. SEBal ich ©ie nicbt genau gefannr babe, fo n>irb 3bncn mein 25etraa,en nicbt auffallen, Not having been intimately acquainted with you my behaviour will not offend you. SSenn rotr oorftcfmo, fortfehrciton, fo reerben rotr unferen SBecj nicftf oerfer,Ien, Proceeding cautiously, we shall not lose our way. (£in SIrbciter, roeltfjer feine Arbeit rernad)laf|TQf, barf fetnen £ob,n erroarten, A workman neglecting his work cannot expect any wages. Where the present participle is preceded by the preposition upon in English, the preposition auf, upon, with the adverb ba, forming the compound barauf, is used in German. In this case the subject and the infinitive, or the conjunction ba$ with the present subjunctive follow the preposition instead of the participle. Example. 3 befyarre barauf, 3fyte timing ju fyoren, or 3* befyarrc barauf, ba$ icf> 3fyre 9ttetnuna, b;6re, I insist upon hearing your opinion. When the subject of the participle differs from the meaning of the verb, the conjunction ba$ can only be used. Examples. 3«i) before barauf, ba$ ©ie nicbt auSgefyen, I insist upon your not going out. 3$ bejrebe barauf, ba§ <5ie ni jpaufe bletben, I insist upon your re- maining at home. When the present participle is used in English to express habitual action, the same participle is used as a noun, preceded by the de- finite article in German. Examples. £)er (Scbretbenbe, or £>te (Sd)rctbenbe, One who writes. 2)ie Spielenben geroanrten tfiel ©elb, Those who were gambling won much money. It expresses entreaty or meditation, in winch case the real form of the participle is used. 186 SYNTAX. Examples. SSittenb mfucBfe et mein ^fttttetb §u ertegen, Entreating he tried to raise my compassion. (£t ging nacfybenfenb im dimmer umfyer, He walked about the room meditating. Complete sentences may be contracted by the use of the present participle, when referring to but one subject for the sake of emphasis. Examples. 3nbem er fcine 21ugen gen jptmmel er&ob, rief ct au$, While he raised his eyes to heaven he exclaimed, or, ©etne 2lugen gen ipimmel etfyebenb, ricf et au$, Lifting his eyes up to heaven, he exclaimed. The definite article neuter is always used in German with in- finitives resembling nouns, in those cases where the present parti- ciple would be used without the article in English. Example. £)a$ £anjen ift eme gro$e ^clufttgung, Dancing is a great amusement. Infinitives resembling nouns are always preceded by a preposi- tion in German, where the present participle preceded by a prepo- sition would be used in English. Example. 3Btt unterfyielten un$ bur$ £efen, We entertained ourselves by reading. THE PAST PARTICIPLE. The past participle is used to form the compound tenses referring to the past, and also to the passive voice. It is employed as an adjective with the definite, the indefinite, and without an article admitting comparison. Examples. £)er (or etn) fefyt gefutcbtete (er) Selbfyetr gerocmn bte ©cblatf>t, The (a) much feared general gained the battle. £He (or eine) tterlorene aS (or ein) aufgeregte (es) $3olf tterad)tete bte @efe§e beS £anbe$ or £ t)nbe niemati eine gepriefenere ©cfcaufptelerin gefcort, I have never heard a more celebrated actress. The present or the past participle may be preceded by a noun which is governed by a preposition with an accusative or dative, both in the active and passive voice. The passive voice does not admit a noun which is governed by an accusative. Examples. £)er in ben ©arten (aufenbe ipafc rotrb gefangen roerben, That hare which is running into the garden will be caught, or, £)er in bem ©arten (aufenbe Jpafe i\t fefyr jung, That hare which is running in the garden is very young. £)er in ben ©arten getaufene ipafc ift gefangen roorben, The hare which had been running into the garden is caught. When the nominative denotes the object of the passive voice, which is not capable of an action, the present participle is used in- stead of the past in English ; but in this case the present or imper- fect tense of the passive voice is employed in German. Examples. £)te £anbfrf)rift rcirb gebrucft, The manuscript is printing. T)a rourbe etn JpauS gebaut, There was a house building. When an action, which is already passed, is alluded to with re- ference to one about to be commenced, the sentence is divided into two parts, the first of which begins with bo. or nadjbem, and the second with fo. Examples. ^acbbem icf> meine 51nge(egen()eiten in Orbnung gebracfyt fyatte, fo retfte tch auf ba$ £anb, Having settled my affairs I set off for the country. £)a ich ^Irjnet genommen fyabe, fo roerbe id> fyeute &u jpaufe b(ciben, Having taken physic I shall remain at home to-day. £>a bao $tnb fur feinen Ungefjorfam beftraft roorben nxtr, fo befd)(o$ e£, ftcb beffer ju betragen, The child having been punished for its dis- obedience resolved to behave better. Some adjectives have the same ending as the past participles; as, angeboren, hereditary; angelegen, important; befannt, known ; er= geben, addicted to, devoted to ; errounfcfyr, desirable ; gercarfjfen, equal in strength ; geroogen, condescending ; unerroartet, unexpected ; unrer= fyoffr, unhoped for; perbunben, obliged; befugt, entitled; benotfytgt, 188 SYNTAX. needful ; beroufjt, conscious ; serrucff, deranged ; rotfffommen, wel- come ; geroanbr, nimble, and many others. It sometimes is employed to shew strength or weariness of mind. Examples. £>ur$ bte gute ©ache angefeuerr, writer* ber bra»?e ©olbat feinen Wlutf) nifyt, Being animated by the good cause the brave soldier does not lose his courage. 2)em Setter ergeben, t>erie£t man bie i?ei(igften ^fltdjten, Being addicted to vice the most sacred duties are violated. The past participle may be changed into the third singular pre- sent indicative by the conjunction roenn, if. Example. 2£enn man bem Safler ergeben ift, (fo) mle£t man bie fyetUgfren ^fltdrten, If one be addicted to vice the most sacred duties are violated. Some neuter verbs express motion ; in which case the verb fom= men precedes their past participle, while the present participle would be used in English. Examples. ©ie fommen gegangen, They come walking. (£r fam geftolpert, He came stumbling. £He $ftatrofen famen gefegelf, The sailors came sailing. £>a$ 9Kdbd)en fommt getanjt, The girl comes dancing. ©te fommen gefrodjen, They come creeping. 2>er 23ogel fommt gefktttert, The bird comes fluttering. THE FUTURE PARTICIPLE. This participle, like the two former ones, possesses the qualities both of noun and verb, and is therefore neither a tense or mood, but forms a medium between both. This participle expresses a compulsion or necessity, corresponding to the future in the passive voice. Its form is that of the present participle when used as an adjective preceded by the preposition ju. Examples. £>te $u erroartertbe Stfyeurung rotrb burd) roeife $k$regetn wrfytnbert roerben, The famine to be expected will be prevented by wise measures. (£tne un$ ju gerodfyrenbe ^reube fofl un$ tffluti) fur ba$ 2eben geben, A joy to be granted to us may give us courage for life. SHe &u ertragenben £etben beffern un$ fyduftg, Suffering to be endured corrects us frequently. ( 189 ) § 4. THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. A. Principal sentences which agree with the English. Principal sentences are such as require no further explanation to be understood. To the formation of a principal sentence there belong the three following particulars : 1. The subject, referring to either the persons or matters to be explained. 2. The jn-edicate, explaining the subject ; and, 3. The copula, or a connecting verb, which is usually an auxi- liary verb, by which the sentence is finished. Principal sentences are exhibited in the following examples : a. When the copula is followed by an adjective or adverb ; as, Die 2Befte iff roth, The waistcoat is red. Der Stifcfc ift niebrtg, The table is low. DaS £(etb ift cjrun, The dress is green. b. When the copula or verb explains the subject sufficiently, there is no predicate required, which is the case when neuter verbs are used not admitting either object or predicate ; as, Die Siefyrfhmbe enbet, The lesson ends. Die 936^1 fue^en, The birds fly. DaS Seuet brennt, The fire burns. c. When the copula or verb does not explain the subject, the predicate is required in the form of a noun, an adjective or an adverb, an infinitive mood, a past participle, or a preposi- tion ; as, Die ©pinne i\t ein Snfeft, The spider is an insect. Der erbe beobacbtet, I am observed. ©ie roerben geacfjtet, They are esteemed. 190 SYNTAX. B. In the construction of such sentences as do not have the German agreeing with the English the principal rule to be observed is, that participles or infinitives are always to be placed at the end of the sentence. a. The subject, copula, and predicate govern the following sentences : £>te @ebid)tc ft'nb unterfyctltenb geroefen, The poems have been enter- taining. £>ctS $eft roirb cmgenefym fev>n, The feast will be agreeable. £>a$ $inb tyat gut gelernt, The child has learned well. £>ie Gutter tft gefunb geroorben, The mother has recovered. (Er roirb t>otftd>tig geroefen fei>n, He will have been cautious. ©ie finb ruf)tg geblieben, They have remained quiet. b. When there are two participles used, that of the auxiliary verb stands last ; and if there should be an infinitive in connection with them (as in compound futures or conditionals), the infi- nitive stands at the end ; as, £>er 3Irjt ift gcfyolt roorben, The physician has been sent for. JDte £rnte roirb beenbtgt roorben fetjn, The harvest will have been finished. When the past participle of the auxiliary verb roerben, to become, is used with a past participle of a passive verb, the prefix ge is omitted, as the above examples will explain. c. When an object is added to the subject and copula, the former is employed instead of the predicate, and may be used in the accusative, dative, or genitive cases, whatever case may be governed by the predicate or verb. Examples. £)er ©artner verfauft Obft, The gardener sells fruit. 2eonibct$ fdjrecfte bic ^erfer, Leonidas terrified the Persians. (Etcero fyat ctuSgqeicbnete 25rtefe gefcfyrieben, Cicero has written excel- lent epistles. £)er 2croe fud)t 23cutc, The lion seeks prey. ©te roerben gleifcfo efien, They will eat meat. £>er 5SogeI roar bcm $dftd> entffattett, The bird had fluttered from the cage. (£r rourbe feine^ (MbeS beraubt, He was robbed of his money. £)er £>iener roirb ©tdfer brtngen, The valet will bring glasses. CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 191 d. Sentences consisting of two nouns require the personal noun to be placed before the impersonal ones. Examples. £>te Schavfter retcbt tfn*em SBruber cine SMiune, The sister hands a flower to her brother. £)et 53ater rotrb feinem Sobne ba$ @e(b rerrceigevn, The father will re- fuse the money to his son. £)et 93ormunb ubergab ben Stemben bet ^olijeibe^otbe, The guardian delivered the stranger to the chief office of police. £>et ©panter tiaqte ben 3tahenet beg 9)?otbeg an, The Spaniard ac- cused the Italian of murder. e. The accusative of two personal nouns is placed before the dative. Examples. 2)ie £(tern serttauen tfyte ©efyne bem Stjte^er an, The parents trust their sons to the tutor. £>ie Untertbanen etcjaben ft'rf) tfytem $6mg, The subjects submitted to their King. f. The dative or accusative case of personal pronouns precede every other case when there is only one pronoun in the sentence. Examples. 3 rcerbe 3fynen ba$ (Mb cjeben, I shall give you the money. meiner, He recollected me. ©ie fcbdmte fid) feiner, She was ashamed of him. 5Bir rcerben ung ibnen anmtrauen, We shall confide in you. <5tc gaben ft'e (bie SBtumen) ifyr, They gave them (i. e. the flowers) to her. 93erjeil;en <5te eg mir, Pardon me for it. (£t fyat e^ 3f)nen tterjiefyen, He has pardoned you for it. h. Adverbs of time precede the object. Examples. 3* werbe movgen meinen Smmb bejucben, I shall visit my friend to- morrow. 192 SYNTAX. 3& fyabe geftern meinen ©djncibet bejafytt, I have paid my tailor yesterday. i. When adverbs both of time and place, or nouns referring to place, occur in a sentence, the former precedes the latter. Examples. $Kein Oljeim rear geffetn fuer, My uncle was here yesterday. 3cf) rcerbe morgen bafytn gefyen, I shall go there to morrow. <£t ift btefen Bergen nacf) Berlin gereift, He has gone to Berlin this morning. 3$ bin bicfen 2Ibenb in bonbon angefommen, I arrived in London this evening. j. When nouns are preceded by prepositions referring to former times, the preposition is placed before the nouns. Examples. 3 roar t>ot jroci Safyten in Stalien, I was in Italy two years ago. £)ie SBelt hat ror »ic(en 3af)t!)unbcttcn beftanben, The world has existed many centuries. <£r ift feit brei Stagen abgereijt, He departed three days since. k. When adverbs of time, or nouns expressing time, preceded by prepositions, are employed in a sentence, either of them is placed before any other noun, with or without prepositions. Examples. 3cb fyabe fyeute roejfer etfyalten, I have re- ceived news from my sister to-day. (£r n>itb in etnigen ©runben bie 25ud>et an fetnen 25ud>bdnbler febitfen, He will send the books to his bookseller in a few hours.* I. Adverbs of place or time may follow or precede the dative or accusative. Examples. (£r folgfe bem $Ranne ubevatt nacfy, He followed the man every- where. £aben ©ic 3fyren Sreunb ttgenbroo gefunben ? Did you find your friend anywhere ? The construction of these and similar sentences correspond to the En dish. CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 1!»> 7)1. Adverbs are always placed immediately after the verb. Examples. St fycit fcduftg $opfn>ef), or $opf [inner jcn, He frequently has the headache. <£t \)at ntemate (in fetnem ©efdjdfr) gefefylt, He never has failed in business. n. Many other adverbs are placed immediately before the infinitive or participle. 3d) rcetbe <2ie motgen gennp etrcatten, I shall expect you certainly to-morrow. Weine $inbct fotten fjeutc auSgeben, My children shall go out to-day. 3d) fyabe e$ n>itftid> gecjtaubt, I have really believed it. jpaben ©te micb sotfyet gefefyen? Have you* seen me before ? o. When a sentence is constructed in such a manner as that altering the position of the words produces a different effect, such a sentence may be changed to the utmost. The following sentence exemplifies these various changes. £>et ©dttnet fyotte tdg(itf) auS bem ©atten SMumen fyetauS, The gardener fetched flowers out of the garden daily. £olte ber ©dttnet tdglicf) SMumen au$ bem ©atten fyetauS? Zacfiid) fyotte bet ©dttnet 25lumen au$ bem ©atten fyetaug, 2uiS bem ©atten fjolte bet ©dttnet tdgttd) 35lumen fyetauS, <£$ fyotte bet ©attnet tdgttd) au$ bem ©atten 2Mumen fyetauS, £etauS auS bem ©atten fyotte bet ©dttnet tdglicb SMumen, ^tumen fyotte bit &ktmt tdgtich cuts bem ©atten fyetauS, ©dttnet, \)ole et tdgUcfr SMumen au$ bem ©atten fyetauS, p. When in English the negative adverb, not, is followed by the adverb yet, it is expressed by nod) nid>t, yet not, in German, which are never separated. Examples. 3d) babe ncch nicht beenbtgt, I have not yet finished. Gardener, you niaj' fetch flowers out of the garden daily. 194 SYNTAX. ©tnb ©ie nod) nid)t bet bem s £u$binbet geroefen ? Have you not been to the bookbinder yet ? q. When the negative adverb nid)t renders the sentence only appa- rently negative, it precedes those words which are partly negative. In this case it never precedes the participle or infinitive. Examples. SEBit rcetben md>t sot fyeute 3ibenb jutudfefyten, We shall not return before this evening. 3d) rcetbe nid)t ftuf) aufftefyen, I shall not rise early. (£t fyat nid)t alle feine gteunbe gefctjen, He has not seen all his friends. r. When one or more words are placed before the personal pro- noun, or before the noun with the verb, the verb is placed before the pronoun or noun, which is called an inverted po- sition. It takes place — When the pronoun and the verb are placed at the beginning of the sentence. Examples. 3Hettetd)t ift et nic^t roof)t, Perhaps he is not well, jpeute bin id) fef)t befd)dftigt, To-day I am very much occupied. 93ot etnigen 28od>en befud)te id) einen Srcmjofen, A few weeks ago I visited a Frenchman. $Son ganjem jpetjen n>unfd)e id) 3(>nen (Stfofg, With all my heart I wish success to you. 9hm ift 3&te gveunbtnn, bie ©rdftnn, ju jpaufe, Now your friend, the countess, is at home. The inversion takes place twice (i. e. in the first and in the second part of the sentence), when the conjunction n>enn, if, is not, ex- pressed in the first part. Examples. 3fagnet e$ nid)t, (or 9Benn e$ nidji tegnet), fo megen ©ie mid) etrcatten, If it does not rain, you may expect me. £>dtte id) ©etegenfyett, (or 2Benn ic^ ©elegenfyett fydtfe), fo rourbe id; U)n frctgen, If I had opportunity, I should ask him. When speaking of others, or when judging of persons or things, the pronoun or noun referring to the speaker is used in an inverted position. CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGl W.K. 195 Examples, ^ut (Etner, fagte er, f>at ben Spteid gerconnen, Only one, said he, has won the prize. £>et 9tfann, erflarre ber £Rid>ter, ift unfc&ulbig, That man, said tlie judge, is innocent. X)a$ 93ik&, gtaube ic&, if* gut gefcfyrteben, That book, I believe, is well written. All the foregoing sentences are called principal sentences, as they do not require any farther explanation, nor a conjunction. C. Dependent or subordinate sentences are such as cannot be understood without a farther explanation, and which are formed with a conjunction either in the first or the second part of the sentence. a. When a sentence begins with any of those conjunctions which are marked in the list as removing the verb to the end of tlu* sentence (and in compound tenses the auxiliary verb), the in- version takes place in the second part, which is always a prin- cipal one, and begins with fo, (which is not expressed in English). Examples. 2tt$ SlugujtuS romifcfrer $aifer roar, fo tour be GtyriftuS geboren, When Augustus was Roman Emperor, Christ was born. Sfficnn it ©teben fd>ldgt, fo ift e£ pett, When it strikes seven it will be time. s )?acbbem bcc ©eeroeg natf) Snbten gefunben rootben roar, fo rciftc man roemgev ju 2anb, After the sea-passage to India had been found, one travelled less by land, ©obatb Scrufalem erobert roorben uw, fo gtngen tfiele ^tlget nacb jnaufe, As soon as Jerusalem had been conquered many palmers went home. 5£cnn e$ Sett ijt, fo roerbe td> gu 3fynen fommen, When it is time I shall come to you. b. When a compound sentence begins with a principal sentence, the inversion does not take place, but the verb is removed to the end by a conjunction. Examples. £)er £cmpel bet ©tana oerbrannte, aU SUeranbet geboren toutbe, The temple of Diana was burnt down when Alexander was born. o2 196 SYNTAX. SDie ©ocmiet entbecften 5lmetifa, rcctytenb bte ^ottugtefen ben ©eeroeg narf) £snbien fanben, The Spaniards discovered America, whilst the Portuguese found the sea-passage to India. The following conjunctions remove the verb to the end of the sentence ; as, ate, auf ba§, besot, bis, ba, bamit, ba$, efye, fail$, je, je nadjbem, tnbem, in fo fern, in rote fern, (not when used interrogatively), nacbbem, mm, ob, obgtetd), obfc^on, obvooty, ob=aud>, feitbem, una,ead>tet, nxtytenb, n>et(, roenn, (roennmtdtf, rcenmgleicb), rcie, (rote=aud>), roieroofyl, rco, roofetn, ob=jn>at. c. When any of these conjunctions begin the sentence, the accusa- tive or dative of the personal pronoun precedes the subject. Examples. ©obatb ifyn bcv $6nta, antebefe, fonnfe et ntdtf cmtrootten, When the king addressed him he was not able to answer. <£f)e i&m ber fdtief ge&etgf routbe, roat et roof>t, Before the letter was shewn to him he was well. d. When a sentence begins with any of the conjunctions, and is used interrogatively, the inversion does not take place in the second part of the sentence, and the word fo is not em- ployed. Example. SBenn trf> ffei§ig bin, roetben ©te nut ein 2mcb faufen ? If I am indus- trious will you buy me a book ? e. When any of these adverbial conjunctions are used in the second part of the sentence the inversion takes place. Examples. ©te finb tetd) ; mitfyin fyaben @ie (Stnfmp, You are rich, consequently you have influence. etna$, nad>f)et, jebod), tnbeffen (inbejO, inajetcben (rarely used), in fo fetn (in fo rcett), in true fetn, faum, mitfun, nicbt altein, nut, btojj, fonbetn aucb, no$, nut, fonjt, tyeik — tfjeite, ubrigens, ubetbieS, melmefyt, jubem, jn>at. They require a semicolon (;) instead of a comma (,) before them when they begin the second part of a sentence. CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 197 f. The relative pronouns ber, roelcber, also roatf, tver, rcaS fur ein, re- move the verb (and in compound tenses the auxiliary) to the end of the sentence. Examines. <£$ ift berfctbe 3ftocf, ben Ste gcftevn rauften, It is the same coat (that) you bought yesterday. (£s roar biefelbc Stau, bie fo eben roe^egangen iff, It was the same woman who is gone away just now. £>er, roekfier e$ mtr fagte, ift ein Stmetifanet, He who told me is an American. 3dE> erfytett einen 23rief oon meinem s £ruber, oon bem id) feit tanger Beit ^tcht^ cjcf?6rt tjatte, I received a letter from my brother, of whom I had not heard for a long time. €uropa ift ber SBelttfyetl, von bem bie ©efdj)td)tfd)reiber am meijten facjen, Europe is that part of the world of which historians say most. £r \)at mtr gefagt, toa$ id) tf)un foil, He has told me what I am to do. 3d) roetjj, rcer ba£ ^ferb fatifcn roirb, I know who will buy the horse. 3d) oermuu>, toeffen ftinb er gefefjen fjar, I fancy whose child he has seen. (5$ ift ungeroifj, roem er ba$ @e(b gab, It is uncertain to whom he gave the money. 3d) fragte tfjm, wen er juerfl befudjen roolle, I asked him whom he would visit first. <£.$ ift mtr gletdjguttig, roaS fur ein j?au» er gefauft tyat, It is indifferent to me what sort of house he has bought, ©agen Ste mir, toaS fur 231umen rerfauft nnuben, Tell me what sort of flowers were sold. Active verbs are employed generally when the pronoun removes the verb to the end of the sentence. When they are used interro- gatively the verb is not generally removed to the end. g. Adverbs referring to a cause, as, roarum, roefjtjatb ; or to a place, as, too, roofyer, TOofnn, borr, and others, remove the verb to the end of the sentence when they are not employed interro- gatively. Examples. 3d) roet£ ntd>t, roarum er mid) oermeiber, I do not know why he avoids me. <£$ ift befannt, n>e£(;atb er bie Stabt oerlteg, It is known why he left town. 1 98 SYNTAX. £>iet tft bte ©telle, roo id) it>n fmben foil, Here is the place where I shall find him. (£$ tft una,eroi$, rooijer er fommen rottb, It is uncertain from whence he will come. Stffen ©ie, roofyin ©ie tfm ful>ren ? Do you know where you are leading him ? 3c& funfcte, bort roirb er nic&t fetjn, I fear he will not be there. /*. The indefinite pronouns roaS and roer are followed in the second part of the sentence by ba$ and bet. The latter are not ex- pressed. Examples. $8a$ er *>erbtent, (ba&) gibt er ctuS, What he earns he spends. SBer (and)) fommt, (ber) mufs marten, Whoever comes must wait. 2Ba$ 3{td)t ift, (ba$) roirb SKecbt bleiben, What is right will be always right. 5Cer arm ift, (ber) fyat ©otcjen, Who is poor, he has cares. The indefinite pronouns ba$ and ber after roa£ and roer are em- ployed in the following sentences : — 3£a*> bu md)t son Slnbetn erroarten roillft, ba$ tt>ue aurf> itmen nid)t, What thou dost not wish others to do to thee, so also do not to them. 28ct$ bir nicfrt gefyort, ba$ lajfe unberiifyrt, Do not touch that which does not belong to you. ?'. The verb is not removed to the end of the sentence when auxi- liary verbs of mood with infinitives are employed, although those conjunctions which are used in the beginning of the sentence remove the verb to the end according to the above rules. Examples. SBertn id) ttm fyatte fefyen roollen, fo f?dtfc id) urn oier Ul>r fommen muffen, If I had been willing to see him I should have been obliged to come at four o'clock. ^fttemcmb jroetfelt baran, ba$ ©ie nid)t fyaben arbeiten fonnen, Nobody doubts that you have not been able to work. (£S ift naturltcf), ba$ id) ifm fyabe untetftu^en muffen, It is natural that I have been obliged to assist him. £>aS ^pferb ijt franf, ba e$ nirf)t l)at freflfen roollen, The horse is ill, be- cause it was not willing to eat. j. When urn is used as a conjunction, it always is followed by ju with an infinitive, and requires to be separated. CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, 1 99 Example. (£r ging au$, urn ben 2lr&t ju bolen, benn feiti ftine mat fvanf, He went out in order to fetch the physician, for his child was ill. k. When compound separable verbs are employed in a sentence, the particles or prepositions are placed at the end of the sentence when the present or imperfect tenses, or the imperative mood, are used. Examples. 3<*> gebe ben 33rtcf fogletd) ab, I will deliver the letter immediately. 2Bit fauftcn tnele Sacfyen ein, We purchased many things. 3ftufen <2ie ben 25oten jutucf, Call back the messenger. /. When conjunctions which remove the verb to the end of the sentence precede compound separable verbs, the particles or prepositions are not to be separated in the present or imper- fect tenses. Examples. 2Bcnn cr ben 53tief fjeute abgibt, (fo) rotrb er morgen ba$ @elb etfyalten, If he delivers the letter to-day he will receive the money to- morrow. 211$ n>ir inete ©adjen einfauften, fafjen rcit etne Wmerifanerin im Saben, When we purchased many things, we saw an American lady in the shop. m. When an infinitive follows compound separable verbs, the par- ticles or prepositions, being separated from the verb, stand im- mediately after the infinitive, and are not placed at the end of the sentence. Examples. £>te .fttnbet fangen an miibe ju metben, The children begin to become tired. <£r fyorte auf ju fpieten, He left off playing, gafyren <5ie fort ju fd)tetben, Continue to write (writing). n. When the infinitive with ju, or the participle with the augment ge, is employed, the particles or prepositions of compound separable verbs are followed by ui or ge; as, abjufefyreiben, to copy ; abgefrf)teiben, copied. Examples. £t roat beretr, mir nac^utfolgen, He was ready to follow me. So eben ftnb ibm Me ©ofboten nacbgcfolgt, The soldiers have followed him just now. 200 SYNTAX. o. When pronouns which remove the verb to the end of the sen- tence are employed in the beginning of a sentence, the par- ticles or prepositions of compound separable verbs are not separated. Example. £He gtau, roeldje bte 25lumen fyetbtincjt, iff etne SBtttroe, The woman who brings the flowers here is a widow. p. The particles or prepositions of compound separable verbs are separated from the verb after such conjunctions as do not alter the construction; as, attetn, aber, benn, fonbetn, entroebet — obet, mbnt — nod) ; or after the following adverbs : jroar, nut, focjat, [ebon, faum, aud>, which do alter the construction. Examples. 3d> routbe eg tfym nun facjen, attein et fommt rotebet, I should tell him now, but he will come again. (£t setfefyrcenbete We$, abet (parte ^ic^tg auf, He spent every thing, but spared nothing. St rottb nid)t ju 3fynen fommen, benn et gefyt tjeute ntcbt aus>, He will not come to you, for he is not going out to-day. St befucbte un£, unb btafyte feine ©cfyroeftet mit, He visited us, and brought his sister with him. ©ie laben mid) entroebet ein, obet nefymen meine Sinlabung an, They will either invite me or accept my invitation. 3Bebet et teitet auS, nod? ^t auS, fonbetn fdt>rt auS, He is neither riding out (on horseback), nor walking out, but driving out. SBeber teitet et auS, nocf) gefyt et aus, fonbetn et fdfjtt aug, unb roitb fef)t mube fet?n, He is neither riding out (on horseback), nor walking out, but driving out, and will be very tired. Broat tft et fTeijjig ; nut tyat et feine Steunbe, Although he is indus- trious, yet he has not any friends, ©ocjat feine Steunbe famen, or ©ogat famen feine Steunbe, Even his friends came. ©ebon rear et ba, ati id) fam, or St n>at febon ba 7 afe tcb fam, He was already there when I came, or, 2flg id) lam, roat et fd>on ba, When I came he was already there. $aum faf? et mid), fo bemerfte et aud) feinen *fteffen, or Sr fat? mid) foum, aU et aucb feinen flteffen bemetfte, He scarcely saw me when he also noticed his nephew. 5tucb feine $teunbe ttetltej^en if>n, ate et im Unojucf roat, His friends also left him when he was in misfortune. CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 201 %\U er tm Ungliicf rear, tfcrliepen it?n aucb feine Sreunbe, When he was in misfortune his friends left him also. A better acquaintance with the syntax and the minutias of the language is best to be attained by continual and lively conversation, and by reading the best authors, both of which are sadly neglected in this country by many teachers in the metropolis. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON PUNCTUATION. A. The points which are used when the accent is to be laid on the sentence are — 2)a$ 3raa,e$eicr>i>n (?), note of interrogation ; and ba$ 21u$rufuno> jeicf)cn (!), note of interjection. When these are used, the whole of the sentence should be read as an interrogation or as an interjection, which is frequently neglected in reading. Examples. 5Bte stele ©turtben roetben ©ie fyettte fytet bletben ? How many hours will you remain here to day? 5Bobin finb 3bre $inbet gegangen ? or 5Bo finb 3t?re $mbet fyingegangen ? Where are your children gone ? B. Those by which sentences or periods are divided are called ba$ $ omnia (,); ba$ $ofon (:), (bcr £>oppelpuntY) ; ba$ ©emtfolon ( ; ), (or ber ©trid)punft) ; ber ^unft ( . ), (or ber ©cfcuifjpunft). The above points are used in the same wayas in English, except ba$ $omma, ka$ £oton, and ba$ Scmifolon, the use of w r hich requires particular attention, as it is materially different from English. 1. Mules and Examples for the use of the Comma. It shews the construction of a sentence or period minutely, and is applied — a. When one part of a sentence ends with a verb, and the other begins with one ; as, SBenn roit jufrieben finb, (fo) gebrau&en rear SEBenig, If we are con- tented we want little. 3Bct rcetnt, (acbt balb roiebet, He who weeps will soon laugh again. 202 SYNTAX. b. Before conjunctions or relative and demonstrative pronouns ; as, 28tr gotten auf, ate mix beenbigt fatten, We left off when we had finished. 3d) fefye ba$ $inb, roeld)e$ fprtd)t, I see the child who speaks. 2)ie£ tft bcr 3fang, ben id) t?etloren fyatte, This is the ring which I had lost. c. When a relative pronoun is preceded by a demonstrative pro- noun, or an interrogative pronoun by a demonstrative one; as, £)et 23aum, rcelcber tyex flefyt, tft fefyr alt, That tree which stands here is very old. £r bead)tete ba$, rcag tcb tfym fagte, He paid attention to what I told him. d. Before any preposition which begins a part of a sentence; as, (£.$ roar metn 23tubet, wn bem id) fyeute etnen S&rtef crt>tett, It was my brother from whom I received a letter to-day. e. Before adverbs of time or of place, when they begin a part of a sentence ; as, 3d) etfufyr, roo ex rcofynt, I learned where he lives. SBtflfen fie, roofytn et o,eo,ana,en ift? Do you know where he is gone to ? f. After adjectives referring to the same noun ; as, (£r t?etfaufte fein alteS, magereS, fcbroarjeS ^ferb, He sold his old, lean, black horse. g. After nouns referring to one verb ; as, , £>d)fen unb £unbe ftnb nufclid&e £f)tete, Horses, sheep, cows, oxen, and dogs are useful animals. h. Before infinitives which are governed by a preceding verb ; as, (£r bemufyte fid), feme Samilie anftanbia, ju etndfyren, He endeavoured to provide for his family respectably. /'. When a whole sentence refers to different subjects, the conjunc- tions unb and obex are preceded by a comma; as, X)ie Gutter gina, au$, unb lief fyxe $tnber ju £aufe, The mother went out, and left her children at home. (£r rctrb fommen, ober ^ie mxb fdjvetben, He will come, or she will write. PUNCTUATION. }. In case of apposition ; as, Gtcero, bet berufmtfe 3fobner, rctrb nirf>t leid)t erfefjt rcerben, Cicero, the flimous speaker, will not easily be replaced. 2. Rules and Examples for the use of the Colon. The colon includes a greater part of tlie sentence than any other point except the period, (ocbtuppunft,) and is employed — a. After namltd), al$, rote, in explanations; as, g$ o,ibt funf SBetttyeile, namud>: (£uropa, Slften, Slfrtfa, 2lmettfa unb 3mftralten, There are five parts of the world, namely, Europe, Asia, Africa, America and Australia. When those conjunctions are not employed, the comma takes the place of the colon. b. When others speak, or the words of another are referred to; as, £r fagte : er fev> mit bcm Marine md)t mftieben, He said he was not satisfied with the man. 3d) \)hte twn tfym : bag btc ^entginn fefor franf fet>, I learned from him that the Queen was very ill. c. It is employed before conjunctions when a principal sentence contains a condition which is to be explained in the second part of the sentence; as, (£fretn unb £ef)tet rcenben MeS an, urn bie ^inber ju erjtefjen : bafyer mufien bic £inbet fTeipia, unb gefyorfam fetjn, Parents and master do every thing to educate the children ; therefore the children must be industrious and obedient. 3. Rules and Examples for the use (tf the Semicolon. The semicolon is used when two thoughts, either expressed by single words or by a whole sentence, are not considered as being closely connected. a. It is placed between the principal and subordinate sentence, and before such conjunctions as do not alter the construction men- tioned at the end of the Syntax; as, benn, better, atfein, nur, &c. Example. 3d) lann 3fynen ba$ @e(b nid>t feif?cn ; benn mem 35ruber serfangt tine ctyntidje ©umme, I am not able to lend you the money, for my brother requires a similar sum. 204 SYNTAX. b. It is employed in all sentences consisting of several parts ; as, (Stntge 536gel bletben nut etne lurje %eit in etnem 2 anbe ; man nennt ft'e 3ugj?6gel ; unter btefen QS&geln ft'nb toe 'iftacbttgatten, ©d>n>alben, $u= ftife, unb anbete ; btefe $6get jtefyen nacb mdrmcren £dnbem ; ft'e ttetrceiten bo. etnige 3eit; bet Stuping fdngt rctebet an; bann fommen btefe 5S6ge( rotebet jutucf; ft'e batten tfyte defter unb btuten 3unge au$, Some birds remain only a short time in one country : they are called birds of passage. Among these birds are nightingales, swallows, cuckoos, &c. Those birds go to warmer countries ; remain there for some time. When spring begins again those birds return ; they build their nests, and bring forth their young. The other points are used as in English, and need no particular explanation here. They are, bcr 5tpoftropf? or ba$ $ttr jung$$eid)en, ( ' ) ; ba$ SlnfufyrungSjeicfcen, („ ") ; ba$ 2Iu$rufuna,$jetc&en ( ! ); bie ^atenn)efe, toe Slammer, or ba$ £tnfcbaltttng$$etd)en ( [ ] ) ; bet ©ebanfenftrtd) ( — ). RULES EXPLAINING THE PREFIX tfet BEFORE VERBS. 1. It often strengthens the meaning of the verb; as, t»etbeffetn, to correct; serbletben, to remain; t?etef)ten, to respect one, to pre- sent one with; sermelben, to inform; perfyoffen, to expect; t>er- fytnbern, to prevent ; serbtenben, to dazzle, to blind. 2. It indicates motion, or destruction ; a. As, serleifyen, to lend, or to lend out, to grant ; serjagen, to drive away (transitive verbs) ; ttemnnen, to pass away (an intransi- tive verb). b. And as fetavbeiten, to consume by work ; oerbrennen, to con- sume by fire; serbacfen, to consume in baking, (transitive verbs) ; t?etbunjten or setbimften, to smoke away, to evaporate ; *?erf ocfyen, to consume in boiling ; pern?ad)fen, to lose by growing, (intransitive verbs). The verb tetrtnnen, to pass away, to elapse, signifies passing away of time and of things ; as, semnnen, to run off or out. 3. It indicates killing or dying. a. As, ttergiften, to kill by poison, (transitive verb). b. And as tfetbuvften, to die by thirst; i?etf)ttngern, to die by star- vation; pcrfommen, to starve, to go to ruin; tterfcf>mad)ten, to languish, (intransitive verbs). THE PREFIX vcr. 205 4. It attaches the meaning of deviating from, or losing the way, to the verb, both moral and physical; as, rerbrefcen, to distort; cerfufjrcn, to corrupt, to transport ; fid) t>ergef)en, to commit a fault; t>crgef)cn, to pass away; ft'cf) jjerfprecfcen, to promise marriage, to make a mistake in speaking; r-evfafyren, to proceed, to manage ; fid) tferfafyren, to drive the wrong way. Examples. (Moral) <£t wrbtef>t bie $3orte bet beiligen ©cbrift, He distorts the words of scripture. (Physical) ©ic t>evb»rel;te ben 9Ung, She bent the ring. (Moral) ©d)terf)tc @efe((frf>aft rerfu^rt un$, Bad company cor- rupts us. (Physical) Sic ttetfufyrten tfyre ©liter, They transported their goods. (Moral) (£r retting ftd>, He committed a fault. (Physical) £>ie ?3eit t>erget)t, Time passes away. (Moral) <£t fyat (id) mfprod)en, He has promised marriage. (Physical) ©ie tterfptad) fief) oft, She often made a mistake in speaking. (Moral) (£r fyat ntd)t gut nut mtt wrfafyren, He has not proceeded well with me. (Moral) a$ 9)Ubcben t>etmad)t ft'rf) fef>r, That girl pretends much. (Moral) (Et ttettennt mit ben SBeo,, He stops my passage. (Physical) £)a$ ^pfetb fyat ftd) serrennf, The horse has run wrong. (Physical) £)et ©dttnet ttetfanbete bie 2Mument6pfe, The gardener covered the flower-pots with sand. 7. It signifies that two things are combined in one ; as, setbtelen, to cover with boards ; setftlbern, to cover with silver, to plate, to pawn ; t>etfof)len, to sole ; mjtnnen, to cover with tin. Examples. (Physical) (£t ttetfttbette ba$ $upfer, He covered the copper with silver. (Physical) (£t mftlberte feme Ufyr, He pawned his watch. (Moral) 3cb setftlberfe tfym bie jpdnbe, I bribed him. 8. It refers to the uniting of persons or things ; as, ftd) wtbtnben, to connect, to unite one's self; uetftecbfen, to entwine; t>er= mtipfen, to combine, to join ; t?erfetten, to chain together ; t>er= fdjmeljen, to melt together, to consume by melting, (transitive verbs) ; ttetfcfymeljen, to be melted together (intransitive verb). 9. It shews that a thing is made of something, or that it exists by itself; as, mfofyten, to carbonize; ttetftetnetn, to petrify; t»er= gottetn, to deify, to adore ; uerbunfeln, to darken ; tterbtmnen, to thin, to dilute; t>erbtcfen, to thicken; perbretfacfyen, to triple, (transitive verbs); fetatmen, to grow poor; ttetftummen, to grow crooked, malten, to grow old; »etbletd)en, to grow pale, to expire. 10. It refers to the replacing or delaying of a thing ; as, setfafyren, to bring one conveyance to another; serpflanjen, to replant; t?etfef?en, to remove ; t>etfd)teben, to delay ; t>ettucfen, to move out of its place. The prefix jet signifies destruction of a thing whenever used. VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS AND ADVERBS. a. ab, an, auf, au$, bet, butd?, etn (in), nut, nacb, ubet, um, nntet, Mr, &u — fasten. b. fytn, fyet, roea,, sorbet, jutucf, (o$, jufammcn — gefyen. ( 207 ) THE EXERCISES. Principal rules: The verb fjaben governs the accusative case. Infinitives and past participles are placed at the end, except, when an infinitive follows the participle, the latter precedes the former. SJBir rcetben eine grope ©efettfcfyaft fyabcn, We shall have a large party. £)ie Dame fyat pafynfrfmierjen Qefyabt, The lady has had toothache. (£r f)Ctt 9ftiif)e gefyabr, micf) ju ftnben, He has had trouble to find me. SpaUn, to have. (p. 70.) They should have more sense. The gardener has success this year. Many people have too many children. I have not had any time. The carpenter will have four fine tables. Let us have con- fidence. The wealthy niece has had influence and friends. The foreigners will have admirers. Have they had work? Have courage. Thou wilt have had perseverance. The tradesman would have customers. We have had no peace. These women have had no shelter. They had a spaniel. The subjects will have the pri- vilege. The builders would have had the advantage. Sense, 3Setftanb, m. ; success, (£tfotg, m. ; people, Scute, m. or f. ; carpenter, jSimmetmann ; confidence, jSut-erficbt, f. ; wealthy, roof)(= tjabenb ; niece, 'D'hote ; influence, (Sinffajj, m. ; foreigners, 9lu$lanber, m. ; admirers, 53eref)rev, m. ; work, Sltbett, f. ; courage, Oftun), m ; perseverance, 25efyatrltd)Fett, f. ; tradesman, jpanbrcerfer, m. ; cus- tomer, $unbe, m. ; peace, 3uifye, f. ; woman, %tau, f. ; shelter, Dbbctd), n. ; spaniel, ^ubet, m.; subject, Untertfyan, m. ; privilege, 53orred)t, n. ; builder, SDaumeifter, m. ; advantage, reid) roerben, This evening I shall become rich. The preceding verbs in an inverted position. Next Friday I shall have visitors. Now I am tired. Probably they have become cautious. Many months ago the old lady had much company. Perhaps the laundress has become impatient. At present the weather is fine. The day after to-morrow I shall be at home. A short time since you have become much more punctual. Here I am. To-morrow I shall have time. Next, ndd)ften ; visitors, SSefud), m. 5 probably, roafyrfdjemltd) ; many months ago, sot tneten $)Ronaten ; at present, je$t ; fine, fd)6n ; the day after to-morrow, ubermorgen ; at home, ju £>aufe ; a short time since, feit einet ftirjen Sett ; much more punctual, *uel punWidjer. EXERCISES. 209 THE REGULAR ACTIVE VERB. (p. 75.) Principal rule. I work, I do work, I am working, is expressed in German l>y 3$ arbette, I work. I worked, I did work, I was working, is expressed by tcf) axbci.-- tete, I worked. I have worked, I have been working, is expressed by id) babe Qeaxbeitet, I have worked. The verbs I do or I am with the present participle are never used in connection with another verb. We shall admire the beauties of nature. The brave sailor should sail many (a) thousand miles. The parents of the disobedient children are acting prudently. They did fear the enemy. He hated his adversary. I have fulfilled my duties. He did not care for business. A good horseman would have managed his horse. The Russians will pay the money. Let him wait. The old sol- dier has killed many enemies. I would rather refuse pleasure than duty. The discoverer of this island will relate the history of his life. The unfortunate man has failed in business. They will refuse our invitation. He will tell the truth. I have been working day and night. He has finished his work. Of nature, bee Iftatut, f. ; many (a) thousand miles, tnelc taufenb Sfteilen ; are acting (act), fyanbeln ; they did fear (they feared), ftc futd)teten ; his adversary, feinen ©ecjncr ; to manage, bdnbtgen ; rather, Ueber ; than, aU ; the history of his life, fctne 2cbcn^cje(d)tditc ; has failed in business, fyat gefefytt; to tell, fagen ; I have been work- ing, ich babe gearbeitet ; to finish, beenbtgen. THE REGULAR PASSIVE VERB. (p. 77.) The young artist was admired. The good workmen are wanted. Your key will be fetched. The beggar was pursued. They were accused. The warriors will be killed. Ten thieves would have been captured. The breakfast had been prepared. The law- yers will be separated. The letters would have been opened. Their voices were heard. You are praised and esteemed. The poor have been assisted. The house will be sold. We were punished. The child has been baptized. Are wanted, n>erben gefucbt ; the lawyers, hie Untcrgeuteannxtfte ; their voices, ibrc ©timmen ; assisted, unfcrjh'Ujt. 210 EXERCISES. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (p. 59.) I have heard him, but I did not hear her. You looked pale. She did not observe us. I advised her, you, and them. We wished them hearty farewell. She is at church, and you and they will also go there. They will not find her. Where has he been so long? I can neither find him nor them. We shall leave it to them or to her. He will visit him, me, us, and you. Lend me (mit) a thaler. I shall forgive (it) you. Where am I ? Looked, fctf)en=auS ; to observe, beobac^ten ; hearty farewell, ein &erjU<$e$ 2eben>of)l ; at church, in bet ^ttcbe ; there, bafnn ; to leave, ttbetlajTen ; to visit, befucfyen ; to forgive, eg wtcjeben. The pronoun e$, it, takes the gender of the noun which precedes it, and is only used in German when a noun is of the neuter gender. Is the town large ? I find it very small. Did you see my collar ? It is not here. Where is it ? Bring me the ribband. Here it is. It is here. Is this silk blue ? It is green. Is it dear ? No, it is cheap. Shew me the hat. It is not here. Where is it? It is in the room. I have lost my purse. Who has found it ? It was yellow. Town, &tabt, f.; large, cjto£ ; very small, fefyr fletn; collar, $tct= cjen, m. ; ribband, 25cmb, n. ; silk, ©eibe, f. ; cheap, n>ot)(fet( ; to shew, jetcjen ; lost, wttoten $ purse, ©elbbeutet, m. The pronoun eS, it, is employed as an indefinite pronoun — 1 . When the expression there is is employed in English, and does not refer to place, but to existence ; e$ gtebt is used for the sin- gular and plural in German ; as, &$ gtebt in btefem Safyt ml $£ein, There is much wine this year. <£& cjtebt tnele ctrme £eute, There are many poor people. 2. When the adverb there refers to place and not to existence,' the pronoun e$ is employed in German, followed by bet or fyter; as, (£$ ift ein $ftctnn bet, There is a man. (£& ftnb Jipevten fyiet, There are gentlemen. 3. When in English the words they are, or are they, are used with the present or other tenses, es? ftnb, or ftnb e£, is used in German, when referring to existence ; as, <£$ ftnb 3fyre ©cfnffe unb feme ©djaafe, They are your ships and his sheep, ©tnb e$ 9utfTen obet ©pamer ? Are they Russians or Spaniards ? EXERCISES. 211 There is only one moon and one sun. There are Turks, Rus- sians, Swedes, and Italians. There are also Frenchmen and Poles. There is somebody at the door. There i> a slave who wishes to see his master. There are two Turkish ladies in the room. Are they young ladies ? How many are there ? There are six of them. What kind of flowers are those ? They are roses and forget-me- not. They are beautiful. Moon, «JRonb, m. ; sun, (Sonne, f. ; somebody, 3>?>nanb, m. or f. ; slave, ©c(a»e, m. ; who wishes, roelcfrer rounfc&t ; what kind of flowers ? m$ fur a^lumcn ? those, ba$ or etf ; forget-me-not, flSergijjmcinntdH. CONJUNCTIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 61.) Our friend will soon come back. I have seen your litttle girls. His garden is attached to her house. Their views differ. Her friend possessed formerly her property. His cousin knows my brothers and their nephew. Is it your or their business? Our neighbours have sold their horses. Thou hast spent thy money. It is his duty. His partner has paid your account. To come back, gurueffommen ; is attached to, Uegt an (tf>vcm) ; views, %tfid)ten, f. ; differ, finb t>erfd)teben ; possessed, befajj ; knows, fennt ; spent, auSgegeben ; duty, nung, £ ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 62.) Your hearth is not so strong as mine, but it will not be as expen- sive as his. The seat is neither yours nor hers. My grandson is not as young as yours, but he is as clever as hers. Was it your bird ? No ; it was not yours, but mine. My uncles are poorer than yours and his. That property is mine, and not thine. That stool is theirs, and not hers. The ox was mine, and not his. These hats are mine, thine, and his. Hearth, jperb, m. ; strong, ftarf ; as expensive, fo theuer ; seat, ©effet, m. ; grandson, (£nfel, m. ; poorer, drmer ; property, 33ermogen, n. ; stool, ©tufyldjen, n. ; these hats, bteft? Xputc. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 64.) This is the huntsman. This is my whip. This is her ribband. These are their birds. Are these your plants ? Whose picture is this ? Whose shillings are these ? This pond is very deep. This pear was too dear. This castle is not old. These rabbits are white. Are these candles good ? This water is clear. This horse-dealer is p2 212 EXERCISES. very rich. This room is small. Here are two apricots, try this (one). Such a noise is disagreeable. This is the same carriage. This kind of string will be too strong. Such a ringing of bells is unpleasant. That basin is full. Those irons were hot. Huntsman, 3dget, m. ; whip, ^eitfc^e, f. ; ribband, 23anb, n. ; birds, *8&ge(, m. ; plants, ^fTonjcn, f. ; picture, @cmd(be, n. ; pond, Stetcfc, m. ; pear, SSirne, f. ; rabbits, .ftcmincben, n. ; horse-dealer, ^fetbefydnbtet; m. ; to try, wrfud>en ; such a noise, ein folcfycS ©etdufd? ; this kind (of) biefe 21tt ; such a ringing of bells, ein folcfyeS ©elctute. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS FOLLOWED BY RELATIVE PRONOUNS. That cold bath (which) I have taken just now has agreed with me. That governess (whom) I have seen to-day is agreeable, but proud. That pupil (whom) you have instructed a week ago is nine years of age. That paper which I bought a few months ago is bad. Those gentlemen of whom you spoke so often have arrived from Spain. Here are those flowers (which) you have bought for me in the market. That foreigner whose sister you have heard yesterday is now dead. Give your money to those who are in want of it. Has agreed with me, ijt mir juttdgtid) geroefen ; a week ago, wt einer SBocfye ; a few months ago, sot etnigen Wlonakn ; have arrived, ftnb cmgefommen; from, au$; in the market, auf bem Wlatfte; to those who, benen, roelcfce ; to be in want of it, e$ notf)ig fyaben. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 66.) Here is the money which I owe you, and the coat which you have lent me. Our niece, who will go to Italy, is not married. His father, who is at Rome, is very benevolent. The man whom you have seen is the American ambassador. The flowers (which) I bought are red. Have you seen the houses which were burnt down yesterday ? Where is the butterfly which I admire so much ? To owe, fdmlbig fet)n ; lent, geliefyen ; to, na$ ; benevolent, mof)(tf)d= tig ; the American ambassador, bet amerifcmifdje ©cfanbte ; butterfly, ©cfcmetterUng, m. ; so much, fo fef>t. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 68.) Who is there ? Who has done that and what will be the conse- quence? What shall I give you? What will you say? To whom have you given the cloak? Who will answer for it? Whose handwriting is this ? Of whom have you heard it ? Whom EXERCISES. 213 did you like best? With whom do you live? Which is your handkerchief? Which are your children ? What shall we do ? What he has said is true. Of what is the cake made? Whv (to what end) do you use that cane ? There, ka; consequence, S'ol^, £> shall, fo(( ; cloak, Wlantel, in.; to answer for it, e$ mantrcorien ; did you like best, moducn Sic am ttebften ; with whom, bci n>cm ; to live, rcofmen ; which is, rcclc&etf ift ; which are, meltyS ftnb ; of what, moron ; why, rooju. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. (p. G9.) Somebody wishes to speak to me. Is nobody here? There has been nobody here yet. Everybody is now at home. There are a very few who are contented. Many others have done it. Do you know any one in London? I have seen no one, but to-morrow J shall meet with many. There is the man whom all admire! Have you paid some money this morning ? Have you heard any- body ? I did hear somebody ? Every one cares for himself first. Did she say any thing ? She said nothing. Each of them carries a table. He tried every thing. He believed it. They gave him bread. They wish me success. They employed him. To me, mtt mir ; there has, e*> ift ; there are, e£ cuebt ; a very few, nut SBcntge ; many others, tuele Slnbete ; to meet with many, $3iele fefyen ; all, Wie ; (some) money, @elb ; every one, 3?bet ; for himself, flit ftcb felbjt ; each of them, Seber or 3*?be son u)nen ; they, man ; success, Srfolg, m. numbers, (p. 53 — 58.) One volume contains ninety-two pages. Twenty-seven boys were playing on the property of one of my tenants. All the seven workmen shall be employed, except one. Thirty thousand thalers have been coined during the reign of one of the last kings of Prussia. The one inn is more patronized than twelve of the first hotels. The disobedient son was not allowed to live in one house with two of his cousins. Twenty-one adventurers have received more kindness than three of their friends could afford, and the twenty-first behaved badly. The fortune of nine of my friends has been divided among the first noblemen of the land. That one thou- sand is to be given to the ten thousand poor. In the year one thou- sand eight hundred and fifteen the battle at Waterloo was fought. The ten united themselves to destroy the two. The daughter of the Elector was about twelve or fourteen years old. The one piece of 214 EXERCISES. land is sixty-four feet long. On the twentieth of this month her thirty-first birthday will be celebrated. Firstly, we shall proceed with our business; and secondly, we will give an account of it. I have been at the watering place an hour and a half, and have spent the fourth part of my fortune. That field produces fourfold more than thirty-three can gain by hard labour. The ninth part of the people have been deprived of their homes. To contain, ftarf fct>n ; on the property, ouf bem Stgent^um, n. • tenants, sjJUetfcfeute ; except one, (£tnet auSgenommen ; of one, etneS ; of Prussia, j?on *preupen ; inn, 2BtrtMau$, n. ; was not allowed, burfte ntdjt ; with two of his cousins, mtt feinen jroet 33ettetn ; to afford, tetften ; behaved, bettug fid) ; among, untet (accus.) ; is to be given, foH gegeben roetben; fought, geliefert; about, ungefdfyr; celebrated, gefeiett ; to proceed, fovtfafyren ; an account, 9vecf>enfrf>aff, f. ; of it, batton ; at the watering place, an bem 35abebtt ; fourfold, $termal ; to gain, erubrtgen ; by, burcfy ; of the people, bet (Stnroofyner ; have been deprived of their homes, fyaben fyu ©coming tferloren. INDEFINITE NUMBERS. Every one will find difficulties to satisfy others. Everybody should endeavour to be happy. Each of your sheep is worth a great sum of money. That old paper is still of some value. I shall give you half as much for the trowsers as they are worth. All Spain and the half of Russia are armed. All nations live in peace. This tin is mixed with nothing but lead. Yesterday I re- ceived no good news. None of the apples were good. He has lost all his money. He is not to be found in all Paris. They have sold many kinds of silk. I have frequently been ill. To satify, ju entfytecben ; should endeavour, fottfe ftcb beffreben ; of money, ©elbeS ; still of some value, nod) son eintgem SBertfye, nod) <&iwa$ rcertfy; all Spain, @an§ ©panten ; the half of Russia, fyalb 3tujjfanb ; nothing but, 9?tcbt$ aU ; none, feinet ; all his, fetn ganjeS ; he is not to be found, 9ftan fann ifm nic^t fmben ; in all, in ganj ; kinds of, bitten con. THE AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. (p. 78.) 1. Safien, to let, to permit. The schoolmaster permits the first boy to go out. Do not per- mit them to have more liberty. I have permitted her to walk with the children. We have permitted our gardener to sell the flowers. EXERCISES. 215 Let her come here. Will you permit me to dine with you ? I shall not permit him to play. 2. gftuffen, to be obliged, (p. 80.) You must do your work better. They have been obliged to go away. I shall be obliged to give up my business in a month. We should have been obliged to get into debt if we had not been very sparing. Thou wilt be obliged to leave when he is coming. I was obliged to yield to him. To get into debt, in ©cfyutben ejevatfjen ; very sparing, fefyr fpctrfam ; to leave, roegjugefyen ; to yield to him, tbm nad>jugeben. 3. @otten, to be compelled, (p. 81.) They shall hear the music. All shall be prepared for death. You should give him a card of admission. The company has been compelled to pay your debts. The rich ought to have assisted the poor. You shall work. You ought to have mentioned it. 4. SSotfen, to be willing, (p. 82.) Are you willing to rise early this morning ? The general was willing to lose his life. Our friends have (had) been willing to take the child. I wished to stay at home. I will not go with you. What will you do ? 5. IDiirfen, to dare, to be allowed, (p. 83.) Where am I allowed to put the umbrella? The stranger will have been allowed to join that evening party. The young officers have been allowed to remain at the castle for eight weeks. The artists were not allowed to appear before the king. You are not allowed to speak. Here is no smoking allowed. Wherefore are you not allowed to play ? Where, roofytn ; to join that evening party, bee 5l&cnbaft betju roofynen ; at, auf ; for eight weeks, ad)t 2Bod)cn ; to appear, erfc&cinen ; is no smoking allowed, barf man ntaSt raucfyen. 6. $6nncn, to be able. (p. 85.) The rich are not always able to assist. I shall have been able to finish the outside of the building in a fortnight. The publicans were not able to sell any good porter. Are you able to see ? The Russian count will not be able to depart. I might perhaps be able to do you some service. I might have been able to save some money. He is able to walk ten miles a day. 216 EXERCISES. The rich, bie 3let$en ; the outside, bie Slupenfette, f. 5 in a fortnight, in tner jefm £agen ; not any, fetnen ; to do, erroetfen ; some service, einen £)tenft ; some money, etn>a$ @elb ; a day, beS £age$. 7. s»%n, to like. (p. 86.) I like a swan better than a wild goose. The young ladies liked their own dresses best. The birds would like to be released from their cages. Germans like England and English habits. Should you like to go with me home ? Better, iiebet ; best, am beflen ; would like, molten gern ; from their cages, au$ ifyren ^dftc^en ; Germans, bie £)eutfd)en ; habits, ©tt= ten ; should you like, medjten ©ie gern ; home, nad) Jjaufe. IRREGULAR VERBS. (p. 87.) First Class, (p. 88.) The candle was burning. He has brought good news. They will think of me. He does not know the stranger. They called me a miser. The ambassador sends me letters every week. He knew not who I was. Did you know it ? Second Class, (p. 88.) Command him to do it. The duchess commanded him to write to me. He has begun his work. She considered a long time about it. The valet tied the monkey to the chair. They will ask me for silver. I am threshing every evening. The servants have eaten too much meat. A thaler is worth three shillings. They have come too early. That coin does not sound. They were read- ing the newspapers. I have been singing an Italian song. Where has he been sitting ? My grandson died last night. He met me at the ball. They will never forget me. The wine-merchant forced me to drink wine. Third Class, (p. 92.) We remained at the hotel. She roasted the goose very well. The tailor kept his word. They were running through the flames. You rub your hands. He has advised me. The children called their father. To whom did you write ? He spit into my face. Will you pardon me ? Would you have remained here ? They will keep the money. Fourth Class, (p. 93.) Be more studious. The horse bit the groom. He resembles EXERCISES. 217 his parents. He seized the bird. The coat is hanging behind the door. He suffered many years. I have been riding through the park. Do you grind scissars well? Cut four slices of bread. They have quarrelled for two hours. I shall not withdraw. Groom, (Sta((fnecf)t ; his parents, feinen (£ltem ; scissars, bie Scbcc^ ren ; slices, ©dmitten, f. ; for two hours, jtwi ©tunben. Fifth Class, (p. 94.) My dog barks at night. He has bent the spoon. The fire was extinguished. The brave soldier fights for his country. The pigeon was flying into the fields. The beer has fermented enough. The serpent is creeping very fast. The servant-girl was milking the white cow. The flower smells very strong. The shepherd was shearing the sheep. He shoots a hare every week. The snow was melting. His leg will swell. He has lost his situation. The meat weighs twenty pounds. At night, beS Wafytt ; spoon, 26ffel, m. ; into the fields, ctuf bct£ getb ; very fast, fefyt fcfmett ; servant-girl, £)ienffrndben, n. ; situation, ©telle, f. Sixth Class, (p. 97.) The gentleman hired three servant- men for two months. They drive to London every Thursday. The man struck the woman. Those workmen were swearing. Split the wood into two pieces. That donkey carries a heavy load. You have grown much. He washes his hands and his face. Servant-men, 23ebtenten, m. $ for, ctuf ; workmen, SlrbeitSleute, m. ; much, fefyr ; face, @eftd)f, n. NEUTER OR INTRANSITIVE VERBS. (p. 98.) I have been waiting here for ten minutes. The sick sat before the street-door of the physician. We met him in the front of the house. Did you sleep last night ? Do not cry too loud. The visitors will soon awake. Children tell the truth. The policeman was standing behind the thief. One soldier was fighting with two enemies. They went from one place to another. Go home. Street-door, jpauStfyur, f. ; physician, %jt; in the front of the, oor bem ; from one place to another, eon etnem Orte jum cmbetn. REFLECTIVE VERBS. (p. 102.) I wonder to see you again. How are you to-day? When did he lay down? She wa< in a hurry. The farmer will be mistaken. £18 EXERCISES. I have inquired after them. I should lose myself in the darkness of the night. The count places himself at the head of the conspi- racy. Who could call himself happy before the hour of death ? They had sacrificed themselves for their country. He will distin- guish himself. Many have ruined themselves. I wonder, id) rounbre micb ; How are you ? 5Bte beftnben ©ie fid) ? to lay down, ft'd) ntebevkcjen ; to be in a hurry, fid? etten ; to be mis- taken, ftcf> irren; to inquire, ficf> ethmbtcjen ; to lose oneself, fkh t?er= lieren ; to place oneself, fid) ffetfen ; at the, an bit ; to call oneself, fid) nennen ; to sacrifice oneself, |td> cmfopfern ; to distinguish oneself, fid) au£$etd)nerfd)rcenben ; to break, jctbrccben ; for them, bafur ; much grief, tnelen Summer ; to destroy, jevntcf)tcn ; to expect, evwatten. EXERCISES. 219 COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERBS. (p. 107.) Send away this parcel immediately. The ambassador did not arrive sooner than myself. The messengers brought back the newspapers, and went away soon with provisions. Fetch back that person who ran away with the carpets. My brother-in-law went out this morning at five o'clock, and gave, up all hope of seeing his dying uncle. The matter was cleared up. I did not go out on purpose. He has not come back yet. They have attacked the enemy. He began to cough. They will take their friends along. We arrived at nine. How do you pass away your time ? I dress myself twice a-day. Than myself, ati id) ; with provisions, mit Sebettfmitteln ; brother- in-law, ©cfcroaget ; dying, ftevbenb ; matter, ©cute, f. ; was cleared up, rourbe aufeeftdrt ; on purpose, mit gfeifi ; to pass away, uibringen ; twice a-day, jroeimat be$ Staged. ADVERBS OF TIME. (p. 113.) Now he is sleeping. Let us go now. We have just now r re- ceived a letter from America. Will you speak to him already ? You have purchased lately many things. Formerly you often tra- velled together. Hitherto he has endeavoured to be kind to me. To-morrow we shall not visit anybody. The day after to-morrow we shall go hunting. He will return a week hence. Afterwards I told him to visit me. He w T ill soon be at home. They spoke to me frequently. She occasionally visits me. The court of justice has existed. I have often said that you are happy. At present I am engaged. ADVERBS OF PLACE. (p. 114.) Where shall I find you this evening. There he is working. Come hither. We went thither. You had better stop here. It is not far from my house. Are they up stairs or down stairs (above or below r ) ? He is not to be seen anywhere. He has friends everywhere. You had better, ©ie fottten (icber ; up stairs, oben ; down stairs, uru ten ; not anywhere, ntrgenbS ; everywhere, aUentbatben. ADVERBS OF NUMBER, ORDER, AND REPITITION. (p. 115.) Let us consider first, and then act. The physician visited the sick three times a-day. The servant told him again that I am waiting. He is never alone (by himself). 220 EXERCISES. ADVERBS OF QUALIFICATION. (p. 115.) They have done it badly. She instantly denied that the con- spiracy had been known to her. You may easily imagine that his expenses greatly exceed his income. The matter has actually ended for the best. My brother has justly suffered his punishment. To be known to her, tfyr befcmnt fet>n ; you may imagine, ©te f 6n= nen ftrf> benfen ; greatly, bei roettem ; to end for the best, jum 25eften ctuSf alien. ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION. (p. 116.) I really can say that I am surprised. I am indeed rejoiced that you have given up travelling. Surely you might have finished that business a few days ago. You have without any doubt exa- mined the prisoner, and he consequently has confessed. By all means he will return to-morrow. Surprised, etftaunt; travelling, ba$ 3tetfen; you might have finished, ©ie fatten beenbigen fatten ; by all means, alfetbtngS, a,an$ ADVERBS OF NEGATION. (p. 116.) Do not leave me in the time of trouble. The case is by no means lost. My books are neither here nor there. I am not at all satis- fied with my work. In the time, jur >3ett ; of trouble, bee £rubfale ; case, (Sctcfye, f. ADVERBS OF DOUBT. (p. 117.) Perhaps you will allow me to go with you to your aunt ? Very likely he was mistaken. You might perchance come here again. Very likely, roafytfcfyeinltd) ; might, fonnten ; perchance, jufdlliger SSeife. ADVERBS OF COMPARISON. (p. 117.) They all looked like dead persons. We have as much money as we want. He has acted exactly as if he were his guardian and benefactor. As sure as I am alive they have stolen our fowls. How can you compare them to such persons! If that colour were even as dark as this it would not please. He has in this manner lost his money. He speaks (as) if he were a Member of Parliament. Like, nxe ; as much, fa mel ; exactly as if, Qttabc fa ate wenn ; as sure as I am alive, fa uoafyv trf> lebe ; to such, nut fallen. EXERCISES. 221 MIXED PREPOSITIONS. (p. 119.) You should do it for the sake of (aus) friendship. Out of town stands a house which belongs to me. Instead of my coachman, you shall drive me. I have learned (o,ef)6rt) it from the merchant. Since the arrival of a friend of mine (metne£ ftreunbes) I am of a different (wrfcbtebencr) opinion. All ladies are friendly towards him (a,eo,en inn). By virtue of his situation he is able to do it. Opposite to the church (bet ^ttcfye gegenuber) lives a baker. The mountain seemed to rise (ftd> ju erfyeben) above the clouds. I am the whole day about (bet) him. They were walking about (umber) in the room. It was about (um) the same time when he came. We were walking together after (nacb bem) supper. After an absence of three years I returned in health (gefunb). These landscapes are painted after the most celebrated painters. He took up arms against him with the intention of killing (ui tobten) him. It is against my duty. That village is situated opposite the town. We went along the (tangS bcr) sea-shore. I have seen all towns along (an) the Baltic. Remain with (bei) us. I shall go with (nut) you. Provide your- self (rerfefyen <5ie fid)) with an umbrella. In the midst of (mitten in) his devotions he died. Amidst (roifyrenb) this confusion he shewed courage. The inn stands in the middle of the (mitten im) forest. The town lies at the foot of the mountain. He lives with ((£r trofmt bei) his father. He found them at play (beim ©piel). We walked through a beautiful avenue. I generally go to bed at eleven o'clock. He rose before daylight. They were fighting in front of the (vox ber) fortification. He has the advantage of (per) many others. The clergyman (^rebiger) lives in the back of the church (Winter ber $itd>e). He went behind the carriage. There is your writing-desk beneath (unter) the table. He was smoking below (unter) the bal- cony. It would be beneath (unter) your dignity. The girl is occupied down (unten) in the cellar. His gun was hanging beside him. There are many cherries beside these (aupet btefen). Beside you, nobody thinks so. Between these houses are fields and gar- dens. Many things may happen between to-day and to-morrow (*>on fyeute bi£ morgen). Put those papers between (ace.) the books. My property lies beyond the forest and the lake. This is (£)tefeS gefyt) beyond (ubet, ace.) my comprehension. The town beyond (jenfeitS) the river has been besieged by (burd)) the enemy. He went beyond (ubet — fyinauS) n ^ s order OBotfdptift). Take the horse by (an, dat.) the reins. Take an example of (an, dat.) him. He died by (burd)) the sword. He is a nobleman by (son) birth. He was fight- 222 EXERCISES. ing for honour and right. They will die for (au£) want of (an) employment. I shall go to Germany for the (jut) recovery of my health. I shall invite her only for (auf, ace.) three weeks. I shall visit your brother for your sake (3f)retrcea,en). I do not care (3d) frage 9Ud)t$) for (nad)) him. The ship was bound for (nad)) London. Shall I hear from you? She spoke of (*>on) me. He concealed it from (t?or) me. They did it from (auS) avarice. From time to time I receive letters from him. He treated me in (auf, ace.) a friendly manner. I find great advantage in it (babet). In (au$) contempt of (cjegen) him I shall destroy these letters. It terminated in (ju) his favour. He lived in my house. He was introduced into my family. He inquired into the (nad) ber) matter. My castle lies near (nafye an, dat.) the town. His likeness is hanging near (neben) the door. A man of (t>on) bad character is capable to (fur) bad deeds. I am always thinking of (an, ace.) you. He complains of (itber, ace.) his idleness. His horse is blind of (an, dat.) one eye. This wine tastes of (nacb) the cask. Of (oor, dat.) all things do that first. He died of (t>or) hunger. He retired from (son) the stage. He trod on (auf, ace.) my foot. The binder sent me the books on (am) Monday. I have compassion on (mit) him. On (bet) my return I did not find him at home. It is made on (nacb) a new plan. A carpet lay spread on (uber, dat.) the floor. This (XHefeS) is quite out of (au$ ber) fashion. Put the stockings out of (jut) sight. He leaped over the bridge. They walked round the town-hall (urn ba$ SRat^auS fyerum). This is the second year since his death. He rushed through the flames. I am accustomed to (an) frugality. I shall do it out of (au$) kindness to (cjegen) you. He always turned his eyes to (auf, ace.) her. He is related to (mit) him. Let us go to work (anS 583er!). CONJUNCTIONS. (p. 137.) When I came to London I went out in order (um) to see the Queen and Prince (ben ^rtnjen) Albert. Whilst my neighbour was sleeping I was working (arbeitete id>). He lent me his gun that I might shoot a partridge and a pheasant. I took my pistol in order to shoot the mad dog. As I am obliged to go to London, I spoke to him before. Before I go home I shall buy a new stick. I went home after having bought (nacbbem id) gefaufr fyatte) a pair of shoes. It is indifferent to me whether Mr. A. is coming or not. Although I only drink water I am still in health (gefunb). I was ill ; still (bennod)) I went out driving (fufyt td> au$). It is fine EXERCISES. >>..) weather, therefore I shall take a walk into the fields (auf ba& $elb). If(n>enn) that be (tft) the case I shall be glad. We hoped, but (allein) it was in vain. He sought his sister, but (abet) he did not find her. Be silent until he speaks. I caution you, in order that (bamit) you may be more sparing. He has a family, therefore (barum) I shall not dismiss him. He is young; on the other hand (fyingecjen) she is old. No sooner (faum) was I at home, than I been me ill. Not only herself (fie), but also her friends (Sreunbtnncn) came to me. Since (fettbcm) he is dead I have no friends. WILLIAM WATTS, CROWN COURT, TEMPLE BAR. 0* 1830 '.WATERSTRir,' ;j!!i!!i;!!f:!!;iii!V!ij:!!'!!:i i!i ; i;!!!iii!i!!i;!JJIii!i